Home

SH7729R E8000S Emulator HS7729REBH81H User`s Manual

1. 5 Hardware Register Read Write amp System ID Check Stat ssid ONM A A Free Lira upicneck Sar cen eRe NC ENE LE NNEEUNIE TENONERN C NM A Figure 3 23 Status Bar during the HDI Initiation A message box will be displayed to ask whether to initiate the diagnostic program figure 3 30 when Diagnostic Test Program has been selected in the component selection dialog box when the HDI was installed Click the Yes button to initiate the diagnostic program For details refer to section 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic Program Link up appears on the status bar when the HDI and the emulator have successfully started up A ae ee FE Ine 7 Figure 3 24 Status Bar at the HDI Initiation Completion When HDI is started for the first time after installation the following message box will be displayed The same message box is not displayed again Are you sure you want to modify your CPU Operating Mode settings This will cause your emulator to be reinitialised Figure 3 25 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 1 Click Yes to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box In this dialog box the operating mode of the emulator can be modified When the emulator cannot be initiated correctly the following message box will be displayed Click Yes to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box The operating mode must be modified 59 RENESAS HDI Change the C
2. E8000 Load Files Figure 3 17 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box Click the OK button Installation of the system programs to the flash memory of the emulator station will commence The file name will be displayed in the status bar as each file is installed Click Cancel to return to the Select Install dialog box 54 RENESAS When the registration is complete the System Install Completed dialog box will be displayed System Install Completed Ea E8000 System File Install was completed Press OK button to exit the application SYSTEM FILE nnm e SHEWSHdiS E 80005 rooc S S TEMA E S000 sys M CONFIGURATION FILE e SHEW SHdiS SE 800054 ooi S YSTEMS Moc Shonhoo sys FIRMWARE FILE e SHE W SHdiS SE 80005 occ S 7 S TEMS 00AShdebox sys m DIAGNOSTIC FILE e SHEW HdiSSE 80005 ox SYS TEMS 0 Diag sys Figure 3 18 System Install Completed Dialog Box Click the OK button The installation of the system program to the flash memory of the emulator station will be completed and the ESI will terminate Turn off the emulator s power switch 55 RENESAS Next Custom Install will be described When the Select Install dialog box has been displayed select the Custom Install radio button The E8000 Load Files dialog box will be displayed Add or modify files E8000 Load Files x Only Checked kind of files are installed
3. ceeceeseecesreeeneecenreeeneeeeee 152 Figure 5 25 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Data Page eee eee eeeeeeseeceeeeeeneecenreeeneeeeee 154 Figure 5 26 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Bus State Page cee ceeeeesseceeneeceeeeeeneeees 155 Figure 5 27 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Probe Page ce ceeceesseceeeeeseceeneeeneeeeeee 156 Figure 5 28 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Interrupt Page ee eeeceeeeeseeceeneeeneeeeeee 157 Figure 5 29 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Count Page 0 cee eeeeesceceeeeeeneeceneeeeneeeeee 159 Figure 5 30 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Delay Page 00 0 cee eeeeseeceeeeeeneeceneeeeneeeeee 160 Figure 5 31 Condition Dialog Box History Page 0 cee eeeceeeseeeeseeceereeeeeceeeeeeneeceeeeeneeeeee 161 Figure 5 32 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page 0 0 eee eeeeeeseeceeeceeneeceeeeeeneeceeeeeneeeeee 162 Figure 5 33 Configuration Dialog Box Hardware Sequential Break 0 eee ee eeeeee eens 164 Figure 5 34 Break Dialog Box after Setting a Hardware Sequential Break 165 Figure 5 35 Condition Dialog Box History Page 0 cee eescceseeeeseeceereeeeeceeeeeeneeceereeeneeeeee 167 Figure 5 36 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page oe eee eeeeeeseeceeeceeneeceereeeneeceeeeeneeeeee 169 Figure 5 37 Example Display of the Status of a Hardware Sequential Break Condition 170 Figure 5 38 Break Dialog Box Condition U Page
4. Figure 5 90 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Table 5 101 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Options Option Description Nest level Specifies the number of function call nestings for display in the Stack Trace window Max 64 Display symbol Specifies symbols other than functions for display Specifies whether parameters and local variables will be displayed Display Radix Specifies the radix for the display in the Stack Trace window To refer to the online help system press the F1 key after moving the cursor to the Stack Trace window 250 RENESAS 5 13 Auto Update Memory Function 5 13 1 Overview In an auto update of memory the display of the contents of the specified area of memory is refreshed at intervals of 500 ms while the user program is being executed The function has the following features Automatically updates with an interval of approximately 500 ms the display of the specified memory contents while the user program is being executed A color may be applied to indicate the contents that have been modified since the last update of the display Allows the setting of a maximum of 8 points auto update memory items each running for a maximum of 32 bytes Allows the display of memory contents in ASCII bit byte word longword or single precision floating point formats with or without a sign and in decimal or hexadecimal The following dialog boxes are used to set items for the auto
5. f Subroutine time measurement mode 1 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 C Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Name _main Figure 5 75 Performance 1 Dialog Box General Page Table 5 80 Options on the General page Option Description Subroutine time measurement mode 1 Selects subroutine measurement mode 1 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 Selects subroutine measurement mode 2 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Selects subroutine measurement mode 3 Name Sets a name for the address range to be measured 227 RENESAS b Address Page Set conditions for the address range on this page The format varies according to the subroutine measurement mode selected on the General page The format of the Address page is shown below When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 is selected Set the start and end addresses General Address Time Out Count r Subroutine Address Stat H0 od P P_MAP Figure 5 76 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page Table 5 81 Options on the Address page When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 is Selected Option Description Start Sets a start address as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets an end address as a numerical or symbolic value Ei Displays the Input Function Range dialog box in which a start address is entered as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box th
6. Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select ISA Driver as the component Restart the host computer When Using the LAN Adapter Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select E8000 LAN Driver as the component Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn on the LAN adapter Select SH7729R E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs and start the LAN Adapter Configuration Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration Turn off the LAN adapter and connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn on the LAN adapter Then LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed Note When using a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use 40 LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host computer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration RENESAS 3 4 3 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows 2000 Support of the PC Interface Board The PC interface board is not supported in Windows 2000 When Using the PCI Interface Board Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select PCI Card Driver as the component Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch Install the PCI bus interface board into the host computer Turn on the hos
7. m SYSTEM FILE Vv e SHEWA H diS SE 8000S S xxx SYSTEMS M CONFIGURATION FILE Ti gt FIRMWARE FILE IV e SHEWA HdiSSE 8000S 700A SYSTEMS OK PME Ls Hy ie a is ae C Cancel Help Quit Figure 3 19 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box Each check box corresponds to the combo box to its right Select the check box that corresponds to the files you wish to install Place the cursor on the combo box and click the Browse button When the Browse button is clicked the File Selection dialog box will be displayed Select the files to install If you decide not to install a file do not select the check box When the check box is not selected which means it is invalid the file will be grayed out and will not be installed Click the OK button The system program will be installed in the flash memory of the emulator station The file name will be displayed in the status bar as each file is installed From here the description of Custom Install is the same as that of Auto Install Click Cancel to return to the Select Install dialog box For details on the error messages displayed during ESI operation refer to Troubleshooting in the ESI help file For help on the ESI select SH7729R E8000S Emulator Software Tools System Install Tool from the Start menu 56 RENESAS 3 6 Initiating the HDI and Checking the Emulator The next step is to check that the emulator and the HDI are initiat
8. CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Check all components with the component list after unpacking the emulator 2 Never place heavy objects on the casing Observe the following conditions in the area where the emulator is to be used Make sure that the internal cooling fans on the sides of the emulator must be at least 20 cm 8 away from walls or other equipment Keep out of direct sunlight or heat Refer to section 1 2 Environmental Conditions Use in an environment with constant temperature and humidity Protect the emulator from dust Avoid subjecting the emulator to excessive vibration Refer to section 1 2 Environmental Conditions 4 Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses Before using the emulator s power supply check its specifications such as power voltage and frequency When moving the emulator take care not to vibrate or otherwise damage it After connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 3 Preparation before Use Supply power to the emulator and connected parts after connecting all cables Cables must not be connected or removed while the power is on For details on notes during emulation such as differences between the emulator and the SH7729R refer to appendix E Notes on Debugging
9. Figure 5 19 Break Dialog Box Sequence Page Table 5 27 Sequence Page Options Option Description Sequence point Displays the specified pass point addresses Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 7 Settings for pass point addresses 1 to 7 R Setting of the reset point address The pass point and reset point address settings are displayed as follows lt pass point address gt lt number of passes gt lt address space gt The number of passes indicates the number of times the pass point or reset point was passed while the program was being executed However counting re starts from 0 when the number of passes exceeds D 16383 Cleared on the next execution lt address space gt is displayed as follows Physical Space Virtual Space ASID D xxx Edit Allows the user to modify the software sequential breakpoint settings selected in the Sequence point list box Clicking Edit opens the Break Point Sequence dialog box Reset All Clears all software sequential breakpoint settings in the Sequence point list box 144 RENESAS Click the Edit button to open the Break Point Sequence dialog box Specify pass point addresses in the order of Address 1 to Address 7 in Sequence Point and address memory spaces in Memory Area when the specified pass points are executed in order from Address 1 to Address 7 the break condition will be satisfied Also specify a reset point address i
10. eeeeecsseceecseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeereneenseenseenaes 241 5 11 1 The Allocation of Emulation Memory 0 0 eee ceecseecseesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenseenaes 241 S112 MP MAP Traits ations ioc Sesises avec avs a eek boven eee ae ees 243 5 11 3 Programs which use the MMU senreste a e S 247 5 11 4 Notes on Accessing Memory 000 eeeecceseceseceseceseceecaeecaeseaeseeeeeeeeseesseenseenaees 247 Stack Trace PUnct OM scsssiesecsaesscecsebienscvacy e e aa ad gevs cnses seabed puvecbbenter apes Oe REEE E 249 Auto Update Memory Function 0 0 eceecceescesecesecesecssecsaecseecaeeeaeseeeseeeeeseseenseenseenaes 251 DVB POVERVICW 1e E E ie aa E Robeawete neo Biante A was 251 5 13 2 Setting Auto update Memory 00 ee ee eeceeecesecesecneecaeecaeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenseenseenaes 252 3 13 3 Displaying the Memory seese esensina eooo a T nN eii 253 Controlling and Checking the State of the MPU ssssessseeesserseesesereresreerssrerrererrenresrreresre 256 5 14 1 Selecting Clock for the MPU siriene en ienes e E EEEa 256 5 14 2 Checking the I O Signals sseeeseeeesseeseseseseeesrseesrssrertserrenrerteerssrrersserrenresrenesee 256 5 14 3 Checking the Power Supply and Clock State of the User System 257 Input Formatia s tat oie ea A E E E AE ee i RA 258 D215 4 Entering Masks ensar neno e e E A A acaeon ti estaeneneees 258 Source Window Expanded Function 00 ceeceesceceseceececeseeeeseeceeeeeneeceeeessneecsaeeseneecses 259 RENESAS 516 1
11. 00000000 and H 003FFFFF respectively set the Setting combo box to EMULATION AREA 32 bit and click the OK button 78 RENESAS The Memory Mapping dialog box will now show the ranges to which emulation memory is allocated Figure 4 6 Memory Mapping Dialog Box at Setting e Click the Close button of the Memory Mapping dialog box to close the dialog box For details on the allocation of emulation memory refer to section 5 11 1 Emulation Memory Allocation Function Note When the optional memory board is installed emulation memory can be allocated in an 8 Mbyte unit 79 RENESAS 4 5 Downloading 4 5 1 Downloading the Sample Program Download the sample program in the ELF DWARF2 format to be debugged e Select Load Program from the File menu The Load Program dialog box is displayed e Click the Browse button The Open dialog box will be displayed e Select the file TUTORIAL ABS and click the Open button Load Program x M Verify Cancel File name C HEW Hdi5 E 8000S voooc tutorial tutoriaND ebu x Browse T Load only debugging information T Load stack information file SNI file Figure 4 7 Load Program Dialog Box e Click the Open button in the Load Program dialog box The following dialog box will be displayed when the program completes loading In the dialog box the address where the program was loaded is displayed Module name D SHEW SHdiS
12. Control Panel from the Start menu Double click the Add Remove Programs icon Select Adobe Acrobat Reader x x from the list of applications installed on the tabbed page Install Uninstall and click the Add Remove button Follow the directions on the screen 69 RENESAS 70 RENESAS 4 1 Section 4 Tutorial Introduction The following describes the main functions of the HDI by using a sample program for sorting random data For more complicated usage refer to section 5 Emulator Functions Here the user system is not connected The sample program performs the following actions e The main function generates 10 pieces of random data to be sorted e The sort function generates the array and inputs the random data in the array and sorts the random data in ascending order e The change function inputs the array generated by the sort function and changes the data in descending order Table 4 1 shows the configuration of the sample program Table 4 1 Configuration of the Sample Program Item No Description of File File Name and Directory 1 HEW workspace HDI installation folder TUTORIAL TUTORIAL HWS 2 DWARF2 type load HDI installation folder module file TUTORIAL TUTORIAL DEBUG TUTORIAL ABS 3 S type load module HDI installation folder file TUTORIAL TUTORIAL DEBUG TUTORIAL MOT 4 Source file main HDI installation folder TUTORIAL TUTORIAL TUTORIAL C program Notes 1 TUTORIAL ABS can be e
13. Load Motorola S type files with CR and LF codes H 0DOA at the end of each record When Prohibit R W on the fly is specified in the Configuration dialog box memory access by the HDI will be inhibited during user program execution Therefore if the user program is executed with Prohibit R W on the fly specified contents of memory will not be displayed when scrolling through the Memory window or Disassembly window Do not scroll through the Memory or Disassembly windows by dragging the scroll bar while the user program is executing This generates many memory read operations and the user program is suspended until these memory operations have been completed Memory comparison which appears to be available as Compare in the Memory menu is not supported The test function which appears to be available as Test in the Memory menu is not supported When the Memory window is updated during emulation only the block on a 256 byte boundary that contains the modified address will be updated Other memory contents will not be updated RENESAS 5 12 Stack Trace Function The stack trace function displays the history of function calls In the stack trace function contents of memory are displayed in the Stack Trace window The Stack Trace window can be displayed by selecting Stack Trace from the View menu Value fune3 short Ox00000094 param 3 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fd8 short local 3 D 3
14. RENESAS 1 2 Environmental Conditions CAUTION Observe the conditions listed in table 1 1 when using the emulator The following environmental conditions must be satisfied otherwise the user system and the emulator will not operate normally The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Table 1 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifications Temperature Operating 10 to 35 C Storage 10 to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 to 80 RH no condensation Storage 35 to 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max AC input power Voltage 100 V to 240 VAC 10 Frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption 200 W Ambient gases There must be no corrosive gases present RENESAS Details of the operating environment are listed in table 1 2 Table 1 2 Operating Environment Item Operating Environment Host computer IBM PCs and compatible machines that contain Pentium processors 300 MHz or faster is recommended Operating system Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 or Windows 2000 Minimum memory capacity for 64 Mbytes more than twice the size of the load module is operation recommended Display Resolution better than 800 x 600 SVGA is recommended Empty space in a hard disk Disk capacity required for installation 40 Mbytes or more Take the swap area into account when ensuring that there is enough space on your system more than four tim
15. Setting BP Collins g cose escazs cu desdhceee dt snes dee sesestegses cng evoch des Stan EIERE ere 259 DECHOMG COMPA LIME Sa cc cecth ciyescnes covzaisds ae econdoaxaeansiaeca tsaeaeeyaateeeasaecemee ee 261 6 1 List Format 23 05 ak ancien heh ea hele de ea nes 261 GAT Description ssns teei en oa en e e N aevevcepaasaeate edges E aes Se 261 6 1 2 F riiate enea er Miia e e E aches eee eee iar AUP ed 261 6 173 Parameter Type Mpt oen a E E E N 262 GLA Examples e ea a eee E a ee ie 262 6 2 List of Commands si r reee r e aa a a a a anase en er 262 6 2 1 Hardware Break Command BCS BCC BCD BCE ssssssssseessssesssseseerssssssee 267 6 2 2 Internal Break Commands BCUS BCUC BCUD BCUE ee 273 6 2 3 Hardware Sequential Break Specification Command CSQ ecesseeeereeeneeees 278 6 2 4 Software Break Command BP BC BD BE cccceceesseeeeeeeeenenseaeees 280 6 2 5 Software Sequential Break Command BSS BSC BSD BSE eee 284 6 2 6 CHECK CHECK ssccec ceacesnsesiacicercstensec a A ean abe anion E ETRE 288 O 2 7 CLOCK CR scien aides Relea ee ee Ov ek WU pene eens 290 6 28 DEVICE PYPE DEY seccssecuavdecsst a E Ena TEA A n 292 6 2 9 END END ei Sunes llevan EE ead ee A Sak AAS RE ATERT 293 6 2 10 EXECUTION_MODE EM 0 cccccccccssscesscecsseceescecsecesececaeeeseeeceseseeseeceaeeeeaeeces 294 0 211 GOLOPTION GR va ceeded ethic Beil ae ee A 297 22122 TID IE de acd T E SE ENEE E
16. Standby The MPU is in its standby mode TOUT A xxxxxxxx The value displayed is the value on the address bus The bus termination period has exceeded the time specified as Bus timeout in the Configuration dialog box in the Execution Mode1 page VCC Down The voltage on V Q is below 2 65 V The MPU is not operating correctly this message is only displayed when the user clock has been selected WAIT A xxxxxxxx The WAIT signal is low The value on the address bus is displayed This is not displayed during refresh cycles BREQ The BREQ signal is low Note This includes the case in which the memory is not accessed via the external bus due to the use of acache memory 134 RENESAS 5 4 5 4 1 Step Functions Step Execution Several types of step execution are available and are shown in table 5 23 Table 5 23 Step Execution Type Executing each instruction of a function as a single step Description Executes each line or instruction as one step When a function is called the call is executed and execution stops at the first line or instruction of the called function Procedure Click the Step button Select Step In from the Run menu Executing all instructions of a function as a single step Executes each line or instruction as one step When a function is called all instructions of the called function are executed as a single step and execution stops at th
17. System 7706 shcnf770 sys Control program for the SH7706 E8000S emulator System 7706 shdct29r sys Configuration file for the SH7706 E8000S emulator System 7706 diag sys Diagnostic and maintenance program for the SH7706 emulator Drivers Pci 95 pcihei inf Setup information PCI For Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pci 95 pcihei vxd Virtual driver PCI For Windows 98 and Windows Me 18 RENESAS Table 2 1 Contents of CD R cont Directory Name File Name Contents Notes Drivers Pci Nt pcihei sys System file PCI For Windows NT 4 0 Drivers Pci 2000 pcihei sys System file PCI For Windows 2000 Drivers Pci 2000 pcihei2k inf Setup information PCI For Windows 2000 Drivers lsa Nt emulator sys System file ISA For Windows NT 4 0 Drivers Pcmcia 95 ulepcc inf Setup information PCMCIA For Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pcmcia 95 ulepcc vxd Virtual driver PCMCIA For Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pcmcia nt ulepccnt sys System file PCMCIA For Windows NT 4 0 Drivers Pcmcia 2000 ulepcc2k sys System file PCMCIA For Windows 2000 Drivers Pcmcia 2000 ulepcc2k inf Setup information PCMCIA For Windows 2000 Manuals Japanese HS6400DIIW5SJ pdf Hitachi Debugging Interface PDF documents a user s manual in Japanese Manuals Japanese HS7729REBH81HJ p SH7729R E8000S emulator PDF documents df 7 user s manual in Japanese Man
18. User system BACK BREQ DREQ1 DREQO IRQO IRLO IRQ1 IRL1 IRQ2 IRL2 IRQ3 IRL3 IRQ4 NMI WAIT RESETM RESETP Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 3 RENESAS 343 SH7729R SH7706 User system CY2308 O 1kQ SN74CBTLV3126 A B OE EPM7128 AETC144 SN74CBTLV3126 A B EPM7128 GE AETC144 LVTH16373 EPM7128 AETC144 LVTH16374 le EPM7128 LVTH16244 vtH16374 AETC144 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 4 344 RENESAS SH7729R SH7706 User system RD EPM7128 AETC144 WE0 DQMLL WEO DQMLL WE1 DQMLU WE WE1 DQMLU WE EE CAGE GET EPM7128 WE2Z DAMUL ICIORD PTKE U AETC144 WE3 DQMUU ICIOWR PTK7 A0 to A25 AO to A25 LVTH16374 DO to D31 gt D0t0D31 LVTH16652 H CE2A PTE4 re CETE CE2B PTE5 EPM7128AETC144 CE2B PTES 3 VCC 3 VCC 1kQ 1kQ LVTH16373 CA AUDSYNG gt AUDSYNC LVTH16244 AUDCK LVTH16244 AUDATAO to 4 p AUDATAO to 4 LVTH16543 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 5 345 RENESAS SH7729R SH7706 PTJ1 PTJ4 PTJ5 PTE6 PTES 1OIS16 PTG7 ADTRG PTH5 ANO PTLO AN1 PTL1 AN2 PTL2 AN3 PTL3 AN4 PTL4 AN5 PTL5 AN6 DA0 PTL6 AN7 DA1 PTL7 MCS0 PTCO PINTO MCS1 PTC1 PINT1 MCS2 PTC2 PINT2 MCS3 PTC3 PINT3 MCS4 PTC4 PINT4 MCS5 PTC5 PINT5S MCS6 PTC6 PINT6 MCS7 PTC7 PINT7 WAKEUP PTD3 RESETOUT PTD2 IRLSO PTFO PINT8 IRLS1 PTF1 PINT9 IRLS2 PTF2
19. e When the user specifies virtual for parameter lt memory_area gt and does not specify an asid value for parameter lt asid gt the emulator will enable virtual memory access at command input to the virtual space corresponding to the specified ASID value e When the user sets normal to parameter lt memory_area gt the address value at the command input is converted as follows When the emulator can use the VP_MAP table the emulator translates addresses by using the VP_MAP table However the emulator translates addresses outside the VP_MAP table range by using the MMU state at the command input When the emulator cannot use the VP_MAP table the emulator translates addresses by using the MMU state at command input 302 RENESAS 6 2 15 Performance Command PS PC PA e Setting PERFORMANCE _SET PS e Cancellation PERFORMANCE CLEAR PC e Display PERFORMANCE_ANALYSYS PA Command syntax and parameters e Setting ps channel lt channel_number gt lt modeopt gt lt nameopt gt lt startopt gt lt endopt gt lt timeopt gt lt countopt gt e Cancellation pe channel lt channel_number gt e Display pa lt display_mode gt Parameter Type Description lt channel_number gt Numeric Sets the performance channel number from 1 to 8 lt display_mode gt Keyword Sets the display mode of program execution state address Displays subroutine address list count Displays execution time and execution count in numeric g
20. race Condition race Condition A6 A7 A8 Disable Disable Disable type range address H 10027c to H 100304 type stop data H 11111111 prb 0101 9 Tocancel conditions set as Trace Condition B on channel 2 TAC B CHANNEL 2 10 To cancel all settings for Trace Condition A TAC A 11 To set Trace Condition B as a sequential point at an address bus value of H 100000 when a hardware sequential condition has already been set TAS B CHANNEL P ADDRESS H 100000 12 To set Trace Condition A as a reset point at an address bus value of H 300000 when a hardware sequential condition has already been set TAS B CHANNEL R ADDRESS H 300000 318 RENESAS 13 To display the settings when the hardware sequential condition has been set TAD B Display gt TAD B Trace Condition B Sequential Enable 1 address H 100000 2 address H 200000 R address H 30000 14 To clear the settings when the sequential trace stop condition has been set for Trace Condition B TAC B Notes After the condition is satisfied execution may continue several instructions before it stops 2 Address conditions must be set for the external area If they are set in the internal memory area or an internal I O area the break will not occur 3 For data bus condition the valid bus position or address bus value will be changed depending on the data bus width and an endian in the memory area For the relationship between the
21. 2A 50 60Hz D C B A Figure 2 3 Emulator Station Rear Panel RENESAS A B C D a b d e f g h Optional board slot Control board slot Trace board slot Device control board slot Power switch Fuse box AC power connector PC interface cable connector Host interface switches Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN1 Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN2 Trace cable mis insertion inhibiting seal CN1 Trace cable mis insertion inhibiting seal CN2 For installing the optional board expansion slot For installing the control board For installing the trace board For installing the device control board depends on the target device Turning this switch to I input supplies power to the emulator emulator station and evaluation chip board Contains a 100 V to 240 V AC power supply fuse 250 V 3A For a 100 to 240 V AC power supply For the PC interface cable that connects the host computer to the emulator station A PC interface board ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus or LAN adapter can be connected Marked PCIF For selecting the host interface Do not change the settings Marked SW1 For trace cable 1 that connects the emulator station to the evaluation chip board For trace cable 2 that connects the emulator station to the evaluation chip board Prevents a trace cable from being inse
22. Address numeric lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Specifies mask value numeric lt dataopt gt Specifies a data condition Specification data lt data gt lt data gt Specifies a data value numeric lt data gt corresponds to the data value of the data bus D31 to DO Always specify a 32 bit data size To search through the trace information using a smaller data size specify a mask value lt r wopt gt 324 Specifies read or write condition To search through the trace information for read cycles direction read To search through the trace information for write cycles direction write RENESAS Parameter Description lt prbopt gt Specifies an external probe signal condition To specify an external probe signal condition prb lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit specification 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x roth A il 4 3 2 1 PRB number When is specified the condition applies for any and all bits lt nmiopt gt Specifies an NMI signal condition To search through the trace information when the NMI signal is high nmi hi To search through the trace information when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt irlopt gt Specifies IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 signal conditions To specify IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 signal con
23. Also the USER PROGRAM being debugged will be LOST 1 Connecting the cables for tracing trace cables to the emulator Connect the trace cables to the emulator before connecting it to the HS7729REBH81H board 2 Connecting trace cables to the evaluation chip board Connect the cables to the evaluation chip board s connectors on the HS7729REBH81H board Make sure that the interface connector names CN1 CN2 and CN3 on the trace cables emulator and evaluation chip board all match The trace cables and evaluation chip board s interface connectors are color coded red for CN1 yellow for CN2 and blue for CN3 to prevent incorrect connection 3 Connecting the power cable to the evaluation chip board Connect power cable CN7 of the device control board to connector CN7 on the evaluation chip board The CN7 connector has a special shape to prevent incorrect connection Align the cable to the connector correctly 359 RENESAS CAUTION The screws for fixing the trace cables and evaluation chip interface connectors in place are also color coded as shown below to reduce the risk of their being inserted into the wrong places Colors to identify trace cables CN1 Red CN2 Yellow CN3 Blue GND cable tllt um CN3 ZNS 5 Trace cable connectors Top view of the HS7729REBH81 INY CNI Red CN2 Yellow board CN3 Blue Connect the trace cables to the connectors correctly by holding the HS7729REBH81H board by ha
24. Break Condition U1 and U2 wees 181 Trace Acquisition Modes a E E trocetens bisa A E S 185 Trace Stop Conditions eiie p a E RT E S ane 187 RENESAS Table 5 60 Table 5 61 Table 5 62 Table 5 63 Table 5 64 Table 5 65 Table 5 66 Table 5 67 Table 5 68 Table 5 69 Table 5 70 Table 5 71 Table 5 72 Table 5 73 Table 5 74 Table 5 75 Table 5 76 Table 5 77 Table 5 78 Table 5 79 Table 5 80 Table 5 81 Table 5 82 Table 5 83 Table 5 84 Table 5 85 Table 5 86 Table 5 87 Table 5 88 Table 5 89 Table 5 90 Table 5 91 Table 5 92 Table 5 93 Table 5 94 Table 5 95 Table 5 96 Table 5 97 Specifiable Trace Stop Conditions ee eee cee cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeerensecesecsaeeaecsaeeneeens 187 Condition A B C Page Options 0 eee ee ceeecesecese esse cee caeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeensees 189 Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages 190 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Pages eee eeceecesecesecesecsseceeeeaeeeneeeeeees 191 R nge Trace Conditions mereseire eresi ie aee E E ESENES EE EEEE E TENi 194 Specifiable Range Trace Conditions eee csecseeeeeeeeceseeeeeeesecesecaecnaesaecneeens 195 Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages 195 Bus Trace Group Box Options eee eeeeeeesceeeeeseceseceaeceaecsaecneesseseaeeeeeeeeenes 198 AUD Trace Acquisition Modeks seske ceeeseeseeeeceeeeeeecesecesecesecsaecaaesaaesaeseaeeeeeees 201 AUD Trace Group BOX 03 cseceveasepeceovicvensiesv
25. CPU Operation Mode Dialog Box Setting Example Page Option Setting Value MD Pin Use MD5 0 of User System Invalid Endian MD5 Big CSO Bus Width MD4 3 32 Bit Clock Mode MD2 0 Clock Mode 1 Memory Type CSO to CS6 NORMAL I O Port CS2 to D31 D16 DataBus CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 CS6 SH7706 WE ae Bus H UDI JTAG H UDI JTAG CLOCK 5 MHz CLOCK Restart the HDI after modifying the CPU Operating Mode dialog box To display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box click the Setting button in the CPU Operating Mode page in the Configuration dialog box For details on the CPU Operating Mode dialog box refer to section 5 2 Setting the Emulator Operating Conditions 73 RENESAS The HDI window is shown in figure 4 2 BS Hitachi Debugging interface SHX E8000S Emulator Lee ee ee ee ee Ge we RAE OPPS Basa a MHGeH wWeo e 08 2 SAN P fa a amp A A E E E B j Figure 4 2 HDI Window Numbers in figure 4 2 indicate the following 1 Menu bar Indicates the HDI command menus for the use of the HDI 2 Toolbar Contains convenient buttons as shortcuts of menu commands 3 Status bar Indicates the state of the emulator and progress information about downloading 4 Help button Activates the HDI on line help 74 RENESAS 4 3 Setting the Configuration Emulation conditions are set through the Configuration dialog box e Select Configure Platfor
26. Display of Execution Time In the window the user program execution time will be displayed as decimal numbers of hours minutes etc The user can use the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution in the Configuration dialog box to set a maximum period of measurement The maximum times are approximately 9999 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 52 Us 488 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us or 6 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns If the user specifies a time other than the available values the emulator will display instead of the setting 216 RENESAS 5 7 2 Measuring Execution Time between Satisfaction of Specified Conditions Break Condition B or Trace Condition B is used in the measurement of the execution time between the satisfaction of specified conditions The emulator will begin to measure the execution time when one condition set in Break Condition B1 to B8 or Trace Condition B1 to B8 dialog boxes is satisfied and stop measuring when another condition is satisfied The emulator will continue to start and stop measurement whenever the respective conditions are satisfied Example Condition 1 the condition can be set as Break Condition 1 or Trace Condition 1 Condition 2 the condition can be set as Break Condition 2 or Trace Condition 2 gt Condition 1 Condition 2 When conditions and 2 are satisfied in the above sequence th
27. File menu At this time the window for specifying the file name is displayed Input the session file name in the window and click the Save button To load the session file select Load Session from the File menu A session file can be automatically saved and loaded by setting the HDI Options dialog box of Options in the Setup menu To automatically save the session file click on the Save session automatically radio button in the Session page The dialog box for specifying the file at HDI termination is then displayed Specifying the file name enables session information to be automatically saved to the file from the following HDI termination To automatically load the session file enable Load last session on startup check box in the Session page The session information is automatically loaded For more details on sessions and a setting method refer to the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual in the CD R 102 RENESAS 5 1 Section 5 Emulator Functions Introduction The following is a full description of the emulator s functions including those that were not described in section 4 Tutorial Table 5 1 is a list of the emulator functions that are described in this section Table 5 1 Emulator Functions Section Title Description 5 2 Operating conditions for Sets the operating conditions for the emulator the emulator 5 3 Execution Emulation 5 4 Step
28. Returns to the Device page Next gt Goes to the next page Memory Type Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings 122 RENESAS The cases in which the settings in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box and the actual emulator operation become different are shown below Table 5 14 Cases Different from the CPU Operating Mode Settings No 1 Description The emulator starts up in clock operating mode 7 unconditionally when there is a CKIO input from the connected user system If the user system clock operating mode is other than 0 1 or 7 when the input of user system operating mode pins MD5 to MDO is enabled the emulator starts enabling the Endian MD5 CSO Bus Width MD4 3 and Clock Mode MD2 0 settings If the CSO bus width of the user system is incorrect when the input of user system operating mode pins MD5 0 is enabled the emulator starts enabling the Endian MD5 CSO Bus Width MD4 3 and Clock Mode MD2 0 settings The emulator changes the following settings in the I O Port page when starting up with a 32 bit CSO bus width D31 D16 Data Bus WE 2 3 Note It is possible to check the actual operation of the emulator in the Platform page of the System Status window 123 RENESAS Memory Type Page Use this page to indicate the types of memory in CSO to CS6 the type of SDRAM type in CS2 and CS3 and the bus widths The settings on this page are used in analyzing
29. Trace window VP_MAP Specifies use of the VP_MAP table to translate the address information in the results of trace searching The information is not translated when the translation option has not been specified or the VP_MAP table is invalid This option can be selected when Bus trace or BUS AUD trace is selected in Display Add source Specifies whether or not to include the source code along with the branch addresses obtained in AUD tracing When this option is not specified inclusion of source code and jumping to corresponding lines are not available This option can be selected when AUD trace or BUS AUD trace is selected in Display Cycle Sets a range to be displayed Bus Cycle Specifies a range for display of an external bus trace This is only available when Bus trace is selected The value specified is a pointer to the bus cycles in the trace Set a negative value to indicate a number of cycles before the delay condition was satisfied with the bus cycle on which the conditions are satisfied as the origin 0 Start is the pointer to the first bus cycle End is the pointer to the last bus cycle Settings must be made in these fields The default values are D 512 for Start and D 255 for End AUD Cycle Specifies a range for display of an AUD trace This is only available when Bus AUD trace or AUD trace is selected The value is specified as a value of the instruction pointer Star
30. are set as sequential break or conditions Trace The conditions in Condition A are set as sequential trace conditions The conditions in Condition B are not set as sequential trace conditions TRGB Option Selects a condition for the output of a pulse from the trigger output pin of the emulator when the condition set in the Condition B dialog box is satisfied Condition 1 When a condition among channels 1 to 8 is satisfied a break occurs and no trigger is output Initial value Condition 2 When a condition among channels 1 to 8 is satisfied a trigger is output Condition 3 When a condition of a specified channel is satisfied a trigger is output The channel number can be selected from the combo box Initial value Condition 1 Note For details on selecting a sequential break or trace condition refer to sections 5 5 Break Functions and 5 6 Realtime Trace Functions 113 RENESAS Loading flash memory Page The emulator can download data to the flash memory area Prepare a program for writing to flash memory writing module and a program for erasing flash memory erasing module Use this page to set parameters for downloading to the flash memory area 9 fe 32 bit bus width E Figure 5 5 Configuration Dialog Box Loading flash memory Page 114 RENESAS Table 5 7 Loading flash memory Page Page Loading flash memory Description Enables or disables downloa
31. sseesseeeeeesesesesereseseresrrsstessresseeseeseeeseessee 206 Trace Window Mixed Display of External Bus Trace and AUD Trace 208 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page ee ceeeeesseceseeeeneeceereeeneeceereeeeeeeeees 209 Trace Filter Dialog Box Time Page cee eeeceeseceesseceeeeeeneeceereeeseeceeeeeenaeeesees 213 Trace Filter Dialog Box AUD Page ee ceeeceesseceereeeneeceereeenaeceteeeeneeensees 214 Trace Find Dialog Box General Page eesceecceesseceseceeneeceereeeneeceeeeeeneeeesees 215 System Status Window Display of Execution Time csccesceeeseeceeeeeneeeeeees 216 Performance Analysis WindOw cceeccesscecsseceeseeceeeesneecaeeeeaeeceaeeeeneeceaeesentees 219 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 000 eee ee eeeeceseceseeneeenees 221 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 2 0000 ec eceeceeceeeceseceeenseenees 222 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 000 eee eceeeceeeceseceeenseenees 223 Performance Analysis Dialog BOX ete eeeeceseeceescesecesecesecsecsaecsaecaeeeaeeeneeees 225 Performance 1 Dialog Box General Page 0 ee eeeeesceceseceeececeteceeneecseeeeneees 227 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page ceeeessseceseeeeseeceereeeneeceereeeneeees 228 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page ceeccessseceseeeesseceereeeneeceteeeenaeens 229 Performance 1 Dialog Box Time Out Page oc ee eeececss
32. timeout or maximum number of passes specified in Performance Analysis 1 To use this function select Timeout trace of Performance Analysis under Emulation mode in the Configuration dialog box General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode CPU SH7729R Clock Emulator Clock 8 3MH2 7 Emulation mode Timeout trace of Performance analysis 7 T Prohibit B W on the fly I Interrupts during step Memory area Normal C Physical Virtual AS D iter Emulator PCI Card Driver Change j Cancel Apply Help m Figure 5 56 Configuration Dialog Box General Page 196 RENESAS Specify the timeout on the Time Out page and the maximum number of passes in execution on the Count page of the Performance 1 dialog box which can be opened by selecting Edit in a popup menu from the Performance window then execute the user program When either the execution time or count exceeds the specified conditions trace acquisition will stop For details on the Performance 1 dialog box Time Out page and Count page refer to section 5 8 Performance Analysis Function Other Conditions Tracing can be specified to stop on the overflow of the trace buffer the tracing of SDRAM cycles can be selected and the minimum period for time stamping of acquired bus tracing information can be specified Specify those items in the Bus Trace group box on th
33. trace information bus_time 20ns Displays in 20 ns units bus_time 1 6us Displays in 1 627604167 us units bus_time 52us Displays in 52 0833333 us units bus_time clk Trace information is acquired in units of clock cycles that is synchronized with cycles of the MPU CKIO signal bus_time clk2 Trace information is acquired in units of clock cycles that is synchronized with 1 2 cycle of the MPU CKIO signal bus_time clk4 Trace information is acquired in units of clock cycles that is synchronized with 1 4 cycle of the MPU CKIO signal bus_time clk8 Trace information is acquired in units of clock cycles that is synchronized with 1 8 cycle of the MPU CKIO signal lt bus_sdram gt Keyword Specifies whether or not the contents of the address bus and data bus are edited before displaying the trace information when SDRAM has been accessed bus_sdram enable Edits the contents bus_sdram disable Does not edit the contents 321 RENESAS Description of the tm command lt aud_option gt Parameter Description lt aud gt Specifies the AUD trace information acquisition mode aud realtime Acquires the AUD trace information in realtime mode aud full Acquires the AUD trace information in full trace mode aud off Acquires no AUD trace information lt aud_time gt Specifies the minimum time the AUD trace information is acquired aud_time half AUD trace information is acquired in units of 1 2 clock cycles aud_time 33
34. workspace in an older version of the HEW In such cases creation of a new workspace is necessary 117 RENESAS CPU Operating Mode Page Use this page to set and display the details of the MPU s operating mode The CPU Operating Mode dialog box is displayed General Execution Mode1 Execution Mode2 Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode Use MD5 0 of User System Enabled Endian MD5 Big CSO Bus Width MD 4 3 32 Bit Clock Mode MD2 0 Clock Mode 1 CSO Memory Type NORMAL CS1 Memory Type NORMAL CS2 Memory Type NORMAL CS3 Memory Type NORMAL CS4 Memory Type NORMAL CS5 Memory Type NORMAL CS6 Memory Type NORMAL Selected 0 Port CS2 C53 CS4 CS5 CE1A WE 2 3 D31 D16 Data Bus H UDIJTAG Clock 5MHz User system MD5 0 3f Setting Figure 5 6 Configuration Dialog Box CPU Operating Mode Page Table 5 10 CPU Operating Mode Page Option Description Item Displays a list of the CPU Operating Mode items Status Displays the current setting for the item Setting Displays the CPU Operating Mode dialog box that is used to change the settings When Finish is clicked in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box the emulator restarts and ignores the settings made in other dialog boxes 118 RENESAS 5 2 2 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Use this wizard style dialog box to set the MPU s operating mode This dialog box has five pages and they are listed in table 5 11 Changing the s
35. 5 2 2 CPU Operating Mode Dialog BOX ssesssssesssseesssreessserrrsstsrrsresresrssrerrererresresreers 119 53 Realtime Emulation seepe eaen E o E E R N SEEE ESRAS 129 53 1 EXCCUUON 2 42 a he ieee Rais Sits Saal Shes oa ess 129 3 3 2 Trace Halt Modes ssc escrae ach rua E E ys E een Wee oeebe cote 132 5 3 3 Display of Cause for Termination and Operating Status eee eee ereeeee 133 S4 Step FUNCHONS riccs sess svvesctvevecsned eeu abesdecseysdvevsepsceevaceadpeesebeeeduadvadyeucdycovsete ce es Sieppi oT 135 SAT Step Execution 3 320246 8 is eA ete eee wishes ee ees Ses 135 5 4 2 Interrupts during Step Execution eee cece cseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesecsaeenaes 136 5 5 Break Functions 3 henti sien tien else ed leo neti a aaah RT E I R S 136 iv RENESAS 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 SS Software Breake s 3 E EE dosed suce Seevenleestesangedddecadets henge ddcseveesistnied coved eects 138 5 5 2 Software Sequential Break oo eee eee cee een e E EE E pe EEEE 142 9 9 3 Hardware Breaks icccstc silicon a ae E E duste ones n E SRE SENGA 148 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break eseeeseeeseeeseseesssreressrrresresrenrrsrenrsseerreresrenreseenees 164 5 3 9 ternal Breaks eepe eeaeee e e n sea eee EEE e Seea 171 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break ipee E e E 181 5 3 Forced Breakin onn e e eE a E A R A E R eae ee 182 5 5 8 Forced Break on Writing to a Write Protected Area eseseseseeess
36. 88 Address Translation According to VP_MAP Tables How to translate addresses depends on the settings of the radio buttons of the Memory Area group in the Configuration dialog box and MEMORYAREA_SET MAS command The following passages show how addresses are translated in each setting state 244 RENESAS When the Normal radio button is selected or when Normal is specified with the MAS command The VP_MAP table takes priority over the TLB When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the specified address is within the VP_MAP table settings the emulator translates the address according to the VP_MAP table If the specified address is beyond the ranges of VP_MAP table settings whether the VP_MAP table is enabled or disabled the emulator translates the address according to the MMU s state When the Virtual radio button is selected or when Virtual is specified with the MAS command The address is translated according to the TLB If the specified address is outside the TLB table settings a TLB error will occur When the Physical radio button is selected or when Physical is specified with the MAS command The address is not translated 245 RENESAS Table 5 97 Address Translation Tables VP_MAP MMU Within Radio Enabled beyondthe Enabled Within beyond the Table used for button disabled range disabled TLB Range translation Normal Enabled Within the Enabled Within the range The VP_MAP table ra
37. BCUC Clears internal breakpoints that have been set BREAKCONDITION_U 6 2 2 BCUD Displays internal breakpoints that _DISPLAY have been set BREAKCONDITION_U 6 2 2 BCUE Enables or disables internal _ENABLE breakpoints that have been set BREAKCONDITION_U _SET 6 2 2 BCUS Sets an internal breakpoint BREAKPOINT 6 2 4 BP Sets software breakpoints BREAKPOINT_CLEAR 6 2 4 BC Clears software breakpoints that have been set BREAKPOINT_DISPLAY 6 2 4 BD Displays software breakpoints that have been set BREAKPOINT_ENABLE 6 2 4 BE Enables or disables software breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_CLEAR 6 2 5 BSC Clears software sequential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_DISPLAY 6 2 5 BSD Displays software sequential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_ENABLE 6 2 5 BSE Enables or disables software sequential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_SET 6 2 5 BSS Sets software sequential breakpoints CHECK 6 2 6 CHECK Checks the state of each pin for the MPU CLOCK 6 2 7 CK Sets and displays the CLOCK signal for the MPU CONDITION_SEQUENCE 6 2 3 CSQ Sets hardware sequential break RENESAS 263 Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description DEVICE_TYPE 6 2 8 DE Displays the type of a currently selected device DISASSEMBLE DA Disassembles program and displays the result END 6 2 9 END Returns to user program execution when the
38. Break disabled mode All breaks except for forced breaks are disabled during program execution No break Note In cycle reset mode the RESETP signal is output to the MPU regardless of the MPU s operating state when the time specified by the command has elapsed Figure 5 12 shows the timing with which the TRIG signal is output to the trigger output probe in cycle reset mode 130 RENESAS Time specified by the command Q Figure 5 12 Timing for Trigger Signal Output Restrictions on emulation modes are listed in table 5 20 Table 5 20 Restrictions on Emulation Modes Emulation Mode Restrictions Cycle reset mode and e Settings for software software sequential hardware hardware elapsed time of sequential internal and internal sequential breaks are all ignored condition satisfaction vaok a2 mod Trace acquisition conditions are ignored e Cannot enter trace halt mode Internal sequential Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored break mode Timeout break mode Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored Timeout trace stop Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored mode Break disabled mode Settings for software software sequential hardware hardware sequential internal and internal sequential breaks are all ignored Refer to section 5 5 Break Functions for details on break conditions and section 5 6 Realtime Trace Functions f
39. Computer icon with the right mouse button and select Properties from the pop up menu The System Properties dialog box will be displayed e Double click the Computer icon in the Device Manager panel to open the Computer Properties dialog box e Click the Memory in the View Resources panel to display the memory resources Select one of the address ranges that is not listed in the Computer Properties dialog box For example if you select the range H D8000 to H DBFFF the corresponding switch number will be 6 Define the memory area so that Windows 98 does not use the area as follows e Click Memory in the Reserve Resources panel and click Add The Edit Resource Setting dialog box will be displayed e Enter the memory area addresses in Start value and End value and click OK e Shut down the host computer do not restart it and turn off the power switch e Power on the host computer e Check that the area selected in the Computer Properties dialog box is displayed as System Reserved in the list The next step prevents the memory area for the PC interface board being accessed by another program Modify the CONFIG SYS file Use the SYSEDIT program to edit the file e Select Run from the Start menu e Type SYSEDIT and click OK The SYSEDIT will start When EMM386 EXE is used in the CONFIG SYS file the CONFIG SYS file must be modified If the CONFIG SYS file is not used or if EMM386 EXE is
40. Condition B trace break or unused Loading flash memory Sets the function to download to flash memory area CPU Operating Mode Sets and displays the MPU operating mode 106 RENESAS Each page of the Configuration dialog box is described below General Page Use this page to select the MPU driving clock and specify the emulation mode enabling disabling of memory access during emulation whether or not interrupts are accepted during emulation with step execution setting conditions related to memory and produce a dialog box for the setting of driver software Execution Mode Execution Mode2 Leading flash memory CPU Operating Mode Emulator Clack 8 3MHz Figure 5 2 Configuration Dialog Box General Page 107 RENESAS Table 5 4 General Page Option Item Description CPU Displays the target MPU The target MPU can be changed in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box Clock Selects the clock for supply to the MPU For initial values refer to 5 14 MPU Control and Status Check Emulator clock 8 3 MHz 8 3 MHz emulator internal clock Emulator clock 16 5 MHz 16 5 MHz emulator internal clock 33 3 MHz emulator internal clock Emulator clock 33 3 MHz Emulator clock 66 6 MHz 66 6 MHz emulator internal clock User clock Clock signal from the user system X TAL Crystal oscillator on the evaluation chip board CKIO Operation in CKIO mode E
41. Description General Sets trace search range AUD _ Searches for branch source destination addresses 211 RENESAS 3 Both external bus and AUD trace information Page Condition Description General Sets trace search range Address Address bus Searches for records in which the value on the address bus matches the specified condition Data Data bus Searches for records in which the value on the data bus matches the specified condition Bus State Bus state Searches for records in which the RD and RDWR signal levels match the specified condition Probe External probe Searches for records in which the external probe signal levels match the specified condition Interrupt External interrupt Searches for records in which the NMI RESETP IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 and IRQ5 signal levels match the specified condition Time Time stamp Searches for records in which the time stamp matches the specified condition time or range AUD Address bus Searches for the branch source and destination addresses that match the specified value or range The setting of conditions for Address except for Outside Range and VP_MAP items Data except for Outside Range item Bus State Probe and Interrupt except for RESETM and RESETP items is the same as setting the corresponding Break Condition For details on specifying the conditions refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break The descript
42. Dialog Box Delay Page Table 5 39 Delay Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no delay condition Input area Notes 1 160 Sets a delay condition values as a number of bus cycles The default is D 1 Any value in the range from D 1 to D 32767 can be set here Break Condition A shares hardware with Trace Condition A Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition A has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition A Break Condition B shares hardware with Trace Condition B Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition B has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition B Break Condition C shares hardware with Trace Condition C and Performance Analysis Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition C or a Performance Analysis setting has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition C When a hardware break condition has been satisfied execution may continue for two or more instructions before it stops Other hardware break conditions may thus be satisfied before execution stops If this is the case two or more causes of termination will then be displayed RENESAS Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition A history of hardware break conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B can be displayed in the Condition dialog box New conditions can also be created by using the Condition d
43. E 80005 Yoco tutorial tutorial D ebug tutorial abs Areas loaded 00000000 000000 00000800 000000 00001000 0000 x0 00002000 0000200 0000o DDDD cox Figure 4 8 HDI Dialog Box e Click the OK button 80 RENESAS 4 5 2 Displaying the Source Program The Source window allows the user to display the C C language source program set breakpoints execute the program and select variables so the user can debug a program at the source level e Select Source from the View menu The Open dialog box is displayed Debug E initsct c sbrk c amer File name tutorial c Files of type fc Files c inl z Figure 4 9 Open Dialog Box 81 RENESAS e Select tutorial c and click the Open button The Source window is displayed If necessary select whatever font or size you like by selecting the Font option from the Customize submenu in the Setup menu 90003000 _main void main void long a l0 min max long j int i 00003002 fori i 0 i lt l0 itt j 0000300a j randt 00003012 if j lt of 00003016 j j o00030la ali j 00003036 sortia o000303e min a 0 00003042 max a 9 Figure 4 10 Source Window Displaying the Source Program 82 RENESAS 4 6 Setting the Software Breakpoints A breakpoint is one of the debugging functions The Source window provides a very simple way of setting breakpoints For example to set a breakp
44. HDI and Checking the Emulator sessseseessseessseesesererssrsreereseerrsserrresesreeres 57 37 Troubleshooting nsr en ee e sad E a a ERES a EE 60 3 7 1 Error Messages from the HDI eseeseesseseeesseesesreerssrsrrsresrensesresresrerrsserrrssesrreresreet 60 iii RENESAS 3 7 2 Error Messages from the Emulator 2 0 0 0 ete eceeceeeseesecesecesecaecaecseesaeeeneeeeeees 62 3 7 3 Troubleshooting Procedure eee cee ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseenseceaecaecsaecsaeeaeseneeeeeees 65 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic Program 00 eee eeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeneees 67 3 85 Uninstallations x pepan a ips ee EE ETA 69 3 8 1 Wriinistallin SOfwate nesr eener in evsdesee nea ap iae pipis 69 3 8 2 Uninstalling the Acrobat Reader 0 ccccccssssssesseesseessessessesssesseesesseesseeseeseessees 69 Section 4 MUO sal iis iissssvsy cov code Suse veig sense Seaway a ands vag seus de eiausa vapor a a ii 71 ALL Introduction ee e ra eea a ee a Eaa are a fevers dose cyenes ESEI SAES ES 71 4 2 Running the HDi errn a aa e R E TEER E EE EE ease 72 4 3 Setting the Conbeuration nenne cheered E A et Ghiestoci neem steerer ae 75 44 Setting the Memory Map ee eceesceescesecesecesecesecaecsaecseecseseseseaeseaeseeeeesesseeeseseseesaees 77 AiS POW MO AGING scseeysssecocheseses a e e a E TAa E nE e EEEE EEES EE EE SREE 80 4 5 1 Downloading the Sample Program cece eee ees ceeecesecesecesecssecsseseeeneeeneeees 80 4 5 2 Displaying th
45. Mode 2 e Example of subroutine time measurement mode 3 In subroutine time measurement mode 3 the emulator starts to measure the execution time of the user program in the start address range specified by the user and continues to measure the execution time of the user program until the user program reaches the end address range An example of the use of subroutine time measurement mode 3 is described below Here the start address range is assumed to be from H 1000 to H 13FF and the end address range to be from H 1C00 to H 1FFF While the user program is running the emulator will start to measure the execution time of the user program from the start address range H 1000 to H 13FF until the user program reaches the end address range H 1C00 to H 1 FFF When the emulator starts to measure the execution time of the user program it will not stop until the user program reaches the end address range H 1C00 to H 1 FFF or there is a break in the emulation of the user program Therefore the emulator will continue to measure the execution time when the user program jumps to address H 3000 222 RENESAS Address H 0000 o Addresses H 1000 to H 13FF Start address range Addresses H 1FFF to H 1C00 End address range Address H OFFF Figure 5 73 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 A list of subroutine measurement modes that can be set in the Performance to 8 dialog box is shown in table 5 78 Table 5 78 Modes that are Availab
46. PINT10 IRLS3 PTF3 PINT1 1 IRQOUT RAS3L PTJO RAS3U PTE2 CASL PTJ2 CASU PTJ3 ASEMDO PTG6 LVTH16244 LVTH16244 EPM7128AETC144 2 NC User system PTJ1 PTJ4 PTJ5 PTE6 PTE3 IOIS16 PTG7 ADTRG PTH5 ANO PTLO AN1 PTL1 AN2 PTL2 AN3 PTL3 AN4 PTL4 AN5 PTL5 AN6 DA0 PTL6 AN7 DA1 PTL7 MCSO PTCO PINTO MCS1 PTC1 PINT1 MCS2 PTC2 PINT2 MCS3 PTC3 PINT3 MCS4 PTC4 PINT4 MCS5 PTC5 PINT5 MCS6 PTC6 PINT6 MCS7 PTC7 PINT7 WAKEUP PTD3 RESETOUT PTD2 IRLSO PTFO PINT8 IRLS1 PTF1 PINT9 IRLS2 PTF2 PINT10 IRLS3 PTF3 PINT1 1 IRQOUT RAS3L PTJO RAS3U PTE2 CASL PTJ2 CASU PTJ3 ASEMDO PTG6 Only available for the SH7729R 346 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 6 RENESAS 1 9VCC SH7729R SH7706 User system VCC PLL1 VCC PLL VDD RTC VSS RTC VSS PLL1 VSS PLL2 77 EXTAL2 EXTAL2 32 768 kHz NC XTAL2 XTAL2 XTAL XTAL H gt Nc i 15 pF _ J 1 RE 77 EPM7128AETC144 ExTAL al EXTAL MAX709R ULEVCCDOWN VCCQ1 4 8 10 3 3 V 4702 1 9 VCC VCCQ2 3 5 6 7 9 3 3 V VCC1 to 5 VCC PLL1 VCC PLL2 VCC RTC AVCC CAP1 CAP2 VCC1 to 5 0 1 uF vss NC 3 VCC VSSQ1 to 9 VSS1 to 5 VSS RTC VSS PLL1 VSS PLL2 AVSS1 AVSS2 VCCQ1 to 5 Z 0 1 uF VSSQ 777 77 3 VCC ee 10uF 0 01 uF AVCC LVTH16244 vssaio AVSS1 AVSS2 777 5 VCC MIC29152 Fi
47. Trace Acquisition dialog box which will be displayed by clicking the Acquisition in the pop up menu of the Trace window The trace acquisition modes for external trace are shown in table 5 58 184 RENESAS Table 5 58 Trace Acquisition Modes Acquisition Mode Description Free trace Trace acquisition is continuous from the start of user program execution until any of the trace conditions is satisfied Trace stop Trace acquisition stops when a specified condition is satisfied In this mode realtime emulation will not stop but trace acquisition is stopped and emulation enters the trace halt mode Sequential trace stop An order in which trace conditions must be satisfied can be specified When all of the conditions are satisfied in the specified order trace acquisition will stop Trace stop due to an Trace acquisition stops when the trace buffer in the emulator overflow of trace buffer overflows Range trace Trace information is only acquired during execution that satisfies the specified conditions Trigger output A pulse is output from the trigger pin when the specified conditions are satisfied Timeout trace stop Trace acquisition stops when the timeout condition specified for Performance Analysis 1 has been exceeded Notes 1 Can be specified for Trace Conditions A and B but not for Trace Condition C 2 After the satisfaction of a condition the trace acquisition takes several cycles to st
48. Trace Acquisition Description Mode Realtime mode When the next branch occurs while the trace information is being output the output of the information is stopped and the next trace information is output The user program can be executed in realtime but some trace information may be lost Full trace mode When the next branch occurs while the trace information is being output the MPU stops operations until the information is output The user program is not executed in realtime Trace Acquisition Trace Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C r Bus Trace aa Buffer Over Flow No break 7 Time Stamp nd I SDRAM Access Cycle AUD Trace AUD Mode Notused AUD Time Half of CKIO v ancal Figure 5 60 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page 201 RENESAS Table 5 69 AUD Trace Group Box Option Description Mode Selects one of the following AUD trace acquisition modes Not Used Acquires no AUD trace information Initial value Realtime trace Acquires in realtime trace mode Full trace Acquires in full trace mode Clock Selects one of the following as the minimum time to acquire the AUD trace information 33 MHz Specifies the AUD acquisition clock frequency as 33 MHz 66 MHz Specifies the AUD acquisition clock frequency as 66 MHz Half of CKIO Acquires the AUD acquisition clock for 1 2 that of the CKIO clock frequency Initial value Note Click Close button
49. Up to 32 conditions can be displayed in a list as a history of the conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Entry Makes the condition selected in the Condition list available for use again as a channel of Break Condition A or B Clicking the Entry button moves any condition selected in the Condition list box to the Entry List page and deletes it from the Condition list on the History page V Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clicking this button adds that condition to the Sequence list as one of Nos 1 to 7 VR Selecting a condition from the Condition list and clicking this button adds that condition as the reset condition in the Sequence list No Numerical values indicate the sequential point number Reset indicates the reset point Sequence Displays the sequential conditions that have been specified as a list Delete Deletes any condition selected in the Sequence list b Specifying hardware sequential break conditions on the Entry List page A hardware break condition can be created on the Entry List page in the Condition dialog box then added as a sequential break condition The Condition list displays the hardware break conditions that have been created Click to select a condition then click the V button the condition will be added to the Sequence list box as No 1 In the same way hardware break conditions 2 to 7 can be added in sequen
50. after clicking Apply button and setting conditions No condition is set when the Apply button is not clicked Notes 1 When multiple loops are set only the IP counts up to reduce the number of the AUD trace information being that are displayed 2 When a trace is displayed during realtime emulation mnemonic and operands are not displayed 3 When changes are made to the MMU settings or user program between the completion of the Go command and the execution of trace display mnemonics operands and sources may be displayed incorrectly 4 During an AUD acquisition in realtime mode some AUD trace information may be lost 202 RENESAS 5 6 4 Trace Display Select the trace display format on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box Select Filter from the pop up menu of the Trace window to produce this dialog box Trace Filter E J Add source start Erd Figure 5 61 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page When there is no trace information the Trace window will initially display nothing It will display no trace record once it has been updated When there is no trace information at opening the Trace window the window is empty 203 RENESAS Trace Display of External Bus Trace To display external bus trace information select Bus trace in the Display combo box The range for display can be specified by setting the start and end pointers in bus cycles bus cycle pointers
51. all internal breakpoints The display format is as follows Break Condition Un lt Enable Disable gt lt Settings gt Enable Disable Enables or disables current internal breakpoints When the channel number is omitted enables or disables all current internal breakpoints Examples 1 To set an address bus value of H 1000000 lt addropt gt byte data with the lowest bit zero DO bit lt dataopt gt the write cycle lt r wopt gt and H 10 satisfaction count for internal breakpoint channel 1 BCUS CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS H 1000000 DATA MASK B 0 BYTE DIRECTION WRITE COUNT H 10 To set internal breakpoint channel 2 to break on the address bus value of H 1000000 before it is executed on the program fetch cycle lt addropt gt and an ASID value of H 0 BCUS CHANNEL 2 ADDRESS H 1000000 PC ASID H O To set internal breakpoint channel 1 to break on lower 10 bits of address bus value of F 1000000 on a program fetch cycle after execution and with an ASID value of H 10 BCUS CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS H 1000000 PCAFTER M1 ASID H 10 To set lt accessopt gt as the execution cycle and to set lt r wopt gt as the read cycle on internal breakpoint channel 2 BCUS CHANNEL 2 ACCESS DAT DIRECTION READ To set internal breakpoint channel 3 so that a break occurs when the internal I O area is accessed lt ioopt gt BCUS CHANNEL 3 IO To set internal breakpoint channel 4 so that a break occurs when the LDTLB instructi
52. are satisfied on the status bar refer to section 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break 192 RENESAS Trace Stop Due to Trace Buffer Overflow Trace acquisition can be stopped when the trace buffer in the emulator overflows Select Trace stop under Buffer Over Flow on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition Figure 5 54 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page 193 RENESAS Range Trace Mode Overview Information is only acquired while the specified conditions are satisfied User program Program flow Trace buffer pee Trace acquisition condition is satisfied a Break condition When the user program stops is satisfied the trace memory stores trace information from the address at which the trace acquisition condition was satisfied Figure 5 55 Example of Range Trace Mode The conditions for range tracing are shown in table 5 64 Information is acquired when all of the specified conditions an AND condition are satisfied Table 5 64 Range Trace Conditions Condition Address bus Description Satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus Satisfied when the value
53. be used lt dataopt gt Specifies data condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify the data condition data lt data gt not lt data gt Specify data value numeric lt data gt corresponds to the data value of data buses D31 to DO Always specify a 32 bit data size Specify a mask value if the user wants the emulator to stop the user program execution at a data size equal to or smaller than a 32 bit data size Add not to the specification to break the user program when the data bus holds a value other than the specified value lt r wopt gt 268 Specifies read or write condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To break the user program with the read cycle direction read To break the user program with the write cycle direction write RENESAS Parameter lt prbopt gt Description Specifies external probe signal condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify external probe signal condition prb lt bit specification gt Specify each bit as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit specification 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level forx 4 3 2 1 PRB number When is specified the condition applies for any or all bits lt nmiopt gt Specifies NMI signal condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To break the u
54. board to the expansion slot for the interface board in the host computer and connect the interface cable supplied with the PC interface board to the emulator A LAN adapter can be used to connect the emulator to a host computer as a network For information on using the PC interface for ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus specification board or LAN adapter refer to their description notes Figure 2 6 shows the configuration of a system in which the PC interface board is used Figure 2 7 shows the configuration of a system in which the LAN adapter is used Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the PC interface board in the host computer _ PC interface board Emulator station PC interface cable E Host computer Figure 2 6 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board 20 RENESAS Network Emulator station a ees Host computer PC interface cable Figure 2 7 System Configuration Using a LAN Adapter RENESAS 21 22 RENESAS Section 3 Preparation before Use 3 1 Description on Emulator Usage This section describes the preparation before emulator usage Figure 3 1 is a flowchart on preparation before the usage of the emulator CAUTION Read this section and understand its contents before preparation Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Unpack the emulator Check the compon
55. breaks are not available except for a forced break using the Halt button Measurement will be halted even if it is not finished Trace acquisition conditions will be ignored tracing will not take place When the user sets no conditions for Break Condition B or Trace Condition B the emulator will not measure the execution time in this way even if the user selects Time Interval Measurement Condition B in Emulation Mode in the Configuration dialog box When specifying the conditions for this function observe the limitations listed below e All settings of software breaks software sequential breaks and hardware sequential breaks are ignored e All trace acquisition conditions are ignored e Itis not possible for the trace acquisition condition to be shifted to the trace halt mode Notes 1 While the user is using this function no other performance functions are available except the MPU internal performance 2 The two types of errors listed below must be considered for measurement A margin of error with 1 resolution a margin of error with 20 ns occurs when the resolution is 20 ns which occur when starting and halting break a user program execution and starting and halting a measurement by specifying the conditions Frequency stability of the crystal oscillating module for measurement 0 01 218 RENESAS 5 8 Performance Analysis Function The emulator s performance analysis function is for measuring the
56. c d e f g 2 SUBB 2 00005000 00007FF0 3 SUBC 13 00010000 0001008F h 00020000 00020098 G 4 5 6 fi 8 TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 10M 00S 000020US 250NS j a Channel number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Measurement mode I1 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 I2 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 I3 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 d Subroutine start address e Subroutine end address f Timeout value Timeout values can be displayed in subroutine time measurement modes 1 and 2 when the timeout condition is specified g Counter value Counter values can be displayed in subroutine time measurement modes 1 and 2 when count condition is specified h Start address range Subroutine time measurement mode 3 i End address range Subroutine time measurement mode 3 j Total execution time 307 RENESAS 3 To display a program execution time and execution count numerically gt PA COUNT NO NAME MODE RATE RUN TIME E COUNT 1 SUBA Il D 10 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00005 a b c d e f 2 SUBB r D 20 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00010 MAX D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS MIN D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS g h AVE D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS G SUBC 13 D 30 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00010 TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 00M 08S 029397US 600NS q a Channel number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Measurement mo
57. cc8s Ponces tees so e a ove E a estos Asoka oases a teks 369 E3 User Interfaces a eta ek i sek Heine nee ea ee 370 E 4 Performance Measurement Function cece eeeeeseeeeeeeceeeceseceseceaeceaeceaecaaecaeeeaeseneeeesees 371 E 5 Hardware Break Function 0 0 cece ceecesecesecssecseecseeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesecesecsaecaeenaessaeeaeeens 371 E 6 Hardware Sequential Break Trace Function 00 eee cee ceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenaees 371 E 7 Clock Operating Mod e ined cree ees tecb ies cee EN E EE A RS 371 E 8 Differences between the Emulator and the SH7729R ooo eee eceeceseceseceecesecnseceeeaeeenes 372 E9 Step Funct on iat iiss ie gi Re Ae ee ae ea i ie i 374 vii RENESAS Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 viii Emulator for the SH7729R Connected via the IC Socket ccecsececeseecessseeeeseeees 2 Emulator Hardware Components eeessseeeeseerseesteesestsresrerrsserrenserrssesrenserrsserrreresessee 11 Emulator Station Front Panelen in E E E E E TEE 12 Emulator
58. cee eeeceeeessseceeeecsseceeneecnseceeneeenaeeeeee 172 Figure 5 39 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Address Page ceeeeseceseeeeneecenreeeeeeeee 174 Figure 5 40 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Data Page ee eeeeeseeceeeeeeneecenreeeneeeeee 176 Figure 5 41 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box ASID Page eee eeeeseeceeeeeeneeceneeeeneeeeee 177 Figure 5 42 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Bus State Page ee eeseeeeeeeeneceeeeeeneeeeee 178 Figure 5 43 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Count Page eee eeeeseeceeeeeeneeceereeeneeeeee 179 Figure 5 44 Break Condition U3 Dialog Box eee cee cseecreeeeeeeeeeeeeecenseceseenseesaeesaeenes 180 Figure 5 45 Break Condition U4 Dialog Box ieee cee cseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesensecssecnseenaessaeeaes 180 Figure 5 46 Configuration Dialog Box Internal Sequential Break eee ee eeeeeeee eee eeee 181 X RENESAS Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Figure 5 52 Figure 5 53 Figure 5 54 Figure 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5 64 Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 5 68 Figure 5 69 Figure 5 70 Figure 5 71 Figure 5 72 Figure 5 73 Figure 5 74 Figure 5 75 Figure 5 76 Figure 5 77 Figure 5 78 Figure 5 79 Figure 5 80 Figure 5 81 Figure 5 82 Figure 5 83 Figure 5 84 Figure 5 85 Figure 5 86 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Buffer Overflow
59. data bus values in 4 bit units R W Whether the cycle was for reading or writing R read cycle W write cycle IRL IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 to IRQ5 signal state x5x4x3x2x1x0 xn is the state of IRLn and IRQn 0 low level 1 high level NMI NMI signal state 0 low level 1 high level RESP RESETP signal state 0 low level 1 high level RESM RESETM signal state 0 low level 1 high level BREQ BREQ signal state 0 low level 1 high level VCC Voltage on V Q 1 2 65 V or more 0 less than 2 65 V PRB External probe PRB signal state x4x3x2x1 xn is the state of PRBn 0 low level 1 high level Time Stamp Time stamp xxxHxxMxxSxxxxxxUxxxN H hour M minute S second U microsecond N nanosecond Clock Number of clock cycles from the end of the previous bus cycle to the end of the current bus cycle xx Hexadecimal value Up to 255 clock cycles can be counted When execution has continued for more than 255 clock cycles is displayed here The Time Stamp and the Clock cannot be displayed at the same time Source The corresponding line of source code to the program counter Clicking in the Source column activates the Source window and jumps to the corresponding line The contents of the source column are not displayed in external bus trace Note Invalid access cycles will be displayed as E8000S in RW to PRB 205 RENESAS Trace Display of AUD Trace To display AUD trace information select AUD trace
60. e Setting TRACEACQUISITION_SET TAS e Cancellation TRACEACQUISITION_CLEAR TAC e Display TRACEACQUISITION_DISPLAY TAD Command syntax and parameters e Setting tas lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt lt tracetype gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt prbopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt irlopt gt lt breqopt gt lt countopt gt lt delayopt gt e Cancellation tac lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Display tad lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Selects the trace condition type a b c Sets Trace Condition A B C lt channel_number gt Numeric or Sets a channel number from 1 to 8 keyword When the sequential trace stop has been specified by CSQ command specify p or r p Sequential point r Reset point lt tracetype gt Keyword Sets conditions for trace information acquisition This parameter cannot be specified when the sequential trace stop is specified type range Range trace type stop Trace stop 313 RENESAS Description of the TAS command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions Parameter lt addropt gt Description Specifies an address condition To specify an address as a trace condition address lt address gt not vpmap To specify an address range as a trace condition address lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt not vpmap To
61. eeeceeeseceereeeeteeeenes 182 Configuration Dialog Box Timeout Break 0 cee eeeeeesceceeeceeeeeceeeeeneeceeeeeneees 183 Trace Acquisition in Free Trace Mode ee eeeeeeesceeeceeeeesecesecsecssecseecaaeeneeenes 185 Trace Acquisition in Trace Stop Mode 00 eee eee eeeecceeeceeseeseceecesecsaecnsecseeeneeenes 186 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Condition A Page eeeesceeneesseceeeeeneeeees 188 Trace Condition A7 Dialog Box General Page ee eesseeesreeeseeceereeeneeeeeees 189 Configuration Dialog Box Sequential Trace Stop eee eeceeeceseceecneeeeeeee 192 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page essseseeeseeceeeeeneeeeeees 193 Example of Range Trace Mode isesend iane ieee peisea aeeie p i i ies 194 Configuration Dialog Box General Page 00 cee eeeseceeneecsseceeneeceaeceeeeecnaeeenees 196 Trace Acquisition Page Bus Trace Group BoX ceeeeseseceeneeesteceeeeecnseeenees 197 Bus Trace for Normal SRAM cccccccccsccessssceceeseececsseeeceeseececseaeeeecsneeecseaeeesseeaeens 199 Bus Trace for SDRAM 6 reete ee aa e R E NEEE ec aR REE E execs 200 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page eesseeseeeseeceereeeneeeeees 201 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page ee eeeeeesseceseeeeneeceereeeseeceereeeeeeesees 203 Trace Window seernes eerren Era ease avon ETER EREE r eRT sensed a enas 204 Trace Window AUD Trace Display
62. efficiency of parts of a user program in terms of their execution times against the overall execution time and for measuring the number of times a part of the user program is executed 5 8 1 Measuring with Emulator Station Function e Setting the Conditions for Performance Measurement In the HDI the user can set the execution efficiency and the execution count through a certain dialog box and display the measured results in the Performance Analysis window Not Used Display type Subroutine address list Performance Analysis Address OL x no information Figure 5 70 Performance Analysis Window In the Performance Analysis window the user is able to assign any of eight independent channels To set a condition click Edit in the pop up menu of the Performance Analysis window to produce the Performance to 8 dialog box 219 RENESAS Measurement Mode Measurement modes are explained in table 5 77 Table 5 77 Measurement Modes Measurement Mode Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 Description Measures the execution time and number of passes through the subroutine over the specified address range Measurement starts with the execution of the subroutine within the address range is suspended when execution moves outside the specified range and is restarted when execution returns to the specified address range of the subroutine The execution count count of the number of passes is incremented every
63. emulator SDI BOOT FAILED Note An incorrect evaluation chip board is connected Connect the correct evaluation chip board The installed firmware is for some other device Install the correct emulator system programs This message is displayed when the H UDI s input clock frequency is higher than the input clock frequency for the peripheral internal module While these error messages are displayed a message box is displayed for confirmation Click the Yes button to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box For details on the settings refer to section 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions Emulator System Down If an exceptional operation occurs during emulator monitor or emulator system program execution HDI command wait state the system shuts down the HDI links down E8000 SYSTEM DOWN If an error occurs inform a Hitachi sales agency of the error 64 RENESAS 3 7 3 Troubleshooting Procedure When an error occurs in the system use the troubleshooting Problem Analysis Diagram PAD see figure 3 29 to determine the cause of the error Start from START in figure 3 29 and determine the state of the system Follow the instructions that request operator assistance or intervention Note that system defect means that the emulator is malfunctioning Execute the diagnostic program in the way described in the Diagnostic Program Manual and inform a Hitachi sales agency of the test res
64. execution was completed This is cleared on the next execution lt address space gt is displayed as follows Physical Space Virtual Space ASID D xxx Add Sets software breakpoints Clicking Add opens the Break Point dialog box Edit Allows the user to modify the software sequential breakpoint settings selected in the Break point list box Clicking Edit opens the Break Point dialog box Reset Clears the software sequential breakpoint settings selected in the Break point list box Reset All Clears all software sequential breakpoints 139 RENESAS Click the Add button on the Point page to open the Break Point dialog box Specify the breakpoint s address the number of passes and memory space for the specified addresses then click the OK button Address Address Value Count Number oD 1 numbers Normal Physical Space Virtual Space Figure 5 16 Break Point Dialog Box Address Page The display returns to the Point page The Break point list box now displays the specified address and the number of passes Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Table 5 26 Break Point Dialog Box Options Option Description Value Sets the breakpoint s address as a numeric or symbolic value Count Number Sets a number of passes A break occurs when the breakpoint has been passed the specified number of times The defa
65. four projections on the bottom of the IC socket and fix the IC socket to the user system board Socket cover Apply epoxy resin adhesive to the four projections Guide pins Bottom view of the IC socket IC socket Pin 1 he W oo User system board Figure C 1 Installing the IC Socket 355 RENESAS b Soldering After the epoxy resin adhesive is hardened solder the IC socket to the user system board with the socket cover put on the IC socket The socket cover protects contacts on the IC socket from flux or solder splashed by soldering Be sure to completely solder the leads so that the solder slops gently over the leads and forms solder fillets Use slightly more solder than the MPU 2 Connecting the HS7729REBH81H board with the user system a Use screws to fix the spacers to the HS7729REBH81H board Find where pin 1 of the IC socket will be on the HS7729REBH81H board and the user system then connect the two boards after determining the side which the IC socket will be connected to b Use screws and the dedicated driver that comes with the socket to fix the IC socket to the HS7729REBH81H board Stop tightening screws as soon as a small rotation abruptly requires more force 0 098 N m or less is the standard if a controlled torque is possible Excessive pressure on the screws may damage the threads of the socket or cause a contact failure due to solder cracking on the IC socket
66. in the Display combo box The range for display can be specified by setting the start and end pointers in branch instruction execution units instruction pointers in Start and End on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box While the AUD trace information is displayed the header is the same as that used for the external bus trace information Trace 404 records no filter Of OF x R W IRL NMI RESP RESM BREQ VCC PRB Time Stamp Clock 000024 BRANCH 00003126 RTS DESTINATION 0000303e MOV L H 10 4 R15 R3 000023 BRANCH 00003052 BSR change 12 DESTINATION 0000312a ADD H DO R1S 000022 BRANCH 00003132 BRA H 3150 12 DESTINATION 00003150 MOV H 0A R3 000021 BRANCH 00003156 BF H 3136 8 DESTINATION 00003136 MOV L R15 R2 NNNN11 RRANCH ANNNALSe RRA AH 317F 12 Figure 5 63 Trace Window AUD Trace Display 206 RENESAS Figure 5 71 shows the AUD trace information items and display format in Trace window Table 5 71 AUD Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window Item No Description and Format Line number in the Trace window Label Label name When LOST is displayed for AUD trace type no label is displayed R W to PRB a Displays the instruction pointer This is a relative instruction location based on the last branch instruction given at the halting of the internal trace acquisition The pointer value is negative except for the last instruction Instructions to d
67. installation of the system program is given below The E8000S system program must be transferred to flash memory in the emulator station The emulator cannot be used without the E8000S system program System programs for the SH7729R and SH7709S and SH7706 are installed in different directories The system programs for the SH7729R and SH7709S are stored in SYSTEM 7729R under the HDI installation directory Table 3 3 is a list of system programs with descriptions Table 3 3 Contents of Emulator System Programs for the SH7729R and SH7709S No 1 File Name E8000 SYS Contents of File System program for the emulator Controls the evaluation ship board and executes various commands such as for emulation Loaded to the memory of the emulator when the emulator system program is started up SHDCT29R SYS MPU control program Controls the MPU on the evaluation chip board Loaded to the memory of the emulator when the emulator system program is started up SHCNF29R SYS Configuration file for storing the MPU s operating mode and map information Loaded with the emulator system program 50 DIAG SYS Diagnostic and maintenance program Loaded to the memory of the emulator station for maintenance RENESAS The system programs for the SH7706 are stored in SYSTEM 7706 under the HDI installation directory Table 3 4 is a list of system programs with descriptions Table 3 4 Contents of Emulator System Programs for the
68. is as follows gt ID SHxxxx E8000S Emulator system file Vm n Copyright C Hitachi Ltd xxxx Licensed Material of Hitachi Ltd RENESAS 299 6 2 13 MAP_SET MS Command syntax and parameters ms lt start gt lt end gt lt mode gt lt buswidth gt Parameter Type Description lt start gt Numeric Sets the start address lt end gt Numeric Sets the end address lt mode gt Keyword Sets the memory map mode user Uses user memory does not use the emulation memory emulator Uses emulation memory area read only Protects the emulation memory area from being written lt buswidth gt Keyword Sets the emulation memory bus width 16 16 bit bus width 32 32 bit bus width Description This command sets the emulator s emulation memory e Emulation memory allocation when the optional emulation memory board is not used The user can allocate 4 Mbytes of emulation memory to spaces CSO through CS6 When the user sets a start address it will be rounded down to H 0 or a multiple of H 400000 and the end address will be rounded up to one less than a multiple of H 400000 e Emulation memory allocation when the optional emulation memory board is used The user can allocate a 16 Mbytes of emulation memory in 8 Mbyte units in spaces CSO through CS6 The user can also protect the emulation memory area from being written When the user sets a start address it will be rounded down to H 0 or a m
69. mask address data address mask lt maskdata gt not vpmap lt address gt Address numeric lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Mask value Add not to specify an address or range outside which the user program should be traced However do not add not when lt type gt is c Add vpmap to the specification to trace the user program at the address as translated by the VP_MAP table If the VP_MAP table is disabled or vpmap is not specified the physical addresses will be used lt dataopt gt Specifies a data condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b Specification data lt data gt not lt data gt Specifies a data value numeric lt data gt corresponds to data value of the data bus D31 to DO Always specify a 32 bit data size To trace the user program at values within a smaller range of bits specify a mask value Add not to the specification to trace the user program when the data bus holds a value other than the specified value lt r wopt gt 314 Specifies a read or write condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b To trace the user program during the read cycle direction read To trace the user program during the write cycle direction write RENESAS Parameter Description lt prbopt gt Specifies an external probe signal condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b To specify an external probe signal c
70. operating system 4 Windows 2000 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system RENESAS Contents Section I OyeryleWnenfsontaneniannonk ienen sae aa aaa 1 TI Notescon Usalesis i e eins E E ESR in aug ase EET 4 12 Environmental Conditions s sise srne rene ne oen erennere s ae EEn E o emeen SSE n 5 T3 Components i E a E E E Reed E S a E e AREN 7 L31 Em lator Staton ausge ae cites EE a S E RR 7 1 3 2 Device Control Board and Evaluation Chip Board for the SH7729R 0 8 1 33 V OPHUONS are ses seecsey eo dy nd pavecslsasevaered a ear set sepleorecony gu fave ae SEAS ESEESE 9 Section 2 Components cissiisjiecsaisieadaajsataeniad a n Osteen a aiaa 11 2 1 Emulator Hardware Components 00 cceceecesecesecseecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeecesecsaecsaecsaecsaessaeeneeeas 11 2 1 1 Emulator Station Components cece cece cseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecesesaeesaecnaeaes 12 2 1 2 Device Control Board Components 0 0 ee ee ee eeseceseceeecneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereneenseenaees 15 2 1 3 Evaluation Chip Board Configuration eee eee cseeseeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeereneceseenaes 16 2 2 Configuration of the Provided CD R oo eee cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesecsseesaecsaecnaecsaeeneeens 18 23r System COMMPULALION sses serrer e Ean aVR rE oE E a E S RE arIo i iteot tives 20 2 3 1 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board eee eee cee cseeeneeeseeees 20 Section 3 Preparation before Use vias secs lenscesaghcagevascese les hed
71. order the execution record for the pass point up to that point is cleared The emulator then restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential break conditions from the first pass point Up to seven pass points and one reset point can be specified 142 RENESAS 1000 Break condition 1 500 Reset point 2000 Break condition 2 1000 Break condition 1 2000 Break condition 2 User program Program flow Break condition A break occurs when the instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2000 have been executed in sequence No break occurs Wait for break condition 2 Clears the break record No break occurs A na and searches for Wait for break condition 1 the condition from break condition 1 No break occurs Wait for break condition 1 No break occurs Wait for break condition 2 o gt A break occurs Figure 5 18 Example of a Software Sequential Break Reset Point Specification RENESAS 143 Setting Software Sequential Break Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Sequence page Break ConditionB ConditionC Condition U Point Sequence Condition A Sequence point 1 H 0000012s D O Physical Space 2 H 0000013a D 0 Physical Space 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Empty 6 Empty 7 Empty R Empty Edit Reset All Cancel
72. output in 32 bits kI 2 Accesses a memory to display operand codes and operands When the MMU is enabled the operand codes and operands may be displayed incorrectly because the address space at an acquisition of branch information and at the halting of the execution may be different 207 RENESAS Mixed Display of External Bus Trace and AUD Trace To display external trace and AUD trace information together select Bus AUD trace in the Display combo box The range for display can be specified in Start and End on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box E Trace 7873 records no filter BP AB DB R W IRL RESM B 000013 00003184 8bec7f30 llllll 1 1 1 1 REQ VCC PRB 1 l 1111 oOOHOOM 1 1 1 000012 OO03fff98 0000000a 111111 1 000011 00003188 000b0009 111111 l 1111 000H00M 000010 oO03fff98 0000000a 111111 1 1111 000H00M 000009 O000318c 3456789a 111111 1l 1 l 1111 dOOHOOM 000000 BRANCH 00003188 SUB R3 R2 DESTINATION 00003056 MOY L R2 1 000008 00003056 000952fd R 111111 1 1 1 1 ill oooHOON S BY 1111 dOOoHOOM NANNAN NANANINCO 1IEIICIEA n Vaz 1 1 1 1 1 EB UT Anatom Figure 5 64 Trace Window Mixed Display of External Bus Trace and AUD Trace 5 6 5 Trace Search Functions The emulator has the two functions for searching for trace information that are shown in table 5 72 Table 5 72 Trace Search Functions Search Function Description Trace Filter Displays all trace inform
73. screws are colored to prevent an insertion error CN1 red CN2 yellow CN3 blue If the connector is connected incorrectly the connector will be damaged A WARNING Make sure the connector shapes and numbers are correctly matched when connecting trace cables to the station to evaluation chip interface connectors Failure to do so will damage the emulator 4 Connect the trace cables to the station to evaluation chip board interface connectors CN1 CN2 and CN3 on the evaluation chip board Confirm that each trace cable connected to a connector on the emulator station is also connected to its corresponding station to evaluation chip board interface connector on the evaluation chip board Connect the cables using the same method as in step 3 Figure 3 5 shows how to connect the trace cables to the evaluation chip board interface connectors 5 Connect the power cable in the device control board to the evaluation chip board The power cable prevents an insertion error Figure 3 5 shows how to connect the power cable 6 Connect the GND cable of the trace cable to the frame ground on the user system 30 RENESAS Power cable CN7 GND cable a a I Hy IN lig iN IRUN N Trace cable CN1 wa Trace cable CN2 Trace cable CN3 Station to evaluation chip board interface CN1 Station to evaluation chip board interface CN2 Station to evaluation chip board interface CN3 User system Figure 3
74. seven break conditions along with one reset point can be specified as Break Condition A or B The user must consider the order of satisfaction in specifying break conditions for Break Conditions A and B a break will only occur when the break conditions have all been satisfied in the order specified by the user When the reset point is passed the record of hardware sequential break conditions that have been satisfied to that point is cleared and the emulator restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential break conditions from the first break condition Setting a Hardware Sequential Break Select Break for Condition A under Sequence on the Execution Mode2 page of the Configuration dialog box General Execution Model Execution Mode2 Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode m Sequence Condition 4 Break m Condition B Not used v TRGB Opin When Break Condition B or Trace Condition B are satisfied Specifies whether a pulse is output from trigger output pin of the E80005 without a break f Break occurs but does not output a trigger Outputs a trigger when any hardware break condition Outputs a trigger when the specified hardware break condition Condition B1 Figure 5 33 Configuration Dialog Box Hardware Sequential Break This setting selects Break Condition A for use as a hardware sequential break At this time any existing condition settings for Break Co
75. so will result ina FIRE HAZARD and will damage the host computer interface board and peripheral devices or will result in PERSONAL INJURY Remove the cover of the host computer and install the PC interface board in the ISA bus specification extension slot Tighten the screw after confirming that the PC interface cable can be connected to the board Screw PC interface cable f f Host computer case f 4 bof Uy ISA bus specification extension slot Figure 3 13 Installing the PC Interface Board PC interface board 45 RENESAS Connecting the Emulator Station to the PC Interface Board WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Before using the emulator connect the emulator station to the PC interface board with the PC interface cable supplied as shown in figure 3 14 Emulator station rear panel DCONT__TRC__CONT Host computer PC interface board PC interface cable Figure 3 14 Connecting the Emulator Station to the PC Interface Board 46 RENESAS Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows 98 Description of setting up a PC interface board HS6000EII01H is given below e Start Windows 98 e Click the My
76. space for use in commands such as load verify save memory display and memory modification QUIT QU Terminates HDI PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS 6 2 15 PA Displays measurements of emulator performance PERFORMANCE_CLEAR 6 2 15 PC Clears performance conditions that have been set for the emulator PERFORMANCE_SET 6 2 15 PS Sets performance conditions RADIX RA Sets input radix REFRESH 6 2 16 RF Updates the memory information in HDI to reflect the latest state REGISTER_DISPLAY RD Displays MPU register values REGISTER_SET RS Sets MPU register values RESET RE Resets MPU SLEEP Delays command execution RENESAS 265 Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description STATUS 6 2 17 STS Displays emulator state information STEP ST Executes in steps specified as instruction units or source line units STEP_OUT SP Executes until the function represented by the address at the program counter has finished STEP_OVER SO Steps over function STEP_RATE SR Sets and displays step execution rate SUBMIT SU Executes emulation command file SYMBOL _ADD SA Sets symbol SYMBOL _ CLEAR SC Deletes symbol SYMBOL_LOAD SL Loads symbol information file SYMBOL_SAVE SS Saves symbol information file SYMBOL_VIEW SV Displays symbol TRACE_DISPLAY 6 2 19 TD Displays the acquired trace in
77. station according to the following procedure Also use the following procedure to connect them after removing the device control board from the emulator station to change the device control board WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the emulator station s front panel is not lit 2 Remove the AC power cable of the emulator station from the outlet if the cable is connected to the outlet 3 Remove the back panel from the emulator station For the slot to which the device control board is to be connected DCONT is marked 24 RENESAS 4 When using the optional memory board connect the optional memory board to the device control board as shown in figure 3 2 Then connect the device control board to the emulator station Confirm pin 1 of CN4 and CN5 on the device control board and align pin 1 with the optional memory board Device control board Pin 1 Optional memory board HS8000EMS01H Power cable HL8003u6222SH Figure 3 2 Connecting the Memory Board 25 RENESAS 5 Connect the device control board to the emulator station When connecting the board take care so that the power cable will not
78. system All Rights Reserved This user s manual and emulator product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by Hitachi No part of this user s manual all or part may be reproduced or duplicated in any form in hard copy or machine readable form by any means available without Hitachi s prior written consent Other Important Things to Keep in Mind 1 Circuitry and other examples described herein are meant merely to indicate the characteristics and performance of Hitachi s semiconductor products Hitachi assumes no responsibility for any intellectual property claims or other problems that may result from applications based on the examples described herein 2 No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of any third party or Hitachi Figures Some figures in this user s manual may show items different from your actual system Limited Anticipation of Danger Hitachi cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard The warnings in this user s manual and on the emulator product are therefore not all inclusive Therefore you must use the emulator product safely at your own risk Ill RENESAS SAFETY PAGE READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product e KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism DEFINITION OF SIGNAL WORDS A T
79. the external clock frequency of 66 6 MHz as the MPU clock input CLOCK command m X Crystal oscillator 10 to 20 MHz m U External clock 1 to 66 6 MHz L 8 Emulator internal clock 8 3 MHz 16 Emulator internal clock 16 5 MHz 33 Emulator internal clock 33 3 MHz L 66 Emulator internal clock 66 6 MHz Crystal Oscillator A crystal oscillator is not supplied with the emulator Use one that has the same frequency as that of the user system When using a crystal oscillator as the MPU clock source the frequency must be from 10 to 20 MHz Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting the CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR The USER PROGRAM will be LOST CAUTION Use the following procedure to install the crystal oscillator 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the emulator station s front panel is not lit 2 Attach the crystal oscillator into the terminals on the evaluation chip board figure 3 7 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power Then crystal oscillator will be automatically set and setup This function will allow the execution of the user program at the operating frequency of the user system even when the user system is not connected to the emulator 33 RENESAS Crystal oscillator Enlarged view Evaluation chip board Crystal oscillator terminal
80. the operation of a hardware break when an address bus condition and delay condition have been specified Break condition H 50 bus cycles are executed after Program the address H 2000 flow is accessed User program Break condition is satisfied No break occurs H l me pee clare Break occurs H 50 bus a gt cycles after the satisfaction of the condition Figure 5 22 Example of a Hardware Break with Delay Condition Specified Break Conditions A B and C Eight channels for each condition 24 channels in total The conditions available for specification as Break Conditions A B and C are shown in table 5 30 Table 5 30 Specifiable Hardware Break Conditions Break Condition A Break Condition B Break Condition C Break Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O O X Read Write O O X External probe O O X External O O X interrupt control signal Satisfaction count O X Delay O O X Note O Can be specified X Cannot be specified The delay condition is only available for Break Conditions A7 and B7 149 RENESAS Setting a Hardware Break The setting of Break Condition A7 is taken as an example Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window then click the right hand mouse button to display the window s pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page 2 direction read 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Empty 6 Empt
81. the settings correctly then click the Next button CPU Operating Mode MD Pin J Use MD5 0 of User System i Endian MD5 Big CSO Bus Width MD4 3 32 Bit X Clock Mode MD2 0 Clock Mode 1 MD5 0 MD5 MD3 MD2 MD1 ES000 i High User System i i High Cancel Help Figure 5 8 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box MD Pin Page 121 RENESAS Table 5 13 MD Pin Page Option Use MD5 0 of User System Description Sets whether to enable the input of the operating mode pins MD5 0 of the user system before initiation Check this option to enable the operating mode pins of the user system When this option is not checked the user system is not connected or the operating mode pins of the user system have invalid values The settings in Endian MD5 CSO Bus Width MD4 3 and Clock Mode MD2 0 are valid Initial value Enabled Endian MD5 Sets the endian in use Select Big or Little Initial value Big CSO Bus Width MD4 3 Sets the bus width of the CSO area Select 8 bits 16 bits or 32 bits Initial value 32 bits Clock Mode MD2 0 Sets the clock mode Select Clock Mode 0 Clock Mode 1 initial value or Clock Mode 7 MD5 0 Displays the current status of the mode pins in High or Low E8000S Contents of Endian MD5 CSO Bus Width MD4 3 and Clock Mode MD2 0 User system The value of the MD pin on the user system lt Back
82. the settings in CPU Operating mode For details refer to section 5 2 2 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box The Memory sheet has the following contents Table 5 92 Memory Sheet Configuration Item Target Device Configuration Description The memory map status of the internal module INTERNAL I O System Memory Resources The remaining capacity of the emulation memory Load Memory Areas The address range of the load module that was loaded 239 RENESAS The Events sheet has the following content Table 5 93 Events Sheet Configuration Item Description Resources The number of effective breakpoints that have been set 5 10 Trigger Output During execution of the user program the emulator outputs a low level pulse from the trigger output probe under the following two conditions e Trace condition satisfaction e Hardware break condition satisfaction Using this pulse as an oscilloscope s trigger input signal makes it easy to adjust the user system hardware For example the waveform produced when the user program goes to a specified point can be viewed When the trigger output is specified by using of the Execution Mode2 option of the Configuration dialog box a low level pulse is output for 2 bus cycles from the trigger output pin 10 cycles after bus cycles in which hardware break and hardware break conditions were satisfied during emulation The trigger signal is output until the end of th
83. time interval must be one or more from the satisfaction of the end condition to the next start condition in each measurement mode If the time interval is less than 1 the measurement includes the satisfaction of the end condition to the next start condition In subroutine time measurement mode 1 the satisfaction of the end condition occurs when the address outside the specified range is executed In subroutine time measurement modes 2 and 3 the satisfaction of the end condition occurs when the specified condition is satisfied Therefore when the same address is specified for subroutine time measurement modes 1 2 and 3 the measured result of subroutine time measurement mode 1 becomes larger than those of subroutine time measurement modes 2 and 3 External address bus values are used for the measurement of each measurement mode Therefore the condition may be satisfied by the prefetched cycles or the cache fill cycles Also the condition is not satisfied when the external bus is not accessed because of the cache hit occurrence RENESAS How to Set the Conditions for Measuring the Performance To set the conditions for measuring the performance use the Performance Analysis dialog box that can be displayed by clicking Edit in the pop up menu in the Performance Analysis dialog box An example of the use of Performance Analysis 1 is described below Performance Analysis Eg Pa Condition 1 mode time name main start H O end H 66
84. update memory function Table 5 102 Dialog Boxes for Setting Auto Update Memory Items Dialog Box Description Auto update Memory Add Dialog box for registering items for the auto update memory function Select the address format of display and number of bytes of memory to be displayed AUM Target Details Dialog box for registering other settings for auto update memory items In particular those conditions that depend on the target device are set here Use the AUM window for the display of memory ranges selected as auto update memory items The AUM window is displayed by selecting Auto update Memory Window from the View menu to register auto update memory items in the Auto update Memory Add dialog box E AUH ON H 00003FD0 32bytes Word ress Data O0003FDO 0000 20DA 0000 0000 0000 53DC 0000 2704 OOO0O03FEO 0000 5665 0000 ODAA 0000 421F 0000 3EAD Figure 5 91 AUM Window 251 RENESAS The AUM window displays the selected ranges of memory and this display is refreshed while the user program is being executed Up to 8 windows 8 points can be displayed in the AUM window 5 13 2 Setting Auto update Memory Points to be set and byte size to acquire Up to 8 points can be set Up to 32 bytes can be acquired from each point Acquisition mode Auto update memory has two acquisition modes e Realtime parallel monitoring mode In this mode the contents of memory are directly acquired and d
85. user has specified as write protected is written to 5 5 9 Break Due to Trace Buffer Overflow A break occurs when the trace buffer in the emulator station overflows during trace acquisition Select Break in Buffer Over Flow on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition Trace Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C r Bus Trace Buffer Over Flow Break v Time Stamp 20ns E F SDRAM Access Cycle AUD Trace AUD Mode Notused AUD Time Halt of CKIO 7 Apply Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 47 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Buffer Overflow 182 RENESAS 5 5 10 Timeout Break A break occurs when the execution time or number of passes exceeds the conditions specified on the respective pages of Performance Analysis 1 Select Timeout break of Performance analysis from Emulation mode in the Configuration dialog box Configuration xi General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode CPU 5H7729A Clock Emulator Clock 8 3MHz 7 Emulation mode Timeout break of Performance analysis 7 I Prohibit B W on the fly P Interrupts during step Memory area Nomal Physical Virtual AciD mics Emulator PCI Card Driver Change F Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 48 Configuration Dialog Box Timeout Break Open the Performance 1 dialog box from the Performanc
86. value 1 6 ms in units of approximately 1 6 ms 13 ms in units of approximately 13 ms 210 ms in units of approximately 210 ms Multi break PRB1 Selects whether or not the multibreak function uses external probe 1 to break execution by multiple emulators one after another is enabled during execution Initial value Disabled RESETP signal Selects whether or not the input of the RESETP signals is enabled Initial value Enabled BREQ signal Selects whether or not the input of the BREQ signals is enabled Initial value Enabled WAIT signal Selects whether or not the input of the WAIT signals is enabled Initial value Enabled NMI signal Selects whether or not the input of the NMI signals is enabled Initial value Enabled 111 RENESAS Execution Mode2 Page Use this page to set sequential conditions Condition A and Condition B and to set the conditions for the output of a trigger when a break occurs Figure 5 4 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode2 Page 112 RENESAS Table 5 6 Execution Mode2 Page Option Sequence Description Sets a sequential break or trace Not used The conditions in Condition A are not set as sequential break or trace conditions The conditions in Condition B are not set as sequential break or trace conditions Initial value Break The conditions in Condition A are set as sequential break conditions The conditions in Condition B
87. when internal break conditions are satisfied in a specified order These orders are referred to as modes and are shown in table 5 57 Table 5 57 Internal Sequential Break Modes Break Condition U1 and U2 Mode Description Internal sequential break mode A break occurs when internal break conditions U2 and U1 are satisfied in that order Setting an Internal Sequential Break Specify conditions when using the internal sequential break function To specify the internal break conditions U1 and U2 select Break Condition U Sequential 2 gt 1 from Emulation mode on the General page of the Configuration dialog box Configuration x General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode CPU SH 729R Clock Emulator Clock 8 3MHz Emulation mode Break Condition U Sequential 2 gt 1 T Prohibit RW on the fly T Interrupts during step Memory area Normal Physical Virtual A5 D Driver Emulator PCI Card Driver Change J Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 46 Configuration Dialog Box Internal Sequential Break 181 RENESAS 5 5 7 Forced Break A user program can be forcibly terminated by clicking the Halt button or by selecting Halt from the Run menu The system will leave trace halt mode if trace halt mode has been specified 5 5 8 Forced Break on Writing to a Write Protected Area A break occurs when an emulation memory area which the
88. 00003036 Break sortia 0000303e min a 0 00003042 max al9 00003046 min 0 o000030da max 0 00003056 0000305a 0000305e Figure 4 28 Source Window Before Step Over Execution 98 RENESAS e Select Step Over from the Run menu or click the Step Over button P in the toolbar A line that calls the change function is executed as a single step and execution stops at the next line in the program Label Source 00003036 Break sortia 0000303e min a 0 00003042 a 9 000032046 min 0 000030 4a max 0 0000304e change a o00030Sa o00030Se max a 0 while 1 Figure 4 29 Source Window Step Over When the line of the change function is executed the data of array a which is displayed in the Watch Window window is sorted in descending order Watch Window gt O x Value Ox003ff d8 long 10 a or a Doun awune a A E S a a e a i H 00005665 H 000053dc H 00004d1d H 0000421f H 00003ead H 00002f5a H 00002704 H 000020da H 00000daa H o00000000 H od0000000 Ox003f f d8 Ox003fffdc Ox003fffe0 Ox003fffe4 Ox003fffe8 Ox003fffec Ox003f f 0 OxO003ffff4 OxO003f 8 Ox003ffffc Ox003fffd0 et et et et iea Figure 4 30 Watch Window Display Example 3 99 RENESAS 4 12 Displaying Local Variables The user can see local variables in a function using the Locals window For example the l
89. 29R 2 A wide selection of emulation commands promoting efficient system development 3 4 Efficient debugging enabled by variable break functions and a mass storage trace memory On line help functions to facilitate command usage without a manual 128 k cycles Command execution during emulation for example e Trace data display e Emulation memory display and modification Performance analysis Measurement of subroutine execution time and count for evaluating the execution efficiency of user programs 4 Mbyte emulation memory for use as a substitute user system memory installed as a standard item This can be extended to 16 Mbytes by using a device control board to connect an optional memory board 12 Mbytes A LAN adapter for connecting the emulator to a host computer via a LAN interface IOBASE T or LOOBASE TX allowing loading of the SH7729R E8000S Hitachi Debugging Interface into the host computer This enables graphic display operations in a multi window environment and source level debugging A PC interface board for the ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus connected to the host computer through the PC interface cable enabling high speed downloading 12 Mbytes min of user programs The HDI can be loaded into the host computer to enable e Graphic display operations in a multi window environment e Source level debugging Note Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation USA RENESAS 1 1 Notes on Usage
90. 5 Connecting Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board Note For the connection between the evaluation chip board and the user system refer to appendix C Connecting the Emulator to the User System 31 RENESAS 3 3 3 Connecting the External Probe CAUTION Check the external probe direction and connect the external probe to the emulator station correctly Incorrect connection will damage the probe or connector When an external probe is connected to the emulator probe connector on the emulator station s rear panel it enables external signal tracing and multibreak detection Figure 3 6 shows the external probe connector External probe connector Enlarged view Probe Pin No Name Signal Name Remarks 1 1 Probe input 0 Synchronous break input pin 2 2 Probe input 1 3 3 Probe input 2 4 4 Probe input 3 5 5 RUN break status RUN state identification signal output pin 6 T Trigger output Trigger mode output pin 7 G GND GND connection pin 8 G AC100 120V AC200 240V 2A 50 60Hz Figure 3 6 External Probe Connector 32 RENESAS 3 3 4 Selecting the Clock This emulator supports three types of clock for the MPU a crystal oscillator attached on the evaluation chip board external clock input from the user system and the emulator internal clock The clock is specified with the Configuration dialog box or the CLOCK command This emulator can use a clock source running at up to 200 MHz triple
91. 6 2 8 DEVICE_TYPE DE Command syntax and parameters de Description This command displays the selected target device Examples To display the selected target device DE The display format is as follows gt DE Current device SHxxxx 292 RENESAS 6 2 9 END END Command syntax and parameters end Description This commands returns control to user program emulation when the trace halt state is entered due to the satisfaction of trace conditions This command clears the trace information and the emulator starts to acquire new trace information Example To return the emulator state from trace halt state to user program execution mode END 293 RENESAS 6 2 10 EXECUTION_MODE EM Command syntax and parameters e Setting em lt time_count gt lt timeout gt lt multi_break gt lt reset_signal gt lt busrequest gt lt wait_signal gt lt nmi_signal gt lt trigger_bcb gt e Display em Parameter Type Description lt time_count gt Keyword Specifies the execution time measurement unit time 52us 52 0833333 us unit initial value time 1 6us 1 627604167 us unit time 20ns 20 ns unit lt timeout gt Keyword Sets the bus timeout detection time tout 100us Approximately 100 us unit initial value tout 1 6ms Approximately 1 6 ms unit tout 13ms Approximately 13 ms unit tout 210ms Approximately 210 ms unit lt multi_break gt Keyword Enables or disables
92. 6 Memory Type NORMAL selected I O Port C52 C53 C54 CS5 CE1A WE 2 3 H UPI JTAG Clock 20MHz User system MD5 0 O3f Clock source Emulator Clock 8 3MHz Run status Break Cause of last break Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Not used Condition B Sequential Not used Interval Timer counter 52us Bus timeout 100us Multi break PRB1 Disabled RESETP signal Enabled BREQ signal Enabled WAIT signal Enabled NMI signal Enabled Output trigger TRGB Disabled Enulation mode Normal Prohibit R W on the fly Disabled Interrupts during step Disabled Figure 5 84 System Status Window 237 RENESAS System Status window has the four sheets as shown in table 5 89 Table 5 89 System Status Window Configuration Sheet Name Description Session Contains such information on the current session as the whether a debugging platform is connected and the names of loaded files Platform Includes the status information on the emulator such as the name of the connected emulator Memory Includes the information related to the current state of memory such as memory mapping and the memory areas to be used by loaded object files Events Contains information on the usage of resources on breakpoints The Session sheet has the following contents Table 5 90 Session Sheet Configuration Item Target System Description Indicates whether the emulator is connected Session Name A session file name Pr
93. AM Dialog Box 67 RENESAS Table 3 6 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog Box Option Description Display Area Displays the results of testing by the diagnostic program COMMAND Accepts commands for the diagnostic program STOP Terminates testing by the diagnostic program and enters the program s command input mode END Ends the diagnostic program and initiates the HDI Set the diagnostic program according to the attached Descriptive Notes on the Diagnostic Program Click the END button or the STOP button to terminate the diagnostic program After the program has been terminated enter Q in the COMMAND edit box Close the DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM dialog box and restart the HDI DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM x E8000 TEST amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAM DIAG SYS Version No X XX XX XX XXXX Copyright C Hitachi LTD XXXX Please key in TEST PARAMETER OPERATOR TEST EXECUTE Y N gt xi COMMAND o stop EnD Figure 3 32 Terminating the Diagnostic Program by Clicking the STOP Button A file named E87729R INI will be created in the HDI installation directory This is a target setting file Whether or not the diagnostic program should be initiated with the HDI is defined in the Diagnostic Program resource information of the E8000 HDI TARGET entry The diagnostic program is available for installation 68 RENESAS E8000 HDI TARGET Diagnostic Program Y To disable the u
94. An attempt has been made to allocate emulation memory to an area other than CSO to CS6 The emulation memory has been allocated within the available area MAPPING BOUND MUST BE IN 4MB 8MB UNITS Memory has been allocated in 4 Mbyte or 8 Mbyte unit with the MAP command For details refer to the MAP_SET command BREAK POINT IS DELETED A XXXXXXXX A software breakpoint specified at the displayed address has been canceled because the contents of the software breakpoint are modified with the user program CANNOT SET A xXxxxxxxx A breakpoint cannot be specified at the displayed address by the BREAKPOINT or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command before GO command execution A hardware error might have occurred or the contents of the memory address might be a break instruction H 0000 Correct the error and reload and re execute the program EMULATOR BUSY The emulator has been processing a command during the user program execution simultaneously with continuous processing of a software breakpoint so another command cannot be executed Re enter the command TRACE CONDITION RESET Satisfied trace conditions are all reset when the user program is being executed When trace halt mode is terminated the trace conditions are rechecked from the beginning VERIFY ERROR ADDRESS H xxxxxxxx WRITE H xx READ H xx A verify error occurred xx numeric NO CLOCK CHECK MODE An attempt was made to start up the emula
95. Analysis window is being updated the message RUN TIME OVERFLOW will be displayed Note When a timeout is specified the measurement counter for Performance Analysis 1 is reset every time the end condition is satisfied Therefore the measured result of Performance Analysis 1 becomes the satisfaction of the last start condition to the satisfaction of the end condition 231 RENESAS e Count page Set the value for the maximum number of passes This dialog box is only displayed to allow setting of the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 General Address Time Out Count Count M Don t Care Count D Figure 5 79 Performance 1 Dialog Box Count Page Table 5 84 Options on the Count Page Option Description Don t Care Selects no maximum number of passes Input area Sets a maximum number of passes as a number A break occurs when the conditions set in the Performance1 dialog box are satisfied the specified number of times The default value is D 1 Any value from D 1 to D 65 535 can be set here Note This condition is detected as an overflow The test takes place when the user program passes through the end address Therefore the execution time and execution count displayed after break due to this setting will represent the number of specified passes plus one When a time out occurs while the display of the Performance Analysis window is being updated the message RUN TIME OVERFLOW will be displa
96. Bus tracing does not allow for the acquisition of trace information from the internal bus However branch source and branch destination address area including data for addresses on the internal bus can be acquired by using the on chip tracing function 3 When a refresh cycle is generated during an access to SDRAM this is indicated in the traced data by SDRAM CYCLE 4 Do not use the AUD trace function of the emulator for debugging a user system in which the AUD pins are used as port pins E 2 Emulation Memory 1 Emulation memory and user memory cannot coexist in a single CS space 2 Use the bus state controller to insert WAIT state cycles according to the CKIO value shown below for access to areas to which emulation memory is allocated When 25 MHz lt CKIO lt 33 MHz Insert 4 WAIT state cycles When 33 MHz lt CKIO lt 50 MHz Insert 6 WAIT state cycles When 50 MHz lt CKIO lt 66 MHz Insert 8 WAIT state cycles 3 When emulation memory is allocated to two areas the bus state controller settings should be such that the bus width is the same for both areas 4 Select Normal in the Memory Type page of the CPU Operating Mode dialog box for the setting of a CS to which memory is allocated 5 Do not allocate emulation memory to memory spaces other than CSO and CS4 to CS6 Set the emulation memory on 4 Mbyte boundaries Set optional memory boards on 8 Mbyte boundaries 369 RENESAS E 3 User Interface 1 T
97. C0 BCS B CHANNEL 6 ADDRESS H 100000 TO H 1001CO NOT 7 To set the following conditions for channel 3 of Break Condition B BCD B CHANNEL 3 The display format is as follows gt BCD B CHANNEL 3 Break Condition B3 Enable address H 100000 to H 1001c0O not 8 To display all of the conditions set to Break Condition A BCD A The display format is as follows gt BCD A Break Condition Al Disable Break Condition A2 Enable address H 10027c to H 100304 direction write Break Condition A3 Disable Break Condition A4 Disable Break Condition A5 Enable address H 10027c not prb 0101 Break Condition A6 Disable Break Condition A7 Disable Break Condition A8 Disable 9 To enable the conditions set to channel 3 of Break Condition B BCE B CHANNEL 3 ENABLE 10 To clear all of the conditions set to Break Condition A 271 RENESAS BCE A DISABLE 11 To clear the condition set to channel 3 of Break Condition B BCC B CHANNEL 3 12 To clear all of the conditions set to Break Condition A BCC A 13 To set a sequential point when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A Address bus value H 100000 BCS A CHANNEL P ADDRESS H 100000 14 To set a reset point when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A Address bus value H 300000 BCS A CHANNEL R ADDRESS H 300000 15 To display the display format when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCD A The display for
98. CS0 bus width is 32 bits the WE 2 3 and Data Bus are applied regardless of the settings It is possible to check the current settings of the emulator in the Platform page of the System Status window 127 RENESAS H UDI JTAG Clock Page Sets the H UDI JTAG interface input clock Set the conditions and click the Finish button to close the CPU Operating Mode dialog box The HDI will be restarted CPU Operating Mode H UDI JTAG Clock H UDIHTAG Clock 5MHz X i Cancel Help Figure 5 11 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box H UDI JTAG Clock Page Table 5 17 H UDI JTAG Clock Page Option Description H UDI JTAG Clock Sets the frequency of the clock for input to the H UDI Select 5 MHz initial value 10 MHz or 20 MHZ lt Back Returns to the I O Port page Finish Sets the emulator according to the content of each page then re activates the emulator Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings Note The input clock for the H UDI JTAG must be set at a frequency lower than 1 2 that of the internal clock l 128 RENESAS 5 3 Realtime Emulation 5 3 1 Execution Table 5 18 shows the main forms of realtime execution Table 5 18 Realtime Execution Form Normal execution Function Executes the user program from the current PC program counter address Procedure Click the Go button Select Go from the Run menu Execution from the re
99. Dialog Box Interrupt Page Table 5 37 Interrupt Page Options NMI Group Box Option Description High Sets the high level of the NMI signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of the NMI signal as a break condition Don t Care Selects no NMI signal state condition BREQ Group Box Option Description Low Sets the active control signal low level as a break condition Don t Care Selects no control signal state condition 157 RENESAS IRLO IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQS Group Box Option High Description Sets the high level of this external interrupt signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of this external interrupt signal as a break condition Don t Care 158 Selects no external interrupt signal state condition RENESAS f Count Page Use this page to specify a satisfaction count condition Figure 5 29 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Count Page Table 5 38 Count Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no satisfaction count condition Input area Sets the satisfaction count condition as a number of passes The default is D 1 Any value in the range from D 1 to D 65535 can be set here 159 RENESAS g Delay Page Use this page to specify a delay condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay Delay 7 n aN aro 2 l Don t Care D bus cycles Figure 5 30 Break Condition A7
100. EE E 299 0 2 13 MAP SET MS rra a s a N EE a O EA E aT 300 6 2 14 MEMORYAREA_ SET MAS cccccccesssccesscesseeceseceeseecseeeeseeceseesesseceeeeesaeenes 301 6 2 15 Performance Command PS PC PA ccccccecsscceessseeceessececeeaececsseeeeessneeecsenaees 303 6 2 16 REFRESH CRE a ee rrera e a aaee a E a RN AEN EE eat 310 0 2 17 STATUS STS A Er LRE AN AER E E A AE EE E iR 311 6 2 18 Trace Condition Command TAS TAC TAD esseseesessesessssrssserrsereessrsessssree 313 6 2 19 TRACE DISPLAY TD sieiccccccescecesedcesegiuenccettcteneievensevseisodttepesadenstieeeWesseasenseden 320 6 2 20 TRACE MODE EM ar ea n a E A E aS 321 0 2 21 TRACE SEARCH TS ei i a E A A E AE iT AT 323 6 2 22 Address Translation Table Command VS VC VD VE cccccccessssececeeeenes 327 Section T EOT M e SSA OS E E O S 331 T A Emulator Error Messages eenn e r n E EE aE ESSES 331 7 2 HDI Error Messages Related to the Emulator eee eeeeesceseceseceseceaeceecaeeeaeseneeees 334 7 3 Error Messages for the LAN Driver cece cece cseeseeeeceeeceeecesecesecseceaecsaecsaecaeeeneeeneeeas 337 Appendix A User System Interface cxcnie iin iia Hein gene eae 339 ATI User System Interface Circul seenen e tus ensdu ts sanevaheensian E St 339 vi RENESAS Appendix B Preparations for Assembling the User System Board 349 B 1 Recommended Dimensions for the User System Connector HS7729REBH814 349 B 2 Recomm
101. Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics To all our customers Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document such as Hitachi Electric and Hitachi XX to Renesas Technology Corp The semiconductor operations of Mitsubishi Electric and Hitachi were transferred to Renesas Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003 These operations include microcomputer logic analog and discrete devices and memory chips other than DRAMs flash memory SRAMs etc Accordingly although Hitachi Hitachi Ltd Hitachi Semiconductors and other Hitachi brand names are mentioned in the document these names have in fact all been changed to Renesas Technology Corp Thank you for your understanding Except for our corporate trademark logo and corporate statement no changes whatsoever have been made to the contents of the document and these changes do not constitute any alteration to the contents of the document itself Renesas Technology Home Page http www renesas com Renesas Technology Corp Customer Support Dept April 1 2003 7tENESAS Renesas Technology Corp Cautions Keep safety first in your circuit designs 1 Renesas Technology Corpo
102. FF When the user program jumps to address H 3000 measurement by the emulator will stop When the user program returns from address H 3FFF measurement by the emulator will start again Address H 0000 Address H 1000 Address H 3000 Measurement range Address H OFFF Address H 1FFF Address H 3FFF Figure 5 71 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 e Example of subroutine time measurement mode 2 In subroutine measurement mode 2 the emulator starts to measure the execution time after it has passed the start address and continues to measure the time until it reaches the end address An example of the use of subroutine time measurement mode 2 is described below Here the start address is assumed to be H 1000 and the end address to be H 1FFF When the user program is running the emulator will start to measure the execution time of the user program from the start address H 1000 until the user program reaches the end address H 1 FFF When the emulator starts to measure the execution time it will continue to measure until the user program reaches address H 1 FFF or until user program emulation breaks Therefore the emulator will continue to measure the execution time of the user program after execution of the user program has jumped to address H 3000 221 RENESAS Address H 0000 Address H 1000 Address H 3000 Measurement range Address H OFFF Address H 1FFF Address H 3FFF Figure 5 72 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement
103. H 4750 as the condition for the data bus and the read cycle as the read write cycle condition of Trace Condition B on channel 4 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 4 TYPE STOP DATA H 4750 DIRECTION READ To set a value of H 11111111 as a data condition and external probe 4 low external probe 3 high external probe 2 low and external probe high as the external probe conditions of Trace Condition A on channel 5 trace stop TAS A CHANNEL 5 TYPE STOP DATA H 11111111 PRB 0101 To set the low NMI as the NMI signal condition for Trace Condition B on channel 7 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 7 TYPE STOP NMI LOW To set bus value H 1000 as the address condition for Trace Condition B on channel 1 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 1 TYPE STOP ADDRESS MASK H 1000 To set address bus values outside the range from H 100000 to H 1001C0 as the address condition for Trace Condition B on channel 3 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 3 TYPE STOP ADDRESS H 100000 TO H 1001CO NOT To display settings for Trace Condition B on channel 3 TAD B CHANNEL 3 gt TAD B CHANNEL 3 Trace Condition B3 Enable type stop address H 100000 to H 1001c0 not To display the settings for Trace Condition A TAD A 317 RENESAS Display Trace Condition Al Disable Trace Condition direction write Trace Condition Trace Condition Trace Condition A2 A3 A4 Enabl Disable Disable A5 Enable race Condition
104. IRLS2 pin state IRLS3 Displays high or low IRLS3 pin state NMI Displays high or low NMI pin state WAIT Displays high or low WAIT pin state RESETM Displays high or low RESETM pin state RESETP Displays high or low RESETP pin state CA Displays high or low CA pin state BREQ Displays high or low BREQ pin state Note Fixed to high when the SH7706 is selected 288 RENESAS Example To test the MPU pin state CHECK The display format is as follows gt CHECK IRLO HIGH IRL1 HIGH IRL2 HIGH IRL3 HIGH IRQ4 HIGH IRQ5 HIGH IRLSO HIGH IRLS1 HIGH IRLS2 HIGH IRLS3 HIGH NMI HIGH WAIT HIGH RESETM HIGH RESETP HIGH CA HIGH BREQ HIGH RENESAS 289 6 2 7 CLOCK CK Command syntax and parameters e Setting ck lt mode gt e Display ck Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Selects the clock signal user Clock signal of user system 8 Emulator internal clock 8 3 MHz 16 Emulator internal clock 16 5 MHz 33 Emulator internal clock 33 3 MHz 66 Emulator internal clock 66 6 MHz xtal Crystal oscillator of the emulator Description This command displays and sets clock signal used in the MPU The user can select whether to use the clock signal from the user system or clock in the emulator When the user selects a clock the emulator resets the MPU Therefore the internal I O registers and control registers hold the reset values This command displays
105. MHz AUD trace information is acquired with 33 MHz aud_time 66MHz AUD trace information is acquired with 66 MHz Description Specifies trace information acquisition mode and displays the mode settings Examples 1 To display the set trace information acquisition mode TM Results gt TM trace_mode ofoff bus_time 20ns bus_sdram enable aud off aud_time half 2 To stop the acquisition of trace information and break when the trace buffer overflows TM OFBREAK 3 To acquire AUD trace information in full trace mode TM AUD FULL 322 RENESAS 6 2 21 TRACE _SEARCH TS Command syntax and parameters ts range lt startcycle gt to lt endcycle gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt prbopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt irlopt gt lt resetpopt gt l lt reseptmopt gt lt breqopt gt lt timeopt gt Parameter Type Description lt startcycle gt Numeric Specifies the start cycle value of the search range lt endcycle gt Numeric Specifies the end cycle value of the search range RENESAS 323 Description of the ts command lt option gt Parameter lt addropt gt Description Specifies address condition To specify an address as a search condition address lt address gt To specify an address range as a search condition address lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt To mask an address address mask lt maskdata gt lt address gt
106. ORTANT INFORMATION READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism Emulator Product Throughout this document the term emulator product shall be defined as the following products produced only by Hitachi Ltd excluding all subsidiary products e Emulator station e Device control board e Evaluation chip board e Cable The user system or a host computer is not included in this definition Purpose of the Emulator Product This emulator product is a software and hardware development tool for systems employing the Hitachi microcomputer HD6417729R HD6417709S or HD6417706 hereafter referred to as MPU By exchanging the device control board and evaluation chip board this emulator product can also be used for systems using other microcomputers This emulator product must only be used for the above purpose Limited Applications This emulator product is not authorized for use in MEDICAL atomic energy aeronautical or space technology applications without consent of the appropriate officer of a Hitachi sales company Such use includes but is not limited to use in life support systems Buyers of this emulator product must notify the relevant Hitachi sales offices before planning to use the product in such applications Improvement Policy Hitachi Ltd including its su
107. Ox00003fd4 unsigned long funeZ short Ox00000072 param 2 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fe4 short local 2 D 2 Ox00003fe0 unsigned long funcl short Ox0000003e param 1 Ox00003ffa Ox00003ff0 f short local 1 D i Ox00003fec unsigned long main Ox00000012 start D 103 Ox00003ffa short F P L F P L E P L F L Figure 5 89 Stack Trace Window Table 5 99 Stack Trace Window Options Option Description Kind Symbol type F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Symbol name Value Symbol value address and type Click the right hand mouse button with the cursor in the Stack Trace window The pop up menu will be displayed The menu includes the following options Table 5 100 Options in the Pop up Menu Option Description Copy Copies the highlighted text to the Windows clipboard so that the text can be pasted to other applications Go to Source Displays the source code in the program that corresponds to the selected function in the Source window View Setting Opens the Stack Trace Setting dialog box and sets the display format of the Stack Trace window 249 RENESAS The format of the Stack Trace Setting dialog box is displayed in table 5 101 Stack Trace Setting Nest level 1 64 fo Display symbol IV Parameter IV Local Variable r Diaplay Radix Hexadecimal f Decimal C Octal Binary Cancel
108. PMAP_SET command must be set in units of MPU pages 1 kbyte or 4 kbytes A virtual address range that overlaps with a virtual address range which is currently set cannot be specified Cancel the setting and re specify 329 RENESAS 330 RENESAS Section 7 Error Messages 7 1 Emulator Error Messages The emulator system program displays error messages in the format below if an error occurs during emulation command execution For the HDI these error messages are displayed in a special dialog box Table 7 1 lists error messages RENESAS 331 Table 7 1 Error Messages Error Message INVALID COMMAND Description and Solution The specified command is invalid or this command cannot be executed during the user program execution Correctly enter the command INSUFFICIENT MEMORY The size of emulation memory to be allocated with the MAP_SET command is not available Emulation memory has been allocated within the available memory size instead CANNOT USE THIS MODE The GO command cannot be executed because settings for the execution mode are invalid Correctly specify the settings necessary for the specified execution mode SET POINT IS NOT IN RAM A write inhibited address is specified by the BREAKPOINT or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command Specify a correct address CANNOT RECOVER A XXXXXXXX The break instruction at the address xxxxxxxx where a breakpoint is specified with the BREAK or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET comm
109. PU OPERATING MODE No IN The E8000S emulator connot be started correctly Figure 3 26 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 2 3 7 Troubleshooting 3 7 1 Error Messages from the HDI PC Interface Board Connection Failure When the HDI cannot detect the PC interface board for the emulator the HDI will display the following error message E8000 Platform IN Driver Error Cannot locate ISA interface card Unable to restore previous configuration for Emulator ISA Driver Will attempt to set default values instead Figure 3 27 Error Message on PC Interface Board Connection Failure The causes of such failures are given below e The address ranges that were set by the switch on the rear panel of the PC interface board are different from that set in the next setting e Another application is using the selected memory area e Settings of the Computer Properties dialog box e Settings of the CONFIG SYS file e Settings of the SYSTEM INI file 60 RENESAS Emulator Connection Failure When the HDI cannot detect the emulator station the HDI will display the following message box E8000 Platform Ea N Driver Error Emulator is switched off or not connected Unable to set default configuration for Emulator ISA Driver Figure 3 28 Error Message on Emulator Connection Failure The causes of such failures are given below e The AC power cable is not connected to the emulator or the emu
110. PU at intervals of 6 5 us 9 8us Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 9 8 us 50us Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 50 us 100us Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 100 us 500us Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 500 us 1ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 1 ms 5ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 5 ms 10ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 10 ms 50ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 50 ms 100ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 100 ms 500ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 500 ms 1s Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 1 s 297 RENESAS Pin Mode Description pabreak A break occurs under the timeout condition set by the Performance 1 dialog box and the PERFORMANCE_SET command set by channel 1 patrace A trace acquisition stops under the timeout condition set by the Performance 1 dialog box and the PERFORMANCE_SET command set b
111. S 5 3 3 Display of Cause for Termination and Operating Status Cause for Termination When emulation is terminated the cause of termination is displayed as the Cause of last break on the Platform page in the System Status window and on the HDI window s status bar Table 5 21 is a list of the messages that indicate the various causes for termination Table 5 21 Causes for Termination Display BREAK CONDITION A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning Break Condition A has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Break Condition B has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Break Condition C has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION U1 2 3 4 Break Condition U has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENCE U Sequential Break Condition U has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENCE A Sequential Break Condition A has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENCE B Sequential Break Condition B has been satisfied BREAK KEY A forced break has been issued via Halt in the Run menu or the Halt button BREAKPOINT The break was triggered by a software breakpoint BREAK SEQUENCE The break was triggered by a software sequential breakpoint ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION A break instruction H 0000 has been executed MULTI BREAK Break triggered by the multibreak feature RESET BY E8000S An error has occurred in the user system The emulator has input a RESETP signal
112. SH7706 No File Name Contents of File 1 E8000 SYS System program for the emulator Controls the evaluation ship board and executes various commands such as for emulation Loaded to the memory of the emulator when the emulator system program is started up 2 SHDCT29R SYS MPU control program Controls the MPU on the evaluation chip board Loaded to the memory of the emulator when the emulator system program is started up 3 SHCNF770 SYS Configuration file for storing the MPU s operating mode and map information Loaded with the emulator system program 4 DIAG SYS Diagnostic and maintenance program Loaded to the memory of the emulator station for maintenance The system programs are registered by using a dedicated E8000 system installation tool hereafter referred to as the ESI The procedure is described below To install the system programs use Auto Install or Custom Install mode Auto Install mode automatically installs all system program Custom Install mode allows flexibility in the installation of the system programs First Auto Install is described Turn on the emulator station Select SH7729R E8000S Emulator Software Tools System Install Tool from Start Programs 51 RENESAS eAccessories gt A StartUp b gt MS DOS Prompt ey Windows Explorer SEN state Coniouaton Baa Hitachi Debugging Interface KA System Install Tool Help nstall Tool Figure 3 15 Start M
113. SID value the emulator sets breakpoints to the virtual addresses in the virtual space When doing this the emulator modifies the ASID value to the 282 RENESAS specified value and sets the breakpoints Then the emulator restores the ASID to its original value When the user does not specify an ASID value the emulator sets breakpoints to virtual addresses according to the ASID value that was set by the user at command input When the user specifies neither physical nor virtual and the emulator can use VP_MAP the emulator translates addresses using the VP_MAP If the emulator cannot use the VP_MAP the emulator sets breakpoints to physical or virtual addresses according to the MMU state at command input When the emulator sets breakpoints to virtual addresses the user must set an ASID value of the PTEH register in the MPU at command input When the user sets breakpoints to the cache area the emulator fills and refills the cache area with contents at the breakpoint addresses before and after the emulator executes the user program If the emulator cannot restore the user program addresses that were replaced by breakpoint instructions when the emulator completes the execution of the user program break instructions will remain in the user program and the emulator will clear the breakpoints However if the emulator could not restore the instructions due to the generation of a TLB error or TLB miss hit break instructions will remain in the user
114. Station Rear Panel eeeseeeseeeeeseeerssreerssrsrrsrerresresrerreserrreserresesrenesreerssere 13 Device Control Board ois ene ereenn e e ee E EEEn eE EE E E 15 Evaluation Chip Board HS7729REBH8 1H essssesssseessersesssesresrsrensssrerreserrreresrenees 16 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeenseenseenaes 20 System Configuration Using a LAN Adapter eee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenseenseenaes 21 Emulator Preparation FlOWchart cceecesecesecsecseeceecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseesaeenseenaes 23 Connecting the Memory Board eee eeceecesecssecssecsseceecaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseenseenaes 25 Connecting the Device Control Board seseessesesssseesrsreessrrrreresrreresrenresrerreserrreresreet 26 Connecting Trace Cables to the Emulator Station sseessesseseeeseeerrseeerrserereserresresreeses 29 Connecting Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board ssssssseeeseeessseeereseseresrsreees 31 External Probe Connector siie ee e ee tence tues cbt E Sea TN 32 Installing the Crystal Oscillator sirios nE A 34 Connecting the System Ground seesseeseeesesseesssreerssrerrsststesrrsreereserrrssertreresreneseeerssene 35 Connecting the Frame Ground ssn isebe neee pe air iaee iEn iest 36 Host Interface S witches lt is mni a A e a E Er E E A REE 37 Allocatable Memory Area of PC Interface Board 000 eee ee ceeeesecesecseeeneeeeeeseeees 43 PC Interface Board Switch w0 eee ee esc
115. This command specifies hardware break conditions Break Condition A B C The emulator stops program execution when the specified conditions are satisfied For details on conditions refer to the description of lt option gt in the BCS command When the user specifies a hardware sequential break sequential points and reset points can be set Cancellation This command clears hardware break conditions Break Condition A B C sequential points and reset points Break Condition A B When the user does not specify a channel number all of the specified hardware break conditions are cleared If the user specifies a hardware sequential break the user cannot specify a channel number Display This command displays break conditions Break Condition A B C that have been set When the user does not specify a channel number the emulator displays all of the specified hardware break conditions The display format is as follows Break Condition Xn lt Enable Disable gt lt Contents specified gt X A B C N Number from to 8 The following will be shown when a hardware sequential break is specified Break Condition X Sequential lt Enable Disable gt n lt Contents specified gt X A B n Sequential number Start from and condition is satisfied at maximum of 7 R indicates a reset point Enable or Disable This command enables or disables break conditions Break Condition A B C sequential points and reset points Break Condition A B tha
116. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http Awww renesas com inquiry 2CENESAS 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gra
117. Using the Emulator Item Delays between MPU Pins and the Connecior ns Address 0 208 Data 0 064 CS Delay HL 0 000 Delay LH 1 352 RD Delay HL 0 051 Delay LH 0 129 WE Delay HL 0 021 Delay LH 0 105 CLK Delay HL 0 341 Delay LH 0 483 The basic bus cycle 2 states is shown in figure A 1 The user system interface circuits connected to the user system are shown in figure A 2 339 RENESAS CKIO A25 to AO RD WR D31 to DO When read D31 to DO When written BS DACKn Figure A 1 Basic Bus Cycle 340 RENESAS SH7729R SH7706 User system LVTH16373 ae EPM7128AETC144 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 1 341 RENESAS SH7729R SH7706 User system LVTH16244 LVTH16244 LVTH16244 LVTH16244 ASEBRKACK PTF 6 ASEBRKAGK ETEIE STATUS1 STATUS1 STATUSO STATUSO LVTH16244 _ __ gt EPM7128AETC144 Only available for the SH7729R 342 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 2 RENESAS SH7729R SH7706 3 VCC LVTH16244 1ka LVTH16244 3 VCC 1ko 3 VCC 3 1ko IRQO IRLO IRQ1IRL1 IRQ2 IRL2 Rogie LVTH16244 LVTH16244 IRQ4 avec LVTH16244 LVTH16244 ro 3 vcc EPM7128AETC144 1ko LVTH16244 LVTH16244 i LVTH16244 to lt O O LAW 5 LVTH16244 3 VCC RESETP LVTH16244 3 s S EPM7128AETC144 E
118. Watch from the pop up menu The Add Watch dialog box is displayed Voriable or expression p Cancel max Figure 4 19 Add Watch Dialog Box e Input variable max and click the OK button The Watch Window window will now also show the long type variable max 90 RENESAS Watch Window ofj ojx a EE annn Ox003fffd8 57 long 101 H 77008ddd Ox003fffd0 long Figure 4 20 Watch Window Window Displaying the Variable e Click the symbol to the left of array a in the Watch Window window to expand the variable and watch all the elements in the array Watch Window Value f Ox003fffd8 53 ETET H 00000000 Ox003f ffd8 z w M igh w 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ax Figure 4 21 Watch Window Window Displaying Array Elements H 000053dc H 00002704 H 00005665 H 00000daa H 0000421f H 00003ead H 00004did H 00002f5a H 000020da H 7008ddd RENESAS t t Ox003fffdc Ox003 ffe0 Ox003fffe4 Ox003fffe8 Ox003fffec Ox003 ff 0 Ox003 fff 4 OxO003 ff 8 Ox003ffffc Ox003f ff d0 SO et et et et et et 91 4 11 Stepping Through a Program The HDI provides various step commands that allow efficient program debugging For details on step function refer to section 5 4 Step Function Table 4 4 Step Command Command Description Step In Steps through the statements in a function by each line or
119. al break type a b Specifies Condition A B lt action gt Keyword Enables or disables hardware sequential function off No sequential specification break Sequential break trace Sequential trace stop Description e Setting This command specifies hardware sequential break or sequential trace stop which are the conditions set by the user in hardware break condition Break Condition A B or trace condition Trace Condition A B The user must set the conditions by using the BCS or TAS command e Display This command displays the conditions currently set Examples 1 To specify Break Condition A as sequential break CSQ A BREAK 2 To specify Trace Condition B as sequential trace stop CSQ B TRACE 3 To cancel hardware sequential specification of CONDITION A CSQ A OFF 4 To specify the contents set for CONDITION A CSQ A The display format is as follows gt CSQ A Trace Condition A Sequential 278 RENESAS Notes e The emulator clears all conditions set to Break Condition A B and Trace Condition A B when the user specifies break or trace in CSQ with hardware break condition Break Condition A B and trace condition Trace Condition A B set Therefore the user must set Break Condition A B or Trace Condition A B for hardware sequential break or trace sequential stop e The user must not use this command to enable or disable sequential hardware breaks during user program execution 279 RENESAS 6 2 4 Software Brea
120. an address bus or data bus condition Internal I O area access Breaks when the internal I O area is accessed LDTLB instruction execution Breaks when an LDTLB instruction is executed Note Either an address bus condition or a PC condition can be specified There are 4 channels U1 U4 Internal break conditions that can be specified by Break Condition U1 to U4 are shown in table 5 47 171 RENESAS Table 5 47 Specifiable Internal Break Conditions Break Break Break Break Break Condition Condition U1 Conditions U2 Condition U3 Condition U4 Address bus O O x x PC Either Either X X Data bus O x x X Read Write O O x x ASID O O X X Access type O O X X Internal I O area X x O X access LDTLB instruction X X x O execution Notes O Can be specified X Cannot be specified 1 A PC condition cannot be specified Setting an Internal Break The setting of Break Condition U1 is taken as an example Select Add from the menu in the Breakpoints window and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Condition U page Point Sequence Condition A ConditionB Condition C Condition U Condition Edit Reset Reset All Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 38 Break Dialog Box Condition U Page 172 RENESAS Table 5 48 Condition U Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Break Condition U Empty is displayed if ther
121. and could not be recovered after GO command execution is terminated Accordingly a break instruction remains at the breakpoint address A hardware error might have occurred Correct the error and reload and re execute the program NOT FOUND The specified data or information was not found Correctly specify data INTERNAL I O AREA The internal I O area was accessed THE VALUE OF THE MD PIN IN THE USER SYSTEM IS INCORRECT Settings were made for initiation enabling the input of the operating mode pins MD5 to MDO in the user system However the emulator starts up using the settings made in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box instead because the values of the MD pins in the user system are incorrect Check the values of the operating mode pins in the user system A PART OF THE CPU OPERATING MODE I O PORT SETTING WILL BE MODIFIED To set the CSO bus width as 32 bits the settings in the I O Port page of the CPU Operating Mode dialog box are modified as follows WE 2 3 PTK 6 7 gt WE 2 3 D31 D16 gt Data Bus ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ADDRESS The memory contents of the address specified with the BREAK or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command is a break instruction A breakpoint cannot be specified at this address Note For the SH7706 the PTC 1 2 pin is used instead of the PTK 6 7 pin 332 RENESAS Table 7 1 Error Messages cont Error Message OUT OF CS AREA ADDRESS Description and Solution
122. and will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Emulator station O Emulator station N N 28 RENESAS 3 Connect the trace cables into the station to evaluation chip board interface connectors CN1 CN2 and CN3 on the emulator station s rear panel Confirm that the shape of the trace cable plug matches that of the station to evaluation chip board interface connector before connecting Also note which trace cable is connected to which emulator station connector so that the other end of the trace cable is connected to the matching connector number on the evaluation chip board After the connection is completed alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the trace cable to prevent the upper or lower side of the trace cable from lifting off the connector Figure 3 4 shows how to correctly connect the trace cables to the emulator station connectors There are red yellow and blue stickers on the panel for each station to evaluation chip board interface connector DCONT TRC ONT GND cable S_ eso dldd e AC100 120V AC200 240V 2A 50 60Hz e o Colors of the trace cable labels are Emulator station rear panel red yellow and blue Connect the cables to the connectors with the same color Then tighten the screws of the cables Figure 3 4 Connecting Trace Cables to the Emulator Station 29 RENESAS CAUTION At shipment the trace cable
123. as the pages shown in table 5 63 Table 5 63 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Pages Page Description History Displays the history of conditions that have been set as Trace Condition A or B Conditions can be moved from the History page to the Entry List page Entry List Creates modifies duplicates and deletes conditions for Trace Condition A or B For details on each page refer to the description under Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition in section 5 5 3 Hardware Sequential Break Sequential Trace Stop a Overview A sequential trace stop occurs after a set of channels of a trace stop condition has been satisfied in a specified order This function uses Trace Condition A or B a sequence of up to seven trace stop conditions and one reset point can be specified as Trace Condition A or B The user must consider the order of satisfaction in specifying trace stop conditions for Trace Conditions A and B tracing only stops when the trace stop conditions have all been satisfied in the order specified by the user When the reset point is passed the record of sequential trace stop conditions that have been satisfied to that point is cleared and the emulator restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential trace stop conditions from the first condition 191 RENESAS b Setting a Sequential Trace Stop Select Trace for Condition A under Sequence on the Execution M
124. ation that satisfies the specified conditions Trace Find Jumps to the next record of trace information that satisfies the specified conditions 208 RENESAS Trace Filter Function This function displays all trace information that satisfies the conditions specified in the Trace window The search conditions can be specified in the Trace Filter dialog box Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Filter from the menu and the Trace Filter dialog box will appear Select the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box then select the Pattern radio button in the Type group box gt Addisource start Enig Figure 5 65 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page 209 RENESAS Table 5 73 General Page Options Option Display Description Selects the trace information for display in the Trace window Bus Trace Displays external bus trace information Initial value AUD trace Displays AUD trace information Bus AUD trace Simultaneously displays both external trace and AUD trace information Type Selects a format for the display of trace information Cycle Disables any search conditions set in the Trace Filter dialog box Displays the whole contents of the trace buffer in the Trace window Pattern Searches under the conditions set in the Trace Filter dialog box and displays the results in the
125. be pinched Prevent the upper or lower side of the board from lifting off the connector Alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the board Emulator station rear panel Device control board Power cable x G g N o D m ie ie 2 x Figure 3 3 Connecting the Device Control Board 26 RENESAS 3 3 2 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board At shipment the evaluation chip board is packed separately from the emulator station Use the following procedure to connect the evaluation chip board to the emulator station or to disconnect them when moving the emulator A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the emulator station s front panel is not lit 2 Remove the AC power cable of the emulator station from the outlet if the cable is connected to the outlet 27 RENESAS WARNING When connecting the cable ensure that the upper or lower side of the cable does not lift off the connector Alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the cable while gradually pushing the cable toward the connector Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD damage the user system and emulator
126. ber of bus cycles to be executed after the trace acquisition condition is satisfied Valid when lt tracetype gt is stop lt type gt is a or b and lt channel_numbers is 7 To specify the number of bus cycles to be executed delay lt value gt Any value from H 1 to H 7FFF can be specified as lt value gt 315 RENESAS Description Setting Specifies a trace acquisition condition Trace Condition A B C Free trace Acquires trace information in all bus cycles when no conditions are set Range trace Acquires trace information in the bus cycles within which the specified conditions are matched For a description of the conditions that can be specified see the description of lt option gt for the TAS command Trace stop When the set condition is satisfied the emulator stops acquiring trace information and the system enters the trace halt state For conditions that can be set see the description of lt option gt for the tas command Although the user program is still in emulation trace information cannot be acquired in the trace halt state When the trace stop condition is satisfied the following message is displayed on the status bar and a message box is displayed TRACE STOP When more than one condition is set for range tracing the trace information is acquired when the OR of the conditions is satisfied When the trace stop condition is set trace information is acquired until the trace stop condition is satis
127. ble operation can be expected during high speed emulation 352 RENESAS 158 0 150 0 100 0 4 0 N Sg External frame of the evaluation chip board A A IC socket center lines JJ Patterning prohibited area Unit mm Tolerance 0 1 mm unless otherwise specified Figure B 3 Recommended Dimensions for Mount Pad Top View Observe the restrictions on the locations of parts shown in figure B 4 within the range of the external frame of the evaluation chip board as shown in figure B 3 353 RENESAS lt ____ Evaluation chip board HS7706EBH81H 09 J User system socket NQPACK176SD Usersysterm board manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation Unit mm Tolerance 0 1 mm unless otherwise specified Figure B 4 Restrictions on Parts Location 354 RENESAS Appendix C Connecting the Emulator to the User System C 1 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board to the User System 1 Installing an IC socket the NQPACK208SD NQPACK176SD when using the SH7706 manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation for the QFP208 FP 208C package Only use the provided IC socket manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation the NQPACK208SD with the evaluation chip board No other IC socket is suitable a Installing IC Socket Use the guide pins provided to determine where to install the IC socket as shown in figure C 1 Apply epoxy resin adhesive to the
128. box and set the Format combo box as Long Word Open Memory Window x Address Cancel Format Long Word Figure 4 15 Open Memory Window Dialog Box 87 RENESAS e Click the OK button The Long Memory window showing the specified area of memory is displayed Long Memory H OO3FFFD8 Data oooo0000 oo00053DC 00002704 00005665 O0000DAA 00000421F OO0003EAD o0004D1D 00002F5A 000020D Figure 4 16 Long Memory Window 88 RENESAS 4 10 Watching Variables As the user steps through a program it is possible to watch the values of variables used in the program For example to check the contents of the long type array a declared at the beginning of the main function use the following procedure e Click the left of array a displayed in the Source window to position the cursor e Click the Source window with the right mouse button and select Instant Watch from a pop up menu The Instant Watch dialog box is displayed Instant Watch Ed Add Watch Figure 4 17 Instant Watch Dialog Box e Click the Add Watch button to add a variable to the Watch Window window 89 RENESAS Watch Window Oo OF x Value H f 0x003 ff d8 long 10 Figure 4 18 Watch Window Window Displaying the Array The user can also add a variable to the Watch Window window by specifying its name e Click the Watch Window window with the right mouse button and select Add
129. bsidiaries hereafter collectively referred to as Hitachi pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design performance and safety of the emulator product Hitachi reserves the right to change wholly or partially the specifications design user s manual and other documentation at any time without notice Target User of the Emulator Product This emulator product should only be used by those who have carefully read and thoroughly understood the information and restrictions contained in the user s manual Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism It is highly recommended that first time users be instructed by users that are well versed in the operation of the emulator product RENESAS LIMITED WARRANTY Hitachi warrants its emulator products to be manufactured in accordance with published specifications and free from defects in material and or workmanship Hitachi at its option will repair or replace any emulator products returned intact to the factory transportation charges prepaid which Hitachi upon inspection determine to be defective in material and or workmanship The foregoing shall constitute the sole remedy for any breach of Hitachi s warranty See the Hitachi warranty booklet for details on the warranty period This warranty extends only to you the original Purchaser It is not transferable to anyone who subsequently purchases the emulator product from you Hitachi is not liable f
130. bus position and the address bus value refer to the hardware manual 319 RENESAS 6 2 19 TRACE_DISPLAY TD Command syntax and parameters td range lt startcycle gt to lt endcycle gt mode lt displaymode gt Description Displays trace information Parameter Type Description lt startcycle gt Numeric Specifies the first cycle value of the range of trace information to be displayed lt endcycle gt Numeric Specifies the last cycle value of the range of trace information to be displayed lt displaymode gt Keyword Specifies the trace information to be displayed bus External bus trace information aud AUD trace information mix External bus trace and AUD trace information Examples To display acquired trace information within the range from D 1000 to D O TD RANGE D 1000 to 0 mode bus 320 RENESAS 6 2 20 TRACE MODE TM Command syntax and parameters e Setting tm lt tracemode gt lt bus_time gt lt bus_sdram gt lt aud_option gt lt option gt Bus trace No specification Bus trace and AUD trace lt aud gt aud_time e Display tm Parameter Type Description lt tracemode gt Keyword Specifies the trace information acquisition mode ofbreak Breaks when the trace buffer overflows oftrace Stops tracing when the trace buffer overflows ofoff Does not break Continues the trace acquisition lt bus_time gt Keyword Specifies the minimum time interval for time stamping of
131. but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers
132. by replacing the contents of the specified address with a break instruction H 0000 Up to 255 software breakpoints can be set After the emulator passes the specified number of breakpoints it stops the execution of the user program Do not set software breakpoints to the following addresses 280 RENESAS An address whose memory content is H 0000 The address where BREAKSEQUENCE_SET was set Areas other than CS except for the internal RAM area Instructions that satisfy Break Condition U2 Slot instruction of the delay branch instruction Cancellation This command clears software breakpoints that have been set When lt address gt is omitted all of the set breakpoints will be cleared Display This command displays software breakpoints that have been set The following shows the display format gt BD H c000000 D 10 D 10 space physical Enable H c000000 D 1 D 0 space virtual asid D O Disable H c000000 D 15 D 0 space physical D 255 Enable a b d e a Breakpoint address b Number of times specified c Pass count of each pass point at the end of execution cannot be displayed during execution d Address space Physical specifies physical address and Virtual specifies virtual address the user must set an ASID value e Enable Disable Enable or Disable This command enables or disables software breakpoints that have been set When the user does not specify paramet
133. c Use four screws M2 x 10 mm to fix the IC socket on the HS7729REBH81H board to the IC socket on the user system Drive each of the four screws gradually tightening each diagonally opposite pair in turn as shown Do not concentrate pressure on a single screw as this will cause a contact failure or otherwise degraded performance Hold the IC socket in place by hand to prevent the application of pressure due to the force of rotation see figure C 2 Order of Tightening the Screws 356 RENESAS Drive screws in gradually alternating between corners as shown above Figure C 2 Order of Tightening the Screws Top View of the HS7729REBH81H Board d Use spacers and nuts to fix the user system to the HS7729REBH81H board CAUTION Check the location of pin 1 before connecting lf the emulator malfunctions while in use there might be a crack in the soldered connections on the IC socket Check for conduction by using a tester and solder that part again if necessary 357 RENESAS Screws M2 x 10 mm HS7729REBH81H board i a Spacer Pin 1 User system Washer and ut e 1 Figure C 3 Connecting the HS7729REBH81H Board to the User System 358 RENESAS C 2 Connecting the Cables for Tracing A WARNING Always switch the emulator and user system OFF before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system or emulator
134. cal or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the start address and end address in the end address range are automatically displayed VP_MAP Sets translation of the addresses in Start and End in the Start Address Range and End Address range according to the VP_MAP command s setting for the respective addresses When this option is not set or VP_MAP is invalid no translation takes place Note The execution efficiency is measured using the address bus value The measurement will be incorrect when an end address is specified to be close to the next instruction of a delayed slot instruction 230 RENESAS e Time Out page Use this page to set the timeout value This dialog box is only displayed to allow setting of the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 General Address Time Out Count Time Qut M Don t Care Figure 5 78 Performance 1 Dialog Box Time Out Page Table 5 83 Options of the Time Out Page Option Description Don t Care Selects no timeout value Input area Sets a timeout value as a number When this is omitted the setting is 0 M minutes in the range from 0 to 59 S seconds in the range from 0 to 59 US microseconds in the range from 0 to 999999 Note The maximum measurement time is approximately 14 minutes If the value set is greater than 14 minutes it will be ignored When a time out occurs while the display of the Performance
135. ce The order in which the conditions must be satisfied to generate a break is the order in which they were added in the Sequence list box Click the WR button to add a reset point The reset point condition will be displayed to the right of Reset in the Sequence list box Click the OK button to return to the Condition A page and the hardware sequential break conditions will have been set The Sequential Condition list displays the hardware sequential break conditions that have been specified Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box For details on the creation of hardware break conditions refer to the description of the Entry List page in Entry List Page under Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition in section 5 5 3 Hardware Break 168 RENESAS Condition History Entry List Condition New address H 4000 address H 3000 Edit address H 2000 address H 1000 Delete Ente gt Duplicate Sequence No Condition address H 1000 address H 2000 address H 3000 address H 4000 Ej Delete Cancel Help Figure 5 36 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page 169 RENESAS Table 5 45 Entry List Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions that have previously been set are displayed in a list New The Condition A B dialog box is displayed so that new conditions can be created Edit Selecting a condi
136. ce cesecesecseecneecseeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeesseeeseesaecsaeesaeeaee 258 Table 5 104 BP Column Display Item eee cee a e E 259 Table 6 1 List of Commands eienn ea eek een a ees 263 Table E Error MESSa ges uae e Qeened duvevs copaet oe r Er EEEE i Er TEREE S 332 Table 7 2 HDI Ertror Messa gestant icin feet E eh ee eee E ERS 334 Table A 1 Bus Timing when Using the Emulator eee eceeceeecesecesecesecnaecsaecaeesaeeeneeees 339 Table D 1 Emulator State and Operation of Internal Modules eee ee eeceseceseceseceeeeeeeee 367 Table E 1 Pins Occupied Solely by the Emulator eeceeeceseceeceseceeeceecaeeeseseaeeeeeees 370 Table E 2 Delay Time for Signals Connected via the Evaluation Chip Board eee 371 Table E 3 Initial Values of Registers in the SH7729R and the Emulator eee eres 373 Table E 4 Relations between the Type of Step Function and Available Break Conditions Xvi RENESAS Section 1 Overview Overview This system is an efficient software and hardware development support tool for application systems using the HD6417729R HD6417709S and HD6417706 hereafter referred to as SH7729R and also referred to as SH7709S or SH7706 in descriptions specific to HD6417709S or HD6417706 microcomputer developed by Hitachi Ltd The SH7729R incorporates the cache memory memory management unit MMU the timer required for system configuration the realtime clock the interrupt controller the user break controller the bus state controller the inte
137. cees 96 Source Window Step Out Step In eseeseseseeeesesssessseeserssressrrssressreserseeseesseesse 96 Watch Window Display Example 2 0 cesceesccessceceseceeececeeeeeneeceaeeeeneecsaeeeeneecees 97 Source Window Before Step Over Execution 00 eeeescecseceeneeceseceeneeceseeeeneecees 98 Source Window Step Over aiene ie a E A E RER 99 Watch Window Display Example 3 s ssssesssessesssesssessreseserrsressressresseeseeseeesessseesse 99 Locals Wind Wasser negesno oreen ae eae Ene eE ar RE 100 Locals Window Displaying Array a Elements essesesseeseeesesseerssreessesreseseeeee 101 Contipuration Dialog Box sci n erea e a theo a E EE E S RRS 106 Configuration Dialog Box General Page 00 0 ee eesceenceceseceeececeeeeeneeceaeeeeeeeees 107 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Model Page 0 0 0 eeeseeseeeeneeceereeeneeeeee 110 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode2 Page cesscesreeeneceeeeeeneeee 112 Configuration Dialog Box Loading flash memory Page eeeeseecesreeeneeeeee 114 Configuration Dialog Box CPU Operating Mode Page ceeeeseeeeereeeneeeeee 118 ix RENESAS Figure 5 7 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Device Page ceeceesseceeeeeesteceeneeenseeeeee 120 Figure 5 8 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box MD Pin Page 0 cee eeeeeeeeesseceeneeeneeeeenee 121 Figure 5 9 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Memory Type Page 0 0 0 e
138. celled or displayed and software sequential breakpoints can be displayed or cancelled in the BP column of the Source window Software breakpoints can be set or cancelled by selecting a program PC breakpoint with the left hand mouse button and double clicking in the BP column or by placing the cursor at the line where the breakpoint was set and press the F9 key This function is the same as for the BP columns in the Disassembly and Labels windows The contents of the items displayed in the BP columns are shown in table 5 104 Table 5 104 BP Column Display Item Displayed Item Contents No display Nothing is set Break A software break is set PASS A pass point for a software sequential break is set RESET A reset point for a software sequential break is set Notes 1 When a software breakpoint is set in the BP column the satisfaction count is 1 and the address space is Normal 2 Software sequential breakpoints PASS or RESET can be displayed and cancelled in the BP column but cannot be set in the BP column To set a software sequential breakpoint use the Break window or the BSS command 3 Software and software sequential breakpoints are displayed in the BP column in such a way that the addresses match regardless of the specified address spaces 4 When software breakpoints are cancelled in the BP column all of the software breakpoints that match those addresses are also cancelled regardless of the specif
139. change a 000032056 min a 9 o000030Sa max a 0 oo0030Se while 1 long t int i 7 Ek gap Figure 4 23 Source Window Step In The highlighted line moves to the first line of the sort function in the Source window 94 RENESAS 4 11 2 Executing Step Out Command The Step Out command steps out of the called function and stops at the next line that called the function in the program e To step out of the sort function select Step Out from the Run menu or click the Step Out button tF in the toolbar WI TUTORIAL c BE E Line Address Label Source 00003036 Break sortia 00003042 max al9 00003046 min 0 0000304 a max 0 ooo00304e change a 00003056 min a 9 0000305a max a 0 o00030Se while til 0000306c _sort void sorti long a long t int i j KE qap Figure 4 24 Source Window Step Out 95 RENESAS The data of array a displayed in the Watch Window window is sorted in ascending order Watch Window of ioj x a 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 a r S T a a r T a pi Ea Value 0x003fffd8 long 10 H 00000000 4 H 00000daa H 000020da H 00002704 H d0002f5a H 00003ead H 0000421 f H 00004d1d H 000053dc H 00005665 H 7008ddd long long long long long long long long long long long OxO003 ff d8 OxO003fffdc 0x003f ffel Ox003fffe4 O
140. cified conditions and displays the information for bus cycles on which it was acquired The search is in the range specified by lt startcycle gt and lt endcycle gt For conditions that can be specified see the description of lt option gt Examples 1 To display trace information with the address bus in the range from H 10027C to H 100304 or the write cycle for the last five instructions of acquired trace information TS RANGE D 5 TO 0 ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE 2 To display trace information with the data bus value at H 4750 or the read cycle for the last five instructions of acquired trace information TS RANGE 326 D 5 TO 0 DATA H 4750 DIRECTION READ RENESAS 6 2 22 Address Translation Table Command VS VC VD VE e Setting VPMAP_ SET VS e Cancellation VPMAP_CLEAR VC e Display VPMAP_DISPLAY VD e Enable Disable VPMAP_ENABLE VE Command syntax and parameters e Setting vs lt lsaddress gt lt leaddress gt lt paddress gt e Cancellation ve lt address gt e Display vd e Enable Disable ve lt enable gt Parameter Type Description lt lsaddress gt Numeric Specifies the start address of a virtual address range to be set in the VP_MAP table lt leaddress gt Numeric Specifies the end address of a virtual address range to be set in the VP_MAP table lt paddress gt Numeric Specifies the start address of a physical address range to be set in t
141. correctly Writing flash memory Command error H XXXXXXXX An error occurred while writing to the flash memory The flash memory was not written to correctly Check that the writing module which has been created is valid and that the flash memory is operating correctly trace mode data no change The contents of the Trace Mode page have not been changed Set a condition and click the Apply button Invalid parameter An illegal command parameter was input 336 RENESAS 7 3 Error Messages for the LAN Driver When the LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H is used error messages of the following type may be output due to a network problem WSXXXXXXXx lt error message gt WSXXXXXXXX Error code xxxxxxxx is an alphanumeric string lt error message gt Error message that corresponds to the error code If such an error message is output consult your system manager 337 RENESAS 338 RENESAS Appendix A User System Interface A l User System Interface Circuit The circuits that interface the MPU in the emulator to the user system include buffers and resistors When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system hardware compensating for FANIN FANOUT and propagation delays The AC timing values when using the emulator are shown in table A 1 Note The values with the emulator connected in table A 1 are measurements for reference and are not guaranteed values Table A 1 Bus Timing when
142. curred in the shared RAM BxTBM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXXXXXX An error occurred in the trace buffer memory FIRM RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXXXXXX An error occurred in the firmware RAM area 63 RENESAS 2 Errors that may occur when the device control board is being tested A program operating in the device control board is being loaded and the device control board is being tested If an error occurs the following message is displayed Error Message THE INSTALLED E8000S SYSTEM CANNOT BE STARTED BECAUSE IT IS USED FOR SHxxxx Description The installed firmware is for some other device Install the correct emulator system programs SHxxxx The name of the device for which the installed system programs are intended INVALID FIRMWARE SYSTEM Other firmware has been installed Reinstall the correct emulator system program This message is displayed when the H UDI s input clock frequency is higher than 1 2 the internal input clock frequency l EMULATOR FIRMWARE NOT READY The program operating on the device control board is not operating correctly Please check that the evaluation chip board is connected correctly FIRMWARE SYSTEM FILE NOT FOUND A program operating in the device control board does not exit An incorrect system program has been registered in the flash memory Reinstall the system program and restart the
143. d RS H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined RE H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined MOD H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined DSR H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 A0G H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined A0 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined A1G H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined A1 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined M0 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined M1 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined xo H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined x1 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined yo H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined y1 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined Notes 1 X indicates an undefined value 2 This is not available when SH7709S or SH7706 is selected RENESAS 373 2 There is a delay on these signals since the user system interface of the emulator includes pull up resistors and buffers Due to the pull up resistor the signals can be at high level even when they are also in their high impedance state Take these points into account when preparing hardware for the user system For details on the user system interface and the delays on signals see appendix A the User System Interface Circuit 3 The SH7729R supports operation at external operating frequency CKIO of up to 66 6 MHz If the external operating frequency CKIO of the SH7729R is set at 66 6 MHz or more normal operation of the emulator cannot be guaranteed E 9 Step Function Some ty
144. d for Break Condition A B or C Hardware break occurs when all of the specified conditions an AND operation are satisfied Table 5 29 Hardware Break Conditions Break Condition Description Address bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Read Write The condition is satisfied when the RD and RDWR signal levels match a specification External probe The condition is satisfied when the external probe PRB signal levels match a specification External interrupt The condition is satisfied when the external interrupt signal levels match a specification Satisfaction count The break occurs when the above conditions are satisfied the specified number of times Delay The break occurs the specified number of bus cycles after the above conditions have been satisfied Figure 5 21 shows an example of the operation of a hardware break when an address bus condition and satisfaction count condition have been specified User program Break condition The address H 2000 is accessed for H 50 times Break dition i Break occurs after the address Pee OAS H 2000 is accessed for H 50 times satisfied Program flow Branch instructions etc Figure 5 21 Example of a Hardware Break with a Satisfaction Count Condition Specified 148 RENESAS Figure 5 22 shows an example of
145. de I1 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 I2 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 I3 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 d Displays the execution time ratio numerically e Execution time f Execution count g Maximum subroutine execution time Subroutine time measurement mode 2 h Minimum subroutine execution time Subroutine time measurement mode 2 i Average subroutine execution time Subroutine time measurement mode 2 j Total execution time Examples 1 To set the following conditions to acquire on channel 2 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 Subroutine name SORTI Start address H 10002E End address H 10015C PS CHANNEL 2 MODE TIME1 NAME SORT1 START H 10002E END H 10015cC 2 To set the following conditions to acquire on channel 5 308 RENESAS Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Subroutine name TEST1 Start address range H 100000 to H 10002E End address range H 100030 to H 10015C PS CHANNEL 5 MODE TIME3 NAME TEST1 START H 100000 TO H 10002E END H 100030 TO H 10015C 3 To clear the performance condition set to channel 2 PC CHANNEL 2 4 To clear all performance conditions PC Notes The emulator can measure the performance analysis of a subroutine by using the address bus value Therefore if the user sets a subroutine end address to an address near to an address next to a branch or delay slot instruction the emulator will not be able to measure the performance analysis correctly Theref
146. der certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas
147. ding to flash memory Select Enable to download to the flash memory area After Enable is selected the writing module is always invoked when Load Program is selected from the File menu or Load is selected from the Memory menu Disable Does not download to flash memory Enable Downloads to flash memory Erasing flash memory Enables or disables erasing before downloading to flash memory Select Enable to invoke the erasing module before invoking the writing module Disable Does not erase flash memory Enable Erases flash memory File name Sets the file names for the writing and erasing modules The files specified here will be loaded to the RAM area before loading to flash memory Bus width of flash memory Sets the bus width for flash memory Flash memory erasing time Sets the timeout value for erasing flash memory If erasing requires a long time choose a large value A positive integer value from 0 to 65535 can be specified All erasing module address Sets the address of the erasing module Writing module address Sets the address of the writing module Note The writing and erasing modules must be prepared by the user Execution jumps from the E8000S firmware to the writing and erasing modules To ensure that the execution successfully jumps from the E8000S firmware to the writing and erasing modules then returns to the E8000S firmware satisfy the following condit
148. display the specified internal break conditions as condition 1 Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Internal break conditions are specified for the other channels in the same way The following sections describe each page 173 RENESAS a Address Page Use this page to specify the address bus conditions Address Data ASID Bus State Count C Only program fetched address C Only program fetched address after C X Bus address C Y Bus address Address Ho Non user mask C User mask Wask Figure 5 39 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Address Page Table 5 50 Address Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no address condition Address Select this button to set the address bus value specified in Address as the condition Only program Select this button so that the condition is satisfied as soon as the value fetched address specified in Address is on the address but before the instruction is fetched from the address Only program fetched address after Select this button so that the condition is only satisfied after an instruction fetch from the address specified in Address X Bus address Sets the X BUS address bus break as the condition Specify the address value of the word length This can only be set for Break Condition U1 when SH7729R is selected Y Bus address Sets the Y BUS address bus break as the condition S
149. ditions irl lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows To specify bits IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x x xX Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x koale Die ee I 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRL IRQ number When is specified the condition applies for any and all bits lt resetpopt gt Specifies a RESETP signal condition To search through the trace information when the RESETP signal is low resetp low 325 RENESAS Parameter lt resetmopt gt Description Specifies a RESETM signal condition To search through the trace information when the RESETM signal is low resetm low lt breqopt gt Specifies a BREQ signal condition To search through the trace information when the BREQ signal is low breq low lt timeopt gt Description Searches through the trace information for the specified period of time To check the trace information at a specific time time lt time1 gt To search through the trace information for a specified range of time time lt time1 gt to lt time2 gt Specify the start of the period as lt time1 gt and the end of the period as lt time2 gt Specify the search time as follows hhh mm ss uuuuuu hhh Hours numeric from 0 to 999 mm Minutes numeric from 0 to 59 ss Seconds numeric from 0 to 59 uuuuuu Microseconds numeric from 0 to 999999 Searches for trace information that satisfies the spe
150. e Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition x Trace Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C Bus Trace Buffer Over Flow No break x Time Stamp 20ns m IV SDRAM Access Cycle AUD Trace AUD Mode Notused AUD Time Half of CKIO x Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 57 Trace Acquisition Page Bus Trace Group Box 197 RENESAS Table 5 67 Bus Trace Group Box Options Option Description Time Stamp Selects the minimum time resolution for the time stamping of the measured bus trace information from among the values listed below 20ns Time stamping is in minimum time units of 20 ns initial value 1 6us Time stamping is in minimum time units of 1 627604167 us 614 4 kHz us 52us Time stamping is in minimum time units of 52 0833333 us 19 2 kHz CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with the cycles of the MPU s CKIO signal 1 2 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 2 cycle of the MPU s CKIO signal 1 4 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 4 cycle of the MPU s CKIO signal 1 8 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 8 cycle of the MPU s CKIO signal SDRAM Selects whether or not to edit the address bus or data b
151. e are not available The last 32 hardware break condition that have been specified in the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 dialog boxes are displayed in the Condition list on the History page Select a condition from the Condition list then click the Entry button to register that condition on the Entry List page The condition is deleted from the Condition list b Entry List Page Use this page to create modify duplicate delete and display conditions for Break Condition A or B Condition History Entry List Condition New E Edit Delete Ent gt Duplicate Cancel Help Figure 5 32 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page 162 RENESAS Table 5 42 Entry List Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions that have previously been created can be redisplayed in a list New Displays the Condition A B dialog box so new conditions can be created Edit Modifies a condition Select a condition to be modified from the Condition list then click the Edit button to display the Condition A B dialog box and modify the condition Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Condition list Duplicate Duplicates the condition selected in the Condition list Note Entry is not available The Condition list displays a list of hardware break conditions that have been created Click to select a condition then click the OK button
152. e window set the conditions on the Time Out page timeout and Count page maximum number of executions then execute the user program When the specified time or number is exceeded a break occurs For details on the Performance 1 dialog box Time Out page and Count page refer to section 5 8 Performance Analysis Function Note Software break conditions and software sequential break conditions are ignored 183 RENESAS 5 6 Trace Functions The emulator provides trace functions of two types the external bus trace and the AUD trace Information on up to 131 070 cycles can be acquired in bus cycle units to a trace memory for external bus tracing AUD tracing acquires traced information output from the AUD pin of the MPU A total of up to 65 535 lines of information can be displayed in the HDI s Trace window For details on the Trace window refer to the manual for the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual in the CD R 5 6 1 External Bus Trace Function Dedicated hardware is used to acquire the external bus trace External bus information can be acquired on each bus cycle The settings for external bus tracing can be made in Bus Trace on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box which will be displayed by clicking Acquisition in the pop up menu of the Trace window Trace Conditions A B and C are available Specify a trace acquisition condition on the Condition A B C page of the
153. e 5 50 Table 5 51 Table 5 52 Table 5 53 Table 5 54 Table 5 55 Table 5 56 Table 5 57 Table 5 58 Table 5 59 xiv Causes for Tertnima tony ss eer er opera eena ee vacrspcurtteshdete eE EEEE eo r EnEn E eSa 133 Operating Status Display eessseseseeesesreessstesrssesresrrsrenrsserrrsertentesrenteseerrnsenrreresrentes 134 Step EXEC ON in re dove egy e Ge Sa REE E A E a S N REEE 135 Break Functions an a a E O E N A E 137 Point Page Opwons eei eneee e e ese eee esee A Ea 139 Break Point Dialog Box Options ssseessessssesessreseseeesssrerrssesresresreerssrerrnresrreresreet 140 Sequence Pave Options sc iac ce5 iesseees e n E a E E R Seca 144 Break Sequence Page Options 00 0 eee ee eeeeceeecesecesecesecsecaeecaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 146 Hardware Break Conditions cece cee cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseceaecsaecsaecaeesneseeeseneeseenes 148 Specifiable Hardware Break Conditions 0 ee ee ceecesecesecsseceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 Condition A B C Page Options aisen ain e E SES 151 Break Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 Cl to C8 Dialog Box Pages 151 Addr ss Page Options ressesie penan reee oe T ae a a EE EEE E ETSE E 153 Data Page OPON S e ie oe Ee ees ee E E eee es 154 B s Stat Page Options nnn e E E A E 155 Probe Page Options sinnena ain athe E A E eee 156 Interrupt Page Options airn ees oeoa ee eapi ia Sn E es 157 Count Page Optio S nen heise Seed ee iets Rea A r a 159 Delay Page Options
154. e Source Program enerereseseerersreeerssrersrerereeuseerersreeesrerersrsserserses 81 4 6 Setting the Software Breakpoint 00 0 eee ee eeceseceeceseceecaeecseeeseseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeenaees 83 ALT r Bxecuting the Pro stand eresi a econ usagi sess eaea a a aE Ean aH RAPE aS 84 4 8 Reviewing Brea kpoints sieni n e a E E R E e ES 86 4 9 Naewing Memory oreren n a E A ee bax Sa o e E NSN 87 410 Watching Variables 2 3 cdkey 89 4 11 Stepping Thro sha Pro gran 5 scccssessdesceuteezs esctssoeesee su ccusevtosde edsst cuseesaesudevcunstasecvectsnteesseseed 92 4 11 1 Executing Step In Command 0 eee ceeeecseecseeseecaeeeneeeeecaeecseeeaecneesneeeneeaee 94 4 11 2 Executing Step Out Command 000 eee ee eeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeaeeees 95 4 11 3 Executing Step Over Command 0000 ecceecseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeneeees 98 4 12 Displaying Local Variables is cccsss sigeccasseees suse ssecdeepsdsshetbedt en cedcboosesee aE ENa roS i s 100 4 13 Saving and Loading the Session eee ee ceceseceseceseeecesecscesecsaecsaecsecsaecsaecseesaecsaeeaes 102 Section 5 Emulator Functions isis seas oniss seoviesurdgunsesoshienve vas voded cece tassasiounelys degen deedeuns 103 S Jnttod c hoN sses een ienee aaaeeeaa ee ear EEE gh OSE ea elev p E i ni edeeety 103 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions eee eesceeeceeecesecenecsecaeecseeeeeeeaeees 104 5 2 1 Configuration Dialog Box renin e R a A N N S 106
155. e are no settings 1 to 4 Settings for channels U1 to U4 Edit Modifies the Break Condition U setting selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Break Condition Un dialog box n channel number Reset Clears the Break Condition U settings selected in the Condition list box Reset All Clears all Break Condition U settings in the Condition list box Click the list entry to select condition 1 in the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Break Condition U1 dialog box The Break Condition U1 U4 dialog boxes have the pages shown in table 5 49 Table 5 49 Break Condition U1 U4 Dialog Box Pages Channel Page Description Break Condition U1 Address Sets address or PC conditions Data Sets data conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle and access type conditions ASID Sets ASID conditions Count Sets the satisfaction count conditions Break Condition U2 Address Sets address or PC conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle and access type conditions ASID Sets ASID conditions Break Condition U3 IO Sets internal I O area access break Break Condition U4 LDTLB Sets LDTLB instruction execution break Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Break condition U1 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition U page The Condition list box will now
156. e corresponding start and end addresses are automatically displayed VP_MAP Sets translation of the addresses in Start and End according to the VP_MAP command s setting for the respective addresses When this option is not set or VP_MAP is invalid no translation takes place 228 RENESAS When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 is selected Set the start and end address ranges Figure 5 77 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page 229 RENESAS Table 5 82 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 is Selected Start Address Range Option Start Description Sets the start address in the start address range as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address in the start address range as a numerical or symbolic value Displays the Input Function Range dialog box to which a start address in the start address range is input as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the start address and end address in the start address range are automatically displayed End Address Range Option Start Description Sets the start address in the end address range as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the start address in of the end address range as a numerical or symbolic value Displays the Input Function Range dialog box to which a start address in the end address range is input as a numeri
157. e emulator will measure the execution of the user program in the following order Condition 1 start measurement Condition 2 end measurement Condition 1 start measurement Condition 2 end measurement The emulator will measure the sum of the periods of execution between satisfaction of conditions 1 and 2 in that order The following is an explanation of how to use this function Set the conditions for the start and end of measurement in the Break Condition B1 to B8 or Trace Condition B1 to B8 dialog boxes Select Time Interval Measurement Condition B from Emulation Mode in the Configuration dialog box Run the user program The results of measurement will be displayed next to Run Time Count in the System Status window The maximum period measured depends on the settings made in The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution in the Configuration dialog box The values that can be set are 9999 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us 488 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us and 6 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns If the user specifies a time other than the available values the emulator will display instead of the setting 217 RENESAS When execution time measurement is in operation only the Halt button can be used to break the emulation of the user program While the function of execution time measurement is being used
158. e external probe PRB signal levels match a specification External interrupt The condition is satisfied when external interrupt signal levels match a specification Control The condition is satisfied when control signal levels are active Satisfaction count Trace acquisition stops when the above conditions are satisfied the specified number of times Delay Trace acquisition stops the specified number of bus cycles after the above conditions have been satisfied Trace stop conditions that can be specified for each of the eight channels of Trace Conditions A B and C 24 channels in total are shown in table 5 60 Table 5 60 Specifiable Trace Stop Conditions Trace Stop Trace Condition A Trace Condition B Trace Condition C Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O O xX Read Write O O X External probe O O X External interrupt and O O X control Satisfaction count O X Delay O O X Notes O Can be specified X Cannot be specified The delay condition is only available for Trace Conditions A7 and B7 187 RENESAS b Setting Trace Stop Conditions Trace Condition A7 is taken as an example of setting a trace stop condition Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Acquisition from the menu and the Trace Acquisition dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page Trace Acq
159. e line or instruction immediately after the calling line or instruction This style of step execution is only possible in the RAM area in the user system or in an area allocated to the emulation memory Click the Step Over button Select Step Over from the Run menu Executing a specified number of steps Executes the specified number of steps Note that the specified address must be the start of an instruction If for example the address of the second byte of an instruction is specified execution will not stop and the specified number of steps will still be executed Click the Step dialog button specify the number of steps in Steps in the Step Program dialog box and start execution Selecting Step Over Calls allows a function call to be executed as a single step Select Step from the Run menu The settings are the same as above Stopping function execution Note Steps out of a function Execution stops at the line after the calling line in the program Click the Step Out button Select Step Out from the Run menu Some break conditions become disabled depending on the mode of execution in steps For details on the relationship between the types of steps and break conditions that become invalid see appendix E 9 Step Function RENESAS 135 5 4 2 Interrupts during Step Execution Interrupts cannot normally be accepted during step execution Select Inter
160. e subsequent bus cycle If the conditions are satisfied over consecutive bus cycles the trigger output remains low TH2TT2T M27 TT M27 T2T TAT 127 127 12 T112 THT2T 112 T2 WAIT states OWAIT CKIO J I l WU Exernal clock 66 6 MHz 000000000000 A TRIG 332 Unit ns Hardware break condiition trace condition satisfaction cycle Figure 5 85 Pulse Output Timing Note No pulse is output from the trigger output probe when a software break condition is satisfied In addition the timing of the pulse output and the pulse width differ according to the condition 240 RENESAS 5 11 Memory Spaces and VP_MAP Translation 5 11 1 The Allocation of Emulation Memory In the emulator the user can use 4 Mbytes one of standard emulation memory in memory spaces CSO to CS6 Also by using the optional memory board the user can use a maximum of 16 Mbytes of emulation memory in two 8 Mbyte areas Use the Memory Mapping dialog box to set up this emulation memory Select Memory from Configure Map The Memory Mapping dialog box will be displayed From To Mapping Target Device configuration INTERNAL I O xxxxnnnx KHKHRHHH Map type rid Memory Est __Becet__ Reset aut Help Figure 5 86 Memory Mapping Dialog Box 241 RENESAS Table 5 94 Configuration Items of the Memor
161. eakpoints window Hardware break This type of break is generated by the dedicated hardware in the emulator Conditions can be specified as Break Condition A B and C and when one of these conditions has been satisfied a break occurs Break Condition Xn X A B or C n number is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Hardware sequential break An order of satisfaction can be specified for hardware break conditions Break Condition A or B When all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order a break occurs Break Condition X Sequential X A or B is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Internal break This break function is implemented by the MPU When any of the conditions specified as Break Condition U1 and U2 has been satisfied a break occurs Break Condition Un n number is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Break Condition U3 is for breaks due to internal I O access and Break Condition U4 is for breaks due to the execution of an LDTLB instruction Internal sequential break An order of satisfaction can be specified for internal break conditions This kind of break occurs when all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order Break Condition U1 and U2 can be used in two levels of sequential break conditions Forced break This is the break for the forcible termination of a program that is issued when
162. earch for AUD trace information General AUD Address I Don t Care Address Range Start Ho End Ro Nonusermask C User mask Figure 5 67 Trace Filter Dialog Box AUD Page Table 5 76 AUD Page Options Option Description Don t Care No time stamp condition is set Address Sets the trace search condition to values set as Start or Mask Range Sets the range set by Start to End as a trace search condition Start Specifies the start of the range of address bus values as a numerical value or symbol End Specifies the end of the range of address bus values as a numerical value or symbol when Range is selected Non user mask Specifies no mask condition User mask Specifies a mask condition Mask Specifies the value of the mask when Address and User mask are selected The condition is satisfied by a bit is masked no matter what the bit s value is This option is invalid when Range is selected When there is no information for display as a result of a search a no trace record message will be displayed in the Trace window 214 RENESAS Trace Find Function This function makes the display jump to the trace information item that satisfies the specified conditions in the Trace window The search conditions can be specified in the Trace Find dialog box Search conditions are the same as those for the trace filter functions except on
163. easurement mode 3 Specification end lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt vpmap lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric When the user specifies vpmap the emulator will use VP_MAP to translate the addresses specified in lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt from virtual addresses to physical addresses When the emulator cannot use the VP_MAP it will use the MMU If the user does not specify vpmap the emulator will specify physical addresses lt timeopt gt Specifies the timeout period The user can use parameter lt timeopt gt in channel number 1 and subroutine time measurement modes 1 and 2 When the user sets a condition to PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS1 the emulator stops the execution of the user program after the time set to lt timeopt gt has passed In this case the user must specify pabreak in the GO_OPTION command Specification time lt time gt Parameter lt time gt specifies the time value as the following format mm ss uuuuUu mm minute 0 to 59 ss second 0 to 59 uuuuuu microsecond 0 to 999999 lt countopt gt Specifies the pass count The user can use parameter lt countopt gt in channel number 1 and subroutine time measurement modes 1 and 2 Specification count lt count gt H 1 to H FFFF can be specified for count 305 RENESAS Description Setting This command sets the condition to measure the subroutine performance Up to eight subroutines can be
164. easures the performance of a subroutine that was called from the target subroutine Specification mode time2 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 The emulator starts to measure a subroutine at lt start address range gt and stops measuring at lt end address range gt The emulator will increment the pass count lt countopt gt after it passes through lt start address range gt and lt end address range gt Specification mode time3 The user can use channels 1 3 5 and 7 in subroutine time measurement mode 3 lt nameopt gt 304 Specifies the subroutine name to measure the performance Specification name lt subroutine name gt RENESAS Parameter Description lt startopt gt Specifies the start address of the subroutine to measure the performance Specifies the subroutine start address in subroutine time measurement modes 1 and 2 Specification start lt address gt lt address gt Address value numeric To specify the start address range in subroutine time measurement mode 3 Specification start lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt endopt gt Specifies the end address of the subroutine to measure the performance To specify the end address in subroutine time measurement modes 1 and 2 Specification end lt address gt vpmap lt address gt Address numeric To specify the end address range in subroutine time m
165. eccvnstes steve setuvodbebncevasepennsveveceoeatvpses 202 External Bus Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window 205 AUD Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window 207 Trace Search Bunctions ssie sei esne e apea e messa enep tveveas ee 208 General Page Options s drre een Aue aie dee he este KES as 210 Trace Search Conditions and Pages in the Trace Filter Dialog Box 0 0 211 Time Page Options e ieina a eE pate E rE ace ERE RT SRR E 213 AUD Page Opthos Ses renar e enero a EEn pu EEIE Se 214 Measurement Modes ir n E AE E RE r E R ANE 220 Modes that are Available in the Performance1 to 8 Dialog Boxes eee 223 Pages of the Performance 1 to 8 Dialog BOX eee ee eee cee cee cneeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 226 Options on the General page eee eeneioe etesse iein ienee eae iee ee 227 Options on the Address page When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 is Selected eeeeeeeeeteeeees 228 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 is Selected ceeseeeeeeeteeeeees 230 Options of the Time Out Page cece ceeeeeecneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesecaecaecsaessaeeneeeas 231 Options onthe Count Pages rnn e aie AEE Rte bows nce oene ges 232 Menu Items for Displaying the Results ee eee eeceseceseceseceseceeecseeeneeeeeeeeeenees 233 Display Format of Results When Address is Selected 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeee 234 Display Format of Re
166. eceecnsecneeeneeees 61 Troubleshooting PAD ty 55 26 Socscgessee erasana enese tep Sovesh jesseesvetaseerscsaseasceseseeabesbapastetsseess 66 Diagnostic Program Initiation Confirmation Dialog BOX eee eeceeeeseeeeeeeees 67 RENESAS Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Figure 4 29 Figure 4 30 Figure 4 31 Figure 4 32 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog BOX 0 0 eeeceesecsseceeneeceseceeaeeceaeeeeneecsaeeeeneers 67 Terminating the Diagnostic Program by Clicking the STOP Button 0 68 Start Menu so c550 4 decese rie Rei lve gh eho beech Reais ecoe Hike RG 72 HDD Wind ow ne seeder esate aetiologies 74 Configuration Dialog BOX eee cece a ees deen EEEo eSEE Ip E PEEKE SEa ESEESE 75 Memory Mapping Dialog Box before Setting eeeeesessersesesessrerrsreerrsreresrsrreresrene 77 Add Memory Mapping Dialog BOX uo eee cee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseensecaeeaeenaes 78 Memory Mapping Dialog Box at Setting oe eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecnseeaeesaeenes 79 oad Program Dialog BOX sspe eipes deses e p E Eora EE elec ES ses 80 HPI Dialog Bo
167. eceeneeceeeceeeeeceteeeeneees 231 Performance 1 Dialog Box Count Page cee ceeceesseceseeeeneeceeeeeeeeceeneeeneeens 232 Input Function Range Dialog Box eee ee eecesecee cece caeecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeneenseenaes 233 Performance Analysis Window Measurement of Executed Addresses 234 Performance Analysis Window Run Time and Execution Count eeeeeeee 235 Performance Analysis Window Execution Time RatiOs cecceeeseceeneeeeteeeenees 236 System Status Window cescecsseceencecsseceeccecesceesneecsaeceeeeecsaeceneecsaeeseaeecaeeesnees 237 Pulse Output TIMIS sienn a A R A E E NR 240 Memory Mapping Dialog BOX 0 eee eeeeeesceceseceenceceseeeeacecaeeseneecaeeeeneecsaeeeeneees 241 xi RENESAS Figure 5 87 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog BOX oo eee eeceeeceeecesecesecaeceaecsaecaesaeeeaes 242 Figure 5 88 Address Translation According to VP_MAP Tables cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 244 Figure 5 89 Stack Trace Window cisrenan aine e a e ERE E 249 Figure 5 90 Stack Trace Setting Dialog BOX ssssesseeseseseseeesrsreesssesresesrenrrsreereseerrnrerrenresreeres 250 Fis ie 5 91 AUM Window Serrie cscdendeveecublesscesive e e r a N ene ie E S 251 Figure 5 92 AUM Target Details Dialog BOX ssesseessssesesreesesreesssrrresesreeresreerssrerreserrenresreet 253 Figure 5 93 Auto update Memory Edit Dialog BOX sssessessessssesesseesssreerssererssesrenresreeeseeeesse 254 Fig
168. ection read Searches for a read cycle direction write Searches for a write cycle lt accessopt gt Specifies a bus status condition access dat Data access cycle access dma DMA cycle lt countopt gt Specifies a satisfaction count access lt value gt Specifies a value within the range from H 1 to H FFF lt ioopt gt Specifies whether or not a break occurs when internal I O is accessed Can only be specified when lt channel_number gt is 3 io Breaks when internal I O is accessed When omitted break does not occur lt ldtlbopt gt Description Specifies whether or not a break occurs when the LDTLB instruction is executed Can only be specified when lt channel_numbers gt is 4 Idtlb Breaks when the LDTLB instruction is executed When omitted break does not occur 275 RENESAS Setting Sets an internal break condition When the specified condition is satisfied the user program execution breaks For conditions that can be set see the description of BCUS command lt option gt A sequential break can be specified by using an internal break when sb is specified with the GO_OPTION command internal sequential breaks of Break Condition U1 and U2 can be used Cancellation Cancels the current internal breakpoints When the channel number is omitted clears all internal breakpoints Display Displays set internal breakpoints When the channel number is omitted the emulator displays
169. ed Select Edit from the menu to display the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box and select Format from the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box to change the display format Select Format from the pop up menu of the AUM window to change the display format Display color When Realtime parallel monitor is specified a color is applied to indicate the contents that have been modified since the last update of the display Select Type from the Color group box in the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box When Change is selected as Type modified data will be displayed in color It is also possible to specify the foreground and background colors of the window If Gray is selected the modified data will be displayed in the color with the unchanged data displayed in gray When Mayfly is selected the color is changed every time the contents of the window are updated 253 RENESAS To set the display format and display color use the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box After setting the required items click the OK button Auto update Memory Edit Ea History Address H 00000000 Size 32 byte Format Byte Color Type Change Foreground Mayfly Background Realtime Bus idth 32Bit VP_MAP OFF Details Cancel Heie Figure 5 93 Auto update Memory Edit Dialog Box Note 1 In the situations listed below the user program will not be executed in realtime When Non Realti
170. ed to the right To change the console interface settings turn switches S1 to S6 off and switches S7 and S8 on in the console interface switch SW1 ON state S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S is a ON state b OFF state LMS Side view of SW1 ON OFF states Figure 3 10 Host Interface Switches CAUTION Do not change the settings of host interface switch SW1 37 RENESAS 3 4 Setting Up with Windows Operating Systems The following describes the setup procedure for Windows operating systems Since hardware is set up during installation the installation procedure may differ according to the operating system and interface used ISA PCI PCMCIA or LAN Proceed with installation according to the procedures for the environment in use To connect the host computer to the emulator either a PCI interface board HS6000EICO1H and HS6000EICO2H PC interface card HS6000EIPO1H PC interface board HS6000EII01H or a LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H can be selected For details on the connection of the PC interface board ISA bus specifications refer to section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications or the user s manual For details on other connections refer to the related user s manual To install the provided software insert the CD R in the CD ROM drive The install wizard will be executed If there are any applications running exit from them before installing the soft
171. ed correctly Turn on the emulator after confirming that S7 and S8 of the DIP switches SW1 on the emulator are turned on Select SH7729R E8000S Emulator Software Hitachi Debugging Interface from the Start menu E Accessories gt StartUp gt B amp MS DOS Prompt indows Explorer Figure 3 20 Start Menu Initiating the HDI The Select Session dialog box will be displayed Select the target emulator name in the combo box then click the OK button 57 RENESAS Select Session x SH7xxx E80005 Emulator x p Exit Previous session file Figure 3 21 Select Session Dialog Box When the HDI is started up for the first time a Driver Details dialog box will be displayed Use Driver to select the correct driver for the connected interface PC interface board PCI interface board PC interface card or LAN adapter and click the Close button Refer to table 3 5 Types of Connections and Drivers The example below is when the emulator is to be connected to the PC interface via the ISA bus Driver Details Driver Emulator ISA Driver X Detalls _________ ___________ Interface ISA gt Channel d000 d3 f Configuration Contigure wow eee Figure 3 22 Driver Details Dialog Box When ISA Bus Is Selected 58 RENESAS During the HDI initiation the following messages are shown on the status bar of the HDI window
172. ed that customers contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by various means including the Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page http www renesas com When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems f
173. ee eeeeee 124 Figure 5 10 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box I O Port Page SH7729R SH7709S 126 Figure 5 11 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box H UDI JTAG Clock Page ee 128 Figure 5 12 Timing for Trigger Signal Output eee cece cee csse cree ceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeesenseenseenaes 131 Figure 5 13 Breakpoints Window snn a A E E 136 Figure 5 14 Example of a Software Break Instruction sessessessesesesseesrseeesesrsressesresresreeresreeeese 138 Figure 5 15 Point Page Break Dialog BOX eeeceescecsseceeeeeceseceeeeeceaceesneecaeeeeneecsaeeesnees 139 Figure 5 16 Break Point Dialog Box Address Page es ceeeecssceeneeceeeceeececeeeeeneecsaeeeenees 140 Figure 5 17 Example of a Software Sequential Break 0 0 0 eee cee ceeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseenaes 142 Figure 5 18 Example of a Software Sequential Break Reset Point Specification 00 0000 00 143 Figure 5 19 Break Dialog Box Sequence Page ceeeesseceeeeeeseeceereeeseeceeneeeneeceeeeeeaeeeeees 144 Figure 5 20 Break Sequence Dialog BOX 000 eee ecceeceeecesecesecenecseecaeecaeeeaeseeeseeeeeseneesees 145 Figure 5 21 Example of a Hardware Break with a Satisfaction Count Condition Specified 148 Figure 5 22 Example of a Hardware Break with Delay Condition Specified ee 149 Figure 5 23 Break Dialog Box Condition A Page eceescescessseceeeeecsseceeeeecsaeceeneeenaeeeeee 150 Figure 5 24 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Address Page
174. eeeeeeeceseeeeecesecesecsaecsaecsaecnaesaee 9 Contents oF CD R isucatisek ile a Se ee gu eae he N EEN 18 PC Interface Board Specifications 0 cece cee cseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeseesecesecesecaecsaecsaeeaes 42 Switch Settings for Memory Areas e ee eecesecesecese cee caeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeseenseenaes 44 Contents of Emulator System Programs for the SH7729R and SH77098S 50 Contents of Emulator System Programs for the SH7706 1 0 0 0 e eee eeeeeceeeeeseeeseeeeee 51 Types of Connection and Driver ceeecesceseceseceseceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseenseenaes 52 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog BOX sssseessesssseeesseesesreeresrerrssrrreeesreeresrenrsseees 68 Configuration of the Sample Program ssssssseessereesesrssessrsresrsseerrssesrrnresrenreseeereseeees 71 CPU Operation Mode Dialog Box Setting Example sssesseeeesserseresrsreerrsreerssreees 73 Settings in the Configuration Dialog BOX eee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseenaes 76 Step Command s St ais es es eo he ere eis 92 Em lator Bun Ct Ons nnn sen cchende a teenth Ghlewt cua esheets cs Seu seae tees Gitest ernest 103 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions 2 0 0 eee eceecceeeceeecesecesecesecsnessaeenes 104 Configuration Dialog Box o 5 ccssccsseicssesscetssestes sscsasestsescoresvencnsstssessvscsvessssdbsasvedavens 106 General Pages ois ics cocecev a aena a E E OE E EER AEE a AA 108 Execution Model Paje nnee ra era E E A E tocncee
175. elect PCI Card Driver as the component e Restart the host computer 39 RENESAS When Using the PC Interface Card Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch Install the PC interface card into the host computer Turn on the host computer Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select PC Card Driver PCMCIA as the component Check the values specified for use by the PC interface card before the information is requested during installation Select and start Administrative Tools Common Windows NT Diagnostics from Start Programs to check the current status of IRQ I O ports and memory in the resource panels and set values that will not cause contention with other devices Required resources are as follows one channel for IRQ H F bytes for I O ports H 4000 bytes for use as memory Restart the host computer Note Default settings start all the drivers selected as Drivers components after the activation of the host computer When the host computer is activated without a given card or an inappropriate driver is installed it is not possible to start the given driver The service control manager informs the user of the error but it causes no other problem When Using the PC Interface Board Refer to section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications and set the operating system environment and install the ISA bus interface board
176. emulator enters the trace halt state because trace conditions have been satisfied ERASE ER Clears the contents of the Command Line window EVALUATE EV Calculates expression EXECUTION_MODE 6 2 10 EM Sets and displays debugging conditions during user program execution FILE_LOAD FL Loads object program file FILE_SAVE FS Saves the contents of memory as a file FILE_VERIFY FV Compares the contents of a file with memory GO GO Executes user program GO_OPTION 6 2 11 GP Sets and displays the emulation mode during user program execution GO_RESET GR Executes user program from reset vector GO_TILL GT Executes user program up to temporary breakpoint HALT HA Halts user program HELP HE Displays help for command line and commands ID 6 2 12 ID Displays emulator type and version number INITIALISE IN Initializes a platform LOG LO Manipulates logging file 264 RENESAS Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description MAP_DISPLAY MA Displays memory map information MAP_SET 6 2 13 MS Sets emulator memory map MEMORY_DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents MEMORY_EDIT ME Modifies memory contents MEMORY FILL MF Fills the memory with the specified data MEMORY_MOVE MV Moves memory block MEMORY_TEST MT Tests memory block MEMORYAREA_SET 6 2 14 MAS Sets and displays memory
177. ended Dimensions for the User System Connector HS7706EBH81H 352 Appendix C Connecting the Emulator to the User System eee eee ence 355 C 1 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board to the User System eee cece cesecese cess eeeene 355 C 2 Connecting the Cables for Tracing cece ee cesecssecseecreeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeenseessecaecnaecaaeeneeeas 359 C 3 Installing the MPU on the User System ooo eee ceeeeeeeeeeeecesecesecaecnaeceaecseecaeseaeeeaeees 362 Appendix D SH7729R Internal Module Support eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeees 365 Dil Memory Space 25s cassis toh oone o ea ret bets SIN eas EE E db os ete oA a 365 D11 Internal OAE aa a ra r EE E E as 365 D 1 2 External Memory Atea eisereen iene a iiS 365 D 2 Low Power consumption Mode Sleep Software Standby and Hardware Standby 366 D 2 1 Sleep and Software Standby Modes eee eescesecesecseecneeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseenseenseenaes 366 D3 Interr pts henee eee hee ee ces si tel et a eases 366 D 4 Control Input Signals RESETP RESETM BREQ and WAIT 366 Dd Bus State Controller six s s tecien ls ke Ge eet eae Se eles Res 367 D 6 Emulator Status and Internal Modules 0 0 eee ee eeceeeceseceecnseceecececneeeaeseneeeeeeeeeeerenseens 367 Appendix E Notes on Debugging sai aa oe oe Gea oec sede ete 369 Bil The Tracing Punctonns sic s0 55cssess sees eds oiera soesdssees seuseesevtsaes ss iadsvesveesscessdeusbescesesebsstotasascneud 369 E 2 Emulation Memory wi ccccescesses a och
178. ents against the component list Component list See section 3 2 Install Acrobat Reader Install Acrobat Reader only when it is necessary Connect the emulator See sections 3 3 1 to 3 3 6 See section 3 4 1 for Windows 98 and Windows Me Set up the emulator See section 3 4 2 for Windows NT 4 0 See section 3 4 3 for Windows 2000 Turn on the emulator Install the system program See section 3 5 Start the HDI and check the operation of the emulator See section 3 6 Figure 3 1 Emulator Preparation Flowchart RENESAS 3 2 Installing the Acrobat Reader Acrobat Reader 5 0 is required to view the online help Acrobat Reader is provided on the CD R of this product The installation of Acrobat Reader is described below If you have already installed Acrobat Reader do not carry out this procedure 1 Insert the CD R of this product in the CD ROM drive 2 Click Run from the Start menu 3 Specify Ar500enu exe in Pdf_Read English directory in the Run dialog box then click the OK button 4 Install according to the instructions displayed in the screen 3 3 Emulator Connection The following description is given on emulator connection 3 3 1 Connecting the Device Control Board At shipment the device control board is packed separately from the emulator station Connect the device control board to the emulator
179. enu System Install Tool When the ESI has started up the Select Driver dialog box will be displayed Select the driver for the connection of the host computer and the emulator from Driver Table 3 5 shows the types of connections and drivers Table 3 5 Types of Connection and Drivers Connection Contents of File When connecting the emulator to a PC interface Emulator ISA Driver board When connecting the emulator to a LAN adapter E8000 LAN Driver When connecting the emulator to a PCI Emulator PCI Card Driver interface board When connecting the emulator to a PC interface Emulator PC Card Driver card When Link up is displayed on the status bar the initiation of the ESI has been completed Select the Auto Install radio button in the Select Install dialog box The Browse for Folder dialog box will be displayed so select the directory where the system program is stored The default directory will be a directory under SYSTEM in the HDI installation directory Select the folder with the name that corresponds to the target MPU 52 RENESAS Browse for Folder My Computer Bee 3 Floppy 4 Ey Win98us C Hew dG did E8000s EG Pxxx H E Fmtool System H Tutorial E Mua Decuments lt lt lt 7 Figure 3 16 Browse for Folder Dialog Box When OK is clicked the E8000 Load Files dialog box will be displayed Check the file names for installation 53 RENESAS
180. er lt address gt all of the specified software breakpoints are enabled or disabled Examples 1 To set a software breakpoint at physical address H c000000 BP H c000000 SPACE PHYSICAL 2 To set a software breakpoint at address H c000000 in the virtual address space BP H c000000 SPACE VIRTUAL 3 To set a software breakpoint at address H c000000 in the virtual address space when the ASID value is H 0 BP H c000000 SPACE VIRTUAL ASID H O 4 To disable a software breakpoint at address H c000000 in the virtual address space when the ASID value is H 0 BE H c000000 SPACE VIRTUAL ASID H O DISABLE 281 RENESAS To disable all software breakpoints at address H c000000 in the virtual address space BE H c000000 SPACE VIRTUAL DISABLE 6 To enable all software breakpoints that has been set at physical address H c000000 BE H c000000 ENABLE 7 To enable all software breakpoints that has been set BE ENABLE 8 To clear a software breakpoint set at address H c000000 in the virtual address space when the ASID value is H 0 BC H c000000 SPACE VIRTUAL ASID H O 9 To clear software breakpoints set at address H cO00000 in the virtual address space BC H c000000 SPACE VIRTUAL 10 To clear software breakpoints set at address H c000000 BC H c000000 11 To clear all software breakpoints set BC Notes e The user cannot execute this command if the user executes commands that refer to memory and the emulator satisfies the pass coun
181. ereereeeererereeres 182 5 5 9 Break Due to Trace Buffer Overflow sssesssseesseeeesssrssresesreeresresrsserrreresrenresreeres 182 935 10 Timeout Break aenea r R hn E aie E Bae eS See 183 Trace FUNCIONS aoier e N A E os eu E E A S gh E E S 184 5 6 1 External Bus Trace Function sesesesseessereeseeesrreseseeeresrerrsserrrssesresresrenreseeeresenees 184 9 6 2 JExtermal Bus Trace Timing iriserende edpevech covers unas estou Sengpadvevnenevees 198 5 6 3 AUD Trace Functions sick hake eee AIS A eee BEES 201 56 4 Trace Displann eee h ened cbt RU cease iog Shas geai eaten A E A on Sameera 203 5 06 5 Trace Search Functions ee ceecesecesecssecsseceecaeeeseeeeesseeeeeeseesseesecsaecsaeenaeenes 208 Measurement of Execution Time 0 cee ee ceseesecssecseecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseesecaeesaesnaesaes 216 5 7 1 Measuring Execution Time to a Break or Termination 0 ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeee 216 5 7 2 Measuring Execution Time between Satisfaction of Specified Conditions 217 Performance Analysis FUnCtion ec eeeecesecssecesecssecseecseeeneeeeeesaeeeseseeenseessecsaecsaesnaesaes 219 5 8 1 Measuring with Emulator Station Function eee cece cseecseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 Displaying Various Information ee eee ceseceecseeceecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessecsaecsaeenaeaee 237 PLS Ser OUP Ub Hs iis vases ane sese e ies e a iui seve teoe ep taertea A A E A etn ten teehee ts 240 Memory Spaces and VP_MAP Translation 00 0 0
182. es the size of the memory is recommended Supported interfaces ISA bus slot not supported by Windows Me and Windows 2000 PCI bus slot PC card PCMCIA and LAN adapter conforming to IEEE802 3 with 10OBASE T or 100BASE TX Pointing device such as a mouse A pointing device such as a mouse which can be connected to the host computer and is supported by the corresponding operating system CD ROM drive Required for installation RENESAS 1 3 Components The emulator consists of the emulator station device control board and evaluation chip board Check all components after unpacking If any component is missing contact the sales office from which the emulator was purchased 1 3 1 Emulator Station Table 1 3 lists the emulator station components Table 1 3 Emulator Station Components HS8000EST11H Classification Item Quantity Remarks Hardware Emulator station 1 Trace cable 1 CN1 CN2 CN3 with 4 cores AC power cable 1 Fuse 1 3 A spare Manual Description Notes on 1 HS8000EST11HE using the SH7729R E8000S station RENESAS 1 3 2 Device Control Board and Evaluation Chip Board for the SH7729R Tables 1 4 1 5 and 1 6 list the device control board and evaluation chip board components Table 1 4 Device Control Board Components Classification Item Hardware Device control board Quantity 1 Remarks One board to be installed in the emulator Evaluation chip board power cable already c
183. esecsecseeceeeeeseeeseeeeseeesecesecsecaecsaecaeesaeseneeeas 44 Installing the PC Interface Board 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceseceaeceaecsaecaeeeaeeeaeeeeeees 45 Connecting the Emulator Station to the PC Interface Board 0 eee 46 Start Menu System Install Tool 0 cee eee ceeeecsseceeececeseceeeeeceseeeeaeecaeeeeneecseeeeneees 52 Browse for Folder Dialog BOX ee ceeceesseceseecsseceeeeecaeceeeeecaeceeneecsaeceeneeeaeeeees 53 E8000 Load Files Dialog BoX cee initieras i kaiii siesena ia 54 System Install Completed Dialog Box eee eee ceecseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenseensees 55 E8000 Load Files Dialog BOX eee eescecsseeesceceeeeesececeseeesacecaeeeeaeecaeeseneeceasennees 56 Start Menu Initiating the HDI 00 cee eee eeceeenseceeeeeceeceeeeecaeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeecnaeeenees 57 Select Session Dialog Boxe siese ea aa E oa ESEA E E ARREST S 58 Driver Details Dialog Box When ISA Bus Is Selected 00 0 eee eeecceeneeeeteeeeeeers 58 Status Bar during the HDI Initiation cece eeeceeeceeeceseeesecsaeenaesaeeneeees 59 Status Bar at the HDI Initiation Completion eee cee cseecneecreeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 59 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 1 ee eeeeceeseceseceseceeeeeeeee 59 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 2 ee ceeescesecesecneceeeeeeeee 60 Error Message on PC Interface Board Connection Failure eee eee eee eeeeeee 60 Error Message on Emulator Connection Failure ee eeeeceseces
184. este ancsstesahasteasteccnewonts 23 3 1 Description on Emulator Usage s sess eeose eeys esaeo iea pe s iieis Toi eHe I EnEn iieis 23 3 2 Installing the Acrobat Reader is 40 chsandnan alone onmabcenwaneleoemeun 24 33 lt Emulator Connection sensis e sSeecensevan A N AS EES 24 3 3 1 Connecting the Device Control Board sssessseeessereessersererrsrrerssrerrsserrrssesrreresreee 24 3 3 2 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board essesesseeesesseessseessssrerrsresreeresreeresreerssee 27 3 3 3 Connecting the External Probe sesesssseesserseesesererrsreeresrerrsserrreesrenresreerssreerseene 32 3 34 Selecting th CLOCK sos veaysceseessccesveescnel Rus seastahoee A A A A 33 3 3 5 Connecting the System Ground 2 0 0 eee eeeesecesecesecnseceeecaeecseeeaeeeeeeeeeesseneennees 35 3 3 0 System Connetti OMes sz coeccsises sose coysdesk cosa chancevevguncevaeseneubecanh sobesies E ES o a eiS 37 3 4 Setting Up with Windows Operating Systems c ccccscssssssesseessessesssessesssecsesssessecsseesesaes 38 3 4 1 Setting Up the PCI Interface Board on Windows 98 or Windows Me 38 3 4 2 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows NT 4 0 w ccsccsscsssesssessesstesseeseees 39 3 4 3 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows 2000 ccsscsssessesstesseestesesseen 41 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications eee 42 3 37 Installing the System Prosta sorene n ee E E E R RS 50 3 6 Initiating the
185. et in the System Status window e Select Status from the View menu The System Status window is displayed e Select Platform sheet from the System Status window System Stetus Ol AE xi Item Status Run status Break Cause of last break BREAKPOINT Run Time Count D OOOOH 0OM 005 008476US 000NS Condition A Sequential Not used Condition B Sequential Not used Figure 4 13 System Status Window The Cause of last break line shows that the cause of the break is the breakpoint For details on program execution refer to section 5 3 Realtime Emulation 85 RENESAS 4 8 Reviewing Breakpoints The user can see all the breakpoints set in the program in the Breakpoints window e Select Breakpoints from the View menu The Breakpoints window is displayed The contents of the breakpoint set will be displayed A will be displayed in the Enable column Breekpaints Of AE x 00003036 Break Point a Figure 4 14 Breakpoints Window The Breakpoints window also allows the user to change breakpoints set new breakpoints and delete breakpoints e Close the Breakpoints window 86 RENESAS 4 9 Viewing Memory The user can view the contents of a memory block in the Memory window For example to view the memory contents corresponding to the external variable array a e Select Memory from the View menu The Open Memory Window dialog box is displayed e Input a in the Address edit
186. ettings in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box will restart the HDI Table 5 11 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Page Description Device Selects the target MPU MD Pin Sets endian CSO bus width and clock mode Memory Type Indicates the type of memory in CSO to CS6 and the type of SDRAM in CS3 I O Port Selects whether to use the pins that can serve as I O port pins for input output H UDI JTAG clock Sets the input clock to the H UDI JTAG interface Note Settings made in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box are saved in a flash memory in the emulator and not in the session file The initial values on each page are the values initially installed with the system If the settings have changed the initial values at initiation are the changed values 119 RENESAS Device Page Use this page to select the target MPU CPU Operating Mode Device Device SH 7729R Cancel Help Figure 5 7 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Device Page Table 5 12 Device Page Item Description Device Selects the target MPU e When the SH7729R or SH7709S system programs are installed Selects either of the SH7729R initial value or SH7709S e When the SH7706 system programs are installed Displays the SH7706 Next gt Goes to the next page MD Pin Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings 120 RENESAS MD Pin Page Use this page to set endian CSO bus width and clock mode Make
187. execution Emulation with step execution 5 5 Break Provides the method to use break functions 5 6 Trace Acquires searches for and displays tracing information 5 7 Execution time Measures the total execution time of the user program measurement 5 8 Performance analysis Displays measurements of the user program s efficiency of execution during execution 5 9 Informational display Displays the various items set in each dialog box 5 10 Trigger output Outputs a low level pulse on the trigger output probe 5 11 Memory allocation and Allocation of emulation memory and address translation VP_MAP translation using the VP_MAP tables 5 12 Stack trace Displays the history of called functions 5 13 Auto update memory Displays memory in one of three ways by the auto update memory display function the contents of a range of locations is displayed and the display is updated every 500 ms during execution of the user program 5 14 MPU control and status Checks the clock inputs to the emulator and the user system check 5 15 Entering masks Specified formats for the masks of addresses and data used by the emulator functions 5 16 Source window Methods of setting display and cancellation in Source window for BP array 103 RENESAS 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions The user must set the operating conditions before using the emulator Table 5 2 lists the settings Table 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions Setting Item Emulat
188. fied When the trace stop condition is satisfied acquisition of trace information halts and the system enters the trace halt state To resume acquisition exit from the trace halt state by using the END command When a hardware sequential condition has been specified the sequential point and a reset point must be set Cancellation Cancels the trace conditions Trace Condition A B C sequential point or a reset point Trace Condition A B setting When the channel number is omitted all trace conditions are cancelled A channel number cannot be set when a hardware sequential condition is in place Display Displays the set trace conditions Trace Condition A B C When the channel number is omitted all trace conditions that have been set are displayed Display format is as follows Trace Condition Xn lt settings gt X A B C n Channel number from 1 to 8 The following will be displayed when a hardware sequential condition has been specified Trace Condition X Sequential lt Enable Disable gt n lt Settings gt X A B 316 RENESAS n Sequential number starts from 1 and condition is satisfied at the maximum of 7 or R for a reset point Examples 1 To set address bus values from H 10027C to H 100304 as the address condition and the write cycle as the read write cycle condition of Trace Condition A on channel 2 range trace TAS A CHANNEL 2 TYPE RANGE ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE To set a value of
189. formation TRACE_MODE 6 2 20 TM Sets or acquires and displays the trace mode TRACE_SEARCH 6 2 21 TS Searches for trace information TRACEACQUISITION_CLEAR 6 2 18 TAC Clears trace conditions that have been set TRACEACQUISITION_DISPLAY 6 2 18 TAD Displays trace conditions that have been set TRACEACQUISITION_SET 6 2 18 TAS Sets conditions for acquiring trace information VPMAP_CLEAR 6 2 22 VC Clears address translation tables VP_MAP for the emulator VPMAP_DISPLAY 6 2 22 VD Displays address translation tables VP_MAP for the emulator VPMAP_ENABLE 6 2 22 VE Enables or disables address translation tables VP_MAP for the emulator VPMAP_SET 6 2 22 VS Sets address translation tables VP_MAP for the emulator 266 RENESAS 6 2 1 Hardware Break Command BCS BCC BCD BCE e Setting BREAKCONDITION_SET BCS e Cancellation BREAKCONDITION_CLEAR BCC e Display BREAKCONDITION_DISPLAY BCD e Enable or Disable BREAKCONDITION_ENABLE BCE Command syntax and parameters e Setting bes lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt prbopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt irlopt gt lt resetpopt gt lt breqopt gt lt countopt gt lt delayopt gt e Cancellation bee lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Display bed lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Enable or Disable bce lt type gt channel l
190. g waveforms from the initial state for example during a power on reset up to a specified time The reset intervals can be selected from among 6 5 us 9 8 us 50 us 100 us 500 us 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 500 ms or 1 s Cycle Reset X X times to repeat 6 5us 9 8us 50us 100us 500us ims 5ms 10ms 50ms 100ms 500ms or 1s Internal sequential break mode An internal sequential break can be specified by using Break Condition U1 or U2 For details refer to section 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break Break Condition U Sequential 2 gt 1 Timeout break mode A break occurs when the Performance Analysis 1 specification is satisfied i e when the specified timeout period or number of passes has been exceeded For details refer to section 5 5 10 Timeout Break Timeout break of Performance analysis Timeout trace stop mode Acquisition of trace information is terminated when the Performance Analysis 1 specification is satisfied i e when the specified timeout period or number of passes has been exceeded For details refer to section 5 6 1 Timeout Trace Stop Timeout trace of Performance analysis Elapsed time of condition satisfaction mode The execution time over which the condition specified as Condition B is satisfied For details refer to section 5 7 2 Measuring Execution Time between Satisfaction of Specified Conditions Time interval measurement Condition B
191. gram but does not output any pulse Initial value Description This command displays and sets debugging conditions while the emulator executes user program Examples 1 To display current debugging conditions set during user program execution EM The following shows the display format gt EM Execution Mode Condition A Sequential Not used Condition B Sequential Not used Interval Timer counter 52us Bus timeout 100us Multi break PRB1 Disabled RESETP signal Enabled BREQ signal Enabled WAIT signal Enabled NMI signal Enabled Output trigger TRGB Disabled 2 To enable the input of the bus mastership request signal for the debugging conditions set during user program execution 295 RENESAS EM BREQ ENABLE 3 To set the trigger output when the hardware break conditions are satisfied for any of the channels set by Break Condition B or Trace Condition B and to set the execution time measurement unit to 20 ns for the debugging conditions set during user program execution EM TIME 20NS TRGB ALL 296 RENESAS 6 2 11 GO_OPTION GP Command syntax and parameters e Setting gp eml_mode lt eml_mode gt e Display gp Parameter Type Description lt eml_mode gt Keyword Sets the emulation mode Refer to the next table for settings Pin Mode Description normal Executes the user program normally 6 5us Executes the user program by inputting the RESETP signal to the M
192. gure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 7 347 RENESAS 348 RENESAS Appendix B Preparations for Assembling the User System Board B 1 Recommended Dimensions for the User System Connector HS7729REBH81H A WARNING The screw holes for fastening this evaluation chip board are connected to the GND of the user system board When designing the user system board check that the spacers nuts and washers do not touch any part of the pattern other than GND or any parts on the user system Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and damage to the user system or emulator Also the USER PROGRAM will be LOST Bottom view of HS7729REBH81H Figure B 1 shows the recommended dimensions for the mount pad footprint of the QFP208 FP 208C pin IC socket NQPACK208SD manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation and the positions of the holes for fastening the evaluation chip board 349 RENESAS The holes for fastening the evaluation chip board are connected to GND of the user system board When the GND pattern runs to the screw hole positions the ground line is reinforced and stable operation can be expected during high speed emulation 0 5 x 51 25 5 7 75 T 1 N B External frame of the evaluation chip board A IC socket center lines J Patterning prohibited area Unit mm Tolerance 0 1 mm unless otherwise specified Figure B 1 Recommended Dimen
193. he VP_MAP table lt address gt Numeric Specifies the start address of a virtual address range to be cancelled in the VP_MAP table When omitted all VP_MAP tables are cancelled lt enable gt Keyword Enables or disables the VP_MAP table enable Enabled disable Disabled Description e Setting Sets up to 256 address translation tables VP_MAP tables for translating virtual addresses to physical addresses when the user program is loaded When the load module address of a load or a verify command matches the virtual address of the address translation table the address is translated to the corresponding physical address and loaded When there is no corresponding address translation table or the VP_MAP table is disabled the contents of the virtual address range is loaded at the equivalent physical address The following figure shows the relationship between virtual and physical addresses 327 RENESAS Virtual start address 1 Virtual area A Setting enabled Virtual end address 1 i ene Physical start address 1 Physical area A Physical end address 1 i i Setting enabled Physical area B y Virtual start address 2 Virtual end address 2 Virtual area B Virtual area C Physical area C Setting disabled Virtual address Physical address Load module address Load module address Figure 6 1 Address Translation e Cancellation Cancels the emulator address translation VP_MAP tables that have been set e Display Displa
194. he WAIT signal input RDY signal Permitted select the check box Permits or inhibits the NMI signal input NMI signal Permitted select the check box Execution Mode2 76 Specifies the sequential condition Sequence Condition A and Condition B Not used Trigger output control 1 at break TRGB Option RENESAS No trigger output select the upper radio button 4 4 Setting the Memory Map In the next step allocate the emulation memory e Select Configure Map from the Memory menu to display the current memory map The Memory Mapping dialog box is displayed From To Mapping Target Device configuration System memory resources INTERNAL I O xxxemxnx RRRKKEEX REMAINING EMULATION MEMORY S 4MB Map type Ai Memory Reset All Help Figure 4 4 Memory Mapping Dialog Box before Setting The emulator can allocate emulation memory to CS areas in 4 Mbyte units When the SIMM memory module is installed emulation memory can be allocated in two areas in an 8 Mbyte unit The following two types of memory can be specified When the Add button is clicked the Add Memory Mapping dialog box is displayed In the sample program allocate emulation memory with 32 bit bus width to memory range H 00000000 to H 003FFFFF 4 Mbytes in CSO area 77 RENESAS Add Memory Mapping Figure 4 5 Add Memory Mapping Dialog Box e Set the From and To edit boxes to H
195. he pins listed in table E 1 are occupied solely by the emulator and are not connected to the user system Table E 1 Pins Occupied Solely by the Emulator SH7729R SH7709S SH7706 Pin No Signal Name Pin No Signal Name 4 XTAL2 2 XTAL2 5 EXTAL2 3 EXTAL2 128 ASEBRKAK 121 ASEBRKAK 120 TDO 120 TDO 137 TMS 118 TMS 139 TCK 116 TCK 138 TDI 114 TDI 136 TRST 119 TRST 150 VCC PLL2 128 VCC PLL2 148 VSS PLL2 126 VSS PLL2 145 VCC PLL1 123 VCC PLL1 147 VSS PLL1 125 VSS PLL1 2 The delay times on the timing of the RESETP RESETM NMI WAIT and BREQ signals when they are input to the MPU from the user system as shown in table E 2 are because this connection for these signals is via logic on the evaluation chip board 370 RENESAS Table E 2 Delay Time for Signals Connected via the Evaluation Chip Board No Signal Name Delay Time ns 1 RESETP oD o 2 RESETM 21 3 NMI 24 4 WAIT 6 0 5 BREQ 7 0 E 4 Performance Measurement Function Conditions for the use of the performance measurement function must be specified for the external bus If the internal bus is specified measurement of time is not possible E 5 Hardware Break Function A UBC break must be used to set a hardware break for a user program in the SDRAM memory area E 6 Hardware Sequential Break Trace Function 1 Six or more external bus cycles are required between the satisfaction of each condition that is specified 2 W
196. hen a user program is executed with the address of an address condition specified as being from the PC stopping a program for a sequential break trace may not operate normally Set the instruction after the instruction specified as the address condition in the PC before returning to execution of the user program E 7 Clock Operating Mode To use a crystal oscillator install the oscillator on the socket on the evaluation chip board 371 RENESAS E 8 Differences between the Emulator and the SH7729R 1 Note that the emulator initializes some general or control registers whenever the system is activated or the SH7729R is reset by commands 372 RENESAS Table E 3 Initial Values of Registers in the SH7729R and the Emulator Emulator SH7729R Register Name Power On Reset CPU Reset RO_BANKO R7_BANKO H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined RO_BANK1 R7_BANK1 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined R8 to R14 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined R15 SP H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined PC H A00000000 H A00000000 H A00000000 SR H 700000F0 H 700000F0 H 7XXXXXFX GBR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined VBR H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 MACH H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined MACL H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined PR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined SSR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined SPC H 00000000 Value before reset Undefine
197. his is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTE emphasizes essential information lt RENESAS A WARNING Observe the precautions listed below Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Carefully handle the emulator product to prevent receiving an electric shock because the emulator product has a DC power supply Do not repair or remodel the emulator product by yourself for electric shock prevention and quality assurance Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS Always before connecting make sure that pin 1 on both sides are correctly aligned Supply power according to
198. ialog box For example click to select a channel number from the Condition list box on the Condition A page of the Break dialog box Click the Set Condition button to open the Condition dialog box The Condition dialog box has the pages shown in table 5 40 Table 5 40 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Page Description History Displays the history of conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Conditions can be moved from the History page to the Entry List page Entry List Creates modifies duplicates and deletes new conditions for Break Condition A or B a History Page Use this page to display the history of hardware break condition settings for Break Condition A or B Condition History Entry List Condition address H 4000 address H 3000 address H 2000 addres 4 H ba 000 Figure 5 31 Condition Dialog Box History Page 161 RENESAS Table 5 41 History Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions are displayed in a list as a history of the conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Entry Makes the condition selected in the Condition list available for use again as a channel of Break Condition A or B Clicking the Entry button moves any condition selected in the Condition list box to the Entry List page and deletes it from the Condition list on the History page Note New Edit Delete and Duplicat
199. ied address spaces 259 RENESAS 260 RENESAS Section 6 Command Line 6 1 List Format This section explains the format for the command list in section 6 2 Some commands are explained on a single page Some commands are explained over several pages 6 1 1 Description Entries are in the following format Command name abbreviation Command syntax and parameters Shows input format for each command Description Describes the usage and function of each command Examples Example of usage Notes Notes on using the command Some entries have no notes 6 1 2 Format Symbols used in the command format have the following meanings lt gt Contents of lt gt are parameters Parameters enclosed by can be omitted lt gt The parameter shown on the left hand side lt gt can be expressed in the format on the right hand side lt gt l One or both can be selected non exclusively Hither of two or one can be selected exclusively The parameters of each command are explained in the tables in section 6 2 261 RENESAS 6 1 3 Parameter Type Input 1 Numerical parameters Numerical parameters must be supplied as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers symbols or expressions A symbol can consist of up to 32 characters Operators e g and can be used to delimit expressions 2 Keyword parameters The bold faced characters in the tables for each command are the strings that a
200. in Start and End on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box The pointer is a value relative to the location at which the delay condition has been satisfied Numbers of bus cycles before the delay condition has been satisfied are indicated by a minus sign while numbers of cycles after the condition s satisfaction are displayed with a plus sign Trace 514 records no filter DB IRL NMI RESP RESM BREQ VCC PRB Time Stamp Clock a 92 000421 00003054 000952fd 111111 1 1 1 1 1111 OO00HOOM0050231380_y 93 000420 O03fffa0 00000000 111111 1 1 1 l 1111 OO0HO0M0050231380 94 000419 00003058 1f2353f4 111111 1 1 1 l 1111 000H00M005023139U 95 _change 000418 0000312a 00097fd0 111111 1 1 1 l 1111 oooHoomoosoz3139u7 AA 1 1 1 1 Figure 5 62 Trace Window The items shown in table 5 70 are displayed as trace information in the Trace window 204 RENESAS Table 5 70 External Bus Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window Item Description and Format No Line number in the Trace window Label Label name BP Bus cycle pointer The location of a bus cycle relative to the bus cycle where the delay condition has been satisfied Pointers are usually negative values XXXXXxX but when a delay condition has been specified as a break or trace condition the bus cycles during the delay period are positive XXXXXX AB 32 bit address bus values DB 32 bit
201. ing Dialog Box Option Description From Sets the start address of a memory block To Sets the end address of a memory block Setting Selects the memory type When the OK button is clicked the conditions are set and the dialog box is closed When the Cancel button is clicked the dialog box is closed and the conditions are not set The following shows the memory types that can be set in the Setting combo box Table 5 96 Settings for Memory Type Available in the Setting Combo Box Memory Type Description EMULATION AREA 16 bit Sets the address range in the emulation memory area with a 16 bit bus EMULATION AREA 32 bit Sets the address range in the emulation memory area with a 32 bit bus EMULATION AREA Read Only 16 bit Sets the address range as a write protected area in the emulation memory area with a 16 bit bus EMULATION AREA Read Only 32 bit Sets the address range as a write protected area in the emulation memory area with a 32 bit bus The attribute settings listed above are only for external memory and cannot be applied to the internal I O area Note For details refer to appendix E 2 Emulation Memory 5 11 2 VP_MAP Translation The MPU which has an MMU translates internal addresses virtual addresses to actual memory addresses physical addresses Address translation is according to the address translation table translation look aside buffer TLB in the MPU The MMU operates during comma
202. int e The address is in any area other than CS area except the internal RAM area 146 RENESAS e The address holds an instruction which may satisfy Break Condition U2 e The address of the delay slot for a delayed branch instruction Notes 1 When the number of passes or reset point is specified emulator firmware stops the program every time the program passes the address set as a break condition so that it can update its count of passes As a result the program does not operate in realtime it will stop about 100 ms When the program passes such an address the emulator executes the instruction at the address as a single step then returns to normal program execution Break Condition U2 becomes invalid during this single step execution 2 When a software breakpoint is set in the delay slot of a delayed branch instruction the value in the PC will become illegal Do not set a software breakpoint at the slot instruction after a delayed branch instruction 3 Do not allow the user program to modify values in memory at software sequential breakpoints Software sequential breakpoints are ignored during step execution 5 When execution starts from the first pass point counting of numbers of passes starts the next time a breakpoint is passed 147 RENESAS 5 5 3 Hardware Break Overview Hardware break functions are implemented by dedicated hardware in the emulator station The hardware break conditions shown in table 5 29 can be specifie
203. int when a session file is loaded the breakpoint is registered as DISABLE in the Breakpoints window 6 Software breakpoints are ignored during step execution 7 Do not set a software breakpoint immediately after the delay slot of a delayed branch instruction If this is attempted a slot illegal instruction interrupt will occur when the delayed branch instruction is executed and the break will not occur 8 Do not allow the user program to modify memory at a breakpoint address 9 The contents of the specified address where a breakpoint has been set are replaced by a break instruction during emulation 10 When execution starts at the address of a software breakpoint counting of the number of passes starts from the next pass 141 RENESAS 5 5 2 Software Sequential Break Overview A software sequential break occurs when software breakpoints are encountered in the specified order Break condition The break condition is satisfied User program when instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2000 have been Program executed in sequence flow 1000 Break condition 1 No break occurs 2000 Break condition 2 The break condition is satisfied when instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2000 have been executed in sequence Figure 5 17 Example of a Software Sequential Break A reset point can be specified along with the pass points When execution passes the reset point or if the pass points are not passed in the specified
204. ion address lt address gt y lt address gt Address numeric When masking the address value is specified the access condition for the address bus can be specified address mask lt maskdata gt address mask lt maskdata gt pc address mask lt maskdata gt pcafter address mask lt maskdata gt x address mask lt maskdata gt y lt maskdata gt Specifies the mask data RENESAS Parameter dataopt Description Specifies a data condition To break on a specified 8 bit value data lt data gt byte To break on a specified 16 bit value data lt data gt word To break on a specified 32 bit value data lt data gt long To break on an X bus data value data lt data gt x To break on a Y bus data value data lt data gt y lt data gt Data value numeric When lt data gt is specified a break will not occur during the program fetch cycle When masking the data value is specified the access condition for the data bus can be specified Specifies a mask value data mask lt maskdata gt byte data mask lt maskdata gt word data mask lt maskdata gt long data mask lt maskdata gt x data mask lt maskdata gt y lt maskdata gt Specifies a mask value The X and Y address bus values must be of a word length lt asidopt gt Specifies an ASID value for internal break asid lt ASID value gt Specifies a value within the range from H 0 to H FF lt r wopt gt Specifies a read write condition dir
205. ions e The writing and erasing modules must be written in assembly language e All general and control register values must be saved and restored before and after invoking the writing and erasing modules e The writing and erasing modules must be created so that execution always returns to the calling program Create the modules using the following interface to give the information necessary for flash memory access 115 RENESAS Table 5 8 Module Interface Module Name Parameters Return Value Writing module R4 L Writing address RO L Termination code R7 L Verification option Normal termination 0 0 Writing with verification Abnormal termination Other than 0 1 Writing without verification Verification error BT R5 L Access size 0x4220 Byte 0x5720 Word 0x4C20 Longword R6 L Write data Erasing module R4 L Access size None Notes 1 2 Notes 1 0x4220 Byte 0x5720 Word 0x4C20 Longword L means the long size Writing module The write data is set in an area of specified access size in the R6 register When the access size is a word or byte the upper bits of the R6 register will be filled with Os When the flash memory downloading function is enabled data cannot be downloaded to other areas The flash memory area can be accessed only by this downloading function The memory writing or software break functions must only be performed to the RAM area When the flash me
206. ions given below are of the Time settings page that are displayed when Bus trace or Bus AUD trace is selected and the AUD settings page that is displayed when AUD trace or Bus AUD trace is selected 212 RENESAS a Time Page Use the Time page to specify time stamp conditions for use in the search for external bus trace information General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time Time Stamp T Don t Care Point Range From jo fo jo fio H M 5 US D E E go H Figure 5 66 Trace Filter Dialog Box Time Page Table 5 75 Time Page Options Option Description Don t Care No time stamp condition is set Point Sets the trace search condition to values above the value set as From Range Sets the range set by From to To as a trace search condition From Sets the time stamp value from which the valid range starts as a numerical value decimal When any number is omitted 0 is assumed H hour 0 to 999 M minute 0 to 59 S second 0 to 59 US microsecond 0 to 999999 To When Range is selected sets the time stamp value of the end of the range of valid values as a numerical value decimal When any number is omitted 0 is assumed H hour 0 to 999 M minute 0 to 59 S second 0 to 59 US microsecond 0 to 999999 213 RENESAS b AUD Page Use the AUD page to specify time stamp conditions for use in the s
207. is accessed but input to the user WAIT pin is only valid when user external memory is accessed D 6 Emulator Status and Internal Modules Some internal modules do not operate when the emulator is in break mode Table D 1 shows the relation between the emulator s state and operation of the internal modules Table D 1 Emulator State and Operation of Internal Modules Operation During Operation During Emulation Emulation Halted Execution or Step Internal Module Break Execution TMU Timer Yes Yes RTC realtime clock Yes Yes WDT watchdog timer Yes Yes IrDA Yes Yes SmartCard interface Yes Yes SCI SCIF serial communication interface Yes Yes DMAC direct memory access controller Yes Yes UBC user break controller Not available Not available I O port Yes Yes H UDI Hitachi user debugging interface Not available Not available Notes 1 If a break occurs during a DMAC cycle vector read read write of transferred information or data read write the DMAC continues operation until the DMAC cycle is complete The DMAC resumes operation after it returns to emulation 2 For the emulator this module is not available on the user program as it is used as Break Condition U 3 The emulator does not support this module RENESAS 367 368 RENESAS Appendix E Notes on Debugging E 1 The Tracing Function 1 It is not possible to disassemble traced data 2
208. isplay are branch source and branch destination The instruction pointer is displayed only for the branch source instruction However when there is no trace acquisition of branch source instructions the pointer displays the branch destination instructions R W to PRB b Displays AUD trace types BRANCH Branch instruction branch source DESTINATION Branch instruction branch destination LOST Information lost trace information is lost in realtime trace R W to PRB c Displays the addresses of branch source and branch destination instructions Displays the addresses of branch source and branch destination instructions These addresses are all displayed in 32 bits When the trace type is LOST is displayed R W to PRB d Displays the operand code When the trace type is LOST is displayed Time Stamp When branch information with the same destination address and source address repeatedly exists only one branch information is displayed In this case the number of times branch instructions are repeated will be displayed Source Notes 1 When the address information is not displayed the undefined bits are displayed as in 4 bit units The corresponding line of source code to the program counter Clicking in the Source column activates the Source window and jumps to the corresponding line The contents of the source column are not displayed when the address information is not
209. isplayed by using the dedicated hardware of the emulator without halting the user program Therefore it does not affect the emulation Specify this mode by selecting Realtime parallel monitor in the AUM Target Details dialog box Memory access bus widths can be selected from 8 16 or 32 bits e Non realtime mode This mode temporarily halts the execution of the user program for the display of the memory contents while it is acquiring memory Since execution of the user program is halted emulation cannot take place in realtime Specify this mode by selecting Non Realtime Memory read in the AUM Target Details dialog box Memory access bus widths can be selected from 8 16 or 32 bits The mode and bus width of memory access can be selected through the AUM Target Details dialog box After selection click the OK button 252 RENESAS AUM Target Details Ed C Non Realtime Memory read Bus Width 32 Bit Cancel P_MAP C Normal Physical Space Virtual Space ASID D O Figure 5 92 AUM Target Details Dialog Box 5 13 3 Displaying the Memory Display format The auto update memory function allows the display of memory contents in ASCII bit byte word longword single precision floating point units or double precision floating point units with or without signs in decimal or hexadecimal Click the right hand mouse button with the cursor in the AUM window The pop up menu will be display
210. isplayed in the status bar When power is turned on emulation will resume and the PC of the currently executing user program will be displayed e When clock is stopped the emulator is turned on User system not ready is displayed and the HDI links down When using the emulator continuously link up the HDI again Emulator Command Wait State e When user system power is turned off or clock is stopped User system not ready is displayed and the HDI links down When you wish to continue to use the emulator link up the HDI again 257 RENESAS 5 15 Input Format 5 15 1 Entering Masks Address bus conditions and data bus conditions can be input with masks Addresses can be masked in bits or in 4 bit units When a bit is masked it always satisfies the condition To specify a mask for an address condition specify the mask value in the Mask area The mask for data conditions is specified in the Data area There is a separate Mask list on the Data page of the Break Condition U1 dialog box To specify any further mask specify for the digits to be ignored Examples of mask specification are shown below Table 5 103 Address Mask Specification No Input Value Mask Unit Example Masked Bits 1 Binary 1 bit B 01101 Masks bits 0 to 2 2 Hexadecimal 4 bits H F50 Masks bits 0 to 11 258 RENESAS 5 16 Source Window Expanded Function 5 16 1 Setting BP Column In the HDI software breakpoints can be set can
211. ith Nos 1 to 5 of Break Condition B and Nos 1 to 3 have been satisfied Condition B Seq 3 5 Condition A Seq 1 3 AB 00001028 Figure 5 37 Example Display of the Status of a Hardware Sequential Break Condition 170 RENESAS 5 5 5 Internal Break Overview These break functions use the MPU s on chip break function The internal break conditions are shown in table 5 46 These are AND conditions Table 5 46 Internal Break Conditions Break Condition Address bus Description Satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value PC Satisfied when the value on the address bus for an instruction fetch matches the specified value The break can be specified to occur either before or after execution of the fetched instruction Data bus Satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Read write Satisfied when the RD and RDWR signal levels match the specified condition When no condition is specified here the read write condition is always satisfied This condition is usually specified in combination with an address bus or data bus condition ASID Satisfied when the value in the ASID register is as specified Access type condition Satisfied when the bus cycle matches the specified condition When All is specified here all bus cycles including instruction fetch cycles satisfy the condition This condition is usually specified in combination with
212. k Command BP BC BD BE Setting BREAKPOINT BP Cancellation BREAKPOINT_CLEAR BC Display BREAKPOINT_DISPLAY BD Enable or Disable BREAKPOINT_ENABLE BE Command syntax and parameters Setting bp lt address gt count lt count gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt Cancellation be lt address gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt Display bd Enable or Disable be lt address gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt address gt Numeric Sets breakpoint address When the user sets an odd address the emulator will round it down to an even address lt count gt Numeric Sets the breakpoint pass count within the range from H 1 to H FFFF When the user does not specify the pass count the setting will be H 1 The program breaks when the breakpoint is passed specified number of times lt space gt Keyword Sets the address space of a breakpoint physical Physical address space virtual Virtual address space lt asid gt Numeric Sets the ASID value of a breakpoint within the range from H 0 to HFF When the user specifies keyword virtual for parameter lt space gt the user must set the ASID value lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables breakpoints enable Enables breakpoint setting disable Disables breakpoint setting Description Setting This command sets software breakpoints The emulator sets a software breakpoint
213. ksai Rei es A Gaia lag Sete cela RE 80 Open Dialogs Box oiei nn e aS de tidaeu a schoo A REE eon SS 81 Source Window Displaying the Source Program eesesseseeeseerssreerssrerresrsreeresee 82 Source Window Setting a Software Breakpoint esessssesesesesrsesesessseeeseeesressress 83 Source Window Break State ccccccccssssecessscceceessececseaececseeeecesseeeesesaeeesseeeeees 84 SYStem Status WINdOW cescnec Hei evctreyeancs e E EA A NTR 85 Breakpoints Window ienee geniene E E R e 86 Open Memory Window Dialog BOX ss sssessssesssseesesreesesrerrssesressesreereseerrsserrreresreerss 87 Long Memory WindoW seesssesesseesssressssessrsresresresrersserrrssestenrestenteseerrnserrrsrerresee 88 Instant Watch Dialog BOR pinsera n A E A SS 89 Watch Window Window Displaying the Array seseeseeessseeesesreeresrsrrerrsreeresrees 90 Add Watch Dialo BOX airina n enee A EN 90 Watch Window Window Displaying the Variable 0 cee eeesceceeeeeeneeceereeeneeees 91 Watch Window Window Displaying Array Elements eee eeeeeeeereeeeees 91 Source Window Step Execution ceeceesceceseeesseeceseeeeacecsseeeseeeceaeeeeneecsaeeseneecses 93 Source Window Step IN aner nnen eerd ei 94 Source Window Step Out esssesseseseseseessresseessessresetrserrseessressressresseeseseeeseesseesse 95 Watch Window Display Example 1 0 ees eeeccessceceseeeeeeeceseeeeneeceseeeeneecsaeeeenee
214. lation bcuc channel lt channel_number gt e Display beud channel lt channel_number gt e Enable Disable bcue channel lt channel_number gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt channel_number gt Numeric Sets an internal break Break Condition U channel number from 1 to 4 For BCUS commands items that can be as lt option gt depend on the channel number For the lt option gt parameter see the description of the BCUS command lt option gt parameters 1 lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt asidopt gt lt r wopt gt lt accessopt gt or lt countopt gt 2 lt addropt gt lt asidopt gt lt r wopt gt or lt accessopt gt 3 lt ioopt gt 4 lt ldtlbopt gt lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables internal break enable Enabled disable Disabled Description of the bcus command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions 273 RENESAS Parameter lt addropt gt 274 Description Specifies an address condition To specify an address as a break condition address lt address gt To specify the address as prefetched and generate a break before the corresponding instruction is executed address lt address gt pc To specify the address as prefetched and generate a break after the corresponding instruction is executed address lt address gt pcafter To specify the X bus address value as a break condition address lt address gt x To specify the Y bus address value as a break condit
215. lator malfunctions while in use the cause might be a crack in the soldered connection of the IC socket Check for the conduction by using for example a tester and solder that part again if necessary 362 RENESAS Screws M2 0 x 6 mm Cover HQPACK208SD manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation lt lt MPU SH7729R a Pin 1 IC socket NQPACK208SD manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation wore User system Figure C 5 Installing the MPU 363 RENESAS 364 RENESAS Appendix D SH7729R Internal Module Support D 1 Memory Space D 1 1 Internal I O Area If an attempt is made to access the internal I O area the internal I O area in the MPU installed in the emulator is accessed To break the user program when the internal I O area is written to or accessed use the internal break D 1 2 External Memory Area The MPU s external memory area can be set with all memory attributes that the emulator supports 365 RENESAS D 2 Low Power consumption Mode Sleep Software Standby and Hardware Standby For reduced power consumption the MPU has sleep software standby and hardware standby modes D 2 1 Sleep and Software Standby Modes e Break The sleep and software standby modes can be cleared with either the normal clearing function or with the break condition satisfaction forced break and the program breaks When restarting after a break the user program
216. lator station power is not turned on e The PC interface board and the emulator station are not correctly connected via the PC interface cable RENESAS 61 3 7 2 Error Messages from the Emulator The emulator checks its internal RAM and registers from initiation of the HDI until Link up is displayed in the status bar This is a diagnostic function The emulator executes the diagnostic program when its power is turned on or when its system program is initiated After the emulator displays any of the error messages described below the emulator will display the Target Link Down dialog box and terminate the HDI session Errors when checking internal RAM and registers at power on The emulator checks its internal RAM and registers at power on If an error occurs either of the following error messages is displayed during HDI operation Error Message Description RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxxxx The emulator checks its internal RAM and W DATA XxXxXxxxxx R DATA XxxxXxxxx registers at power on If an error occurs the address write data and read data are displayed in the following form Xxxx REGISTER ERROR The emulator checks the registers of the W DATA xx R DATA xx emulator station and displays the message when an error occurs xxxx Name of the emulator internal register where an error occurs Note Operation continues if an error occurs but the error should be investigated according to section 3 7 Troubleshooting with
217. le in the Performancel1 to 8 Dialog Boxes Mode Channel number for performance analysis 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Subroutine time o o o o o o o o measurement mode 1 Subroutine time o o o o o o o o measurement mode 2 Subroutine time o x o x o x o x measurement mode 3 Notes 1 o Can be set x Cannot be set 2 Only channels 1 to 4 can be used to measure the maximum minimum execution times in subroutine time measurement mode 2 223 RENESAS Performance Measurement Time To set the time over which the emulator to measure the performance use the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution of the Execution Model1 page in the Configuration dialog box The user can select approximately 14 minutes with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us 26 seconds with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us or 0 33 seconds with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns as the maximum time interval over which the emulator is to measure performance The counter for measurement consists of 24 bits Notes 224 The two types of errors listed below must be considered for measurement e A margin of error with 1 resolution a margin of error with 20 ns occurs when the resolution is 20 ns which occur when starting and halting break a user program execution and satisfying start and end conditions e Frequency stability of the crystal oscillating module for measurement 0 01 The resolution of the
218. location and valid address bus differs from the memory area data bus width and endian in data bus conditions For details on valid bus location address bus in data bus conditions refer to the hardware manual corresponding to each MPU 154 RENESAS c Bus State Page Use this page to specify a read write cycle condition Figure 5 26 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Bus State Page Table 5 35 Bus State Page Options Option Description Read Write Sets either read or write cycles as the break condition Read Sets read cycles as the break condition Write Sets write cycles as the break condition 155 RENESAS d Probe Page Use this page to specify external probe signal PRB1 PRB4 conditions Figure 5 27 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Probe Page Table 5 36 Probe Page Options Option Description High Sets the high level of this external probe signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of this external probe signal as a break condition Don t Care Selects no external probe signal state condition 156 RENESAS e Interrupt Page Use this page to specify NMI signal external interrupt IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 signal and BREQ signal conditions Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care rR High C Low Don t Care Don t Care Figure 5 28 Break Condition A7
219. m from the Setup menu to set configuration The Configuration dialog box is displayed Configuration Figure 4 3 Configuration Dialog Box Table 4 3 shows the options in the Configuration dialog box and the settings to run the sample program For details on the Configuration dialog box refer to section 5 2 Setting the Emulator Operating Conditions 75 RENESAS Table 4 3 Settings in the Configuration Dialog Box Page General Option Emulation clock Clock Value Emulator Clock 8 3 MHz Emulation mode Emulation mode Normal normal execution Permits or inhibits memory access during emulator execution Prohibit R W on the fly Inhibited select the check box Permits or inhibits interrupts generated by commands and button execution related to step Interrupts during step Inhibited do not select the check box Specifies memory area when accessing memory Memory area Normal Execution Mode1 Timer resolution The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution 52us Timeout Bus timeout 100us Permits or inhibits multi break Multi break PRB1 Inhibited do not select the check box Permits or inhibits the RESETP signal to be input to the user system RESETP signal Permitted select the check box Permits or inhibits BREQ signal input BREQ signal Permitted select the check box Permits or inhibits t
220. mat is as follows gt BCD A Break Condition A Sequential Enable 1 address H 100000 2 address H 200000 R address H 300000 16 To disable the display format when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCE A DISABLE 17 To clear the display format when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCC A Notes e When a Break Condition is satisfied emulation may stop after two or more instructions have been executed e Set an address condition to the external area A break will not occur in the internal memory area or internal I O area e For data bus condition the valid bus position or address bus value will be changed depending on the data bus width and an endian in the memory area For the relationship between the bus position and the address bus value refer to the hardware manual e tis not possible to use numbers to specify the points of a hardware sequential break It sets the sequential condition in the order opposite to the sequence of conditions To set the sequential conditions again clear all of the hardware sequential points 272 RENESAS 6 2 2 Internal Break Commands BCUS BCUC BCUD BCUE e Setting BREAKCONDITION_U_SET BCUS e Cancellation BREAKCONDITION_U_CLEAR BCUC e Display BREAKCONDITION_U_DISPLAY BCUD e Enable Disable BREAKCONDITION_U_ENABLE BCUE Command syntax and parameters e Setting bcus channel lt channel_number gt lt option gt lt option gt e Cancel
221. me Memory read is selected and more than one auto update memory item is set When an auto update memory item is set or modified while the user program is being executed When Format is modified while the user program is being executed 2 When Non Realtime Memory read is selected the user program will be halted for approximately 10 8 ms at intervals of approximately 500 ms this is so when measured with Clock Mode 1 the JTAG clock running at 5 MHz emulation memory accessed in 32 bits in use and the emulator clock running at 8 3 MHz 3 When an item is set in either of the below address ranges the contents will not be displayed correctly when Realtime parallel monitor is selected Select Non Realtime Memory read SDRAM internal peripheral module areas and copybacks cache areas 4 When Halt is selected from the pop up menu of the Trace window or trace halt conditions have been satisfied no auto update memory item can be added until Restart has been selected from the pop up menu of the Trace window 254 RENESAS When user program is executed in cycle reset mode or execution time measurement mode while the profile function is valid the auto update memory function is not available When the AUM window is opened in cycle reset mode or execution time measurement mode and a user program is executed while the profile function is valid the automatic updating of Auto update Memory items will be halted When a
222. mmand such as MEMORY_DISPLAY MEMORY_EDIT or commands MEMORY_FILL is executed to control the contents of memory Others When the software break settings are made When the software sequential settings are made When an AUD trace is displayed during a user program break 5 11 4 Notes on Accessing Memory Note the followings when using the HDI to access memory 1 Contents of memory areas that are not reserved areas or user memory including emulation memory have no meaning The contents of such memory are not considered to be actual memory so should be ignored If the pointer variables of the Memory or Watch window indicate the following items they must be incorrect Word access from address 2n 1 Longword access from address 4n 1 4n 2 or 4n 3 No double float display in little endian operation The following memory operations do not support the double float format Fill Memory dialog box Search Memory dialog box MEMORY FILL command This Format specification in the Copy Memory dialog box is ignored Memory is copied in byte unit Move Memory displays the first address and memory contents in which an error occurred as a single byte on the status bar regardless of the specified size 247 RENESAS 248 a 10 11 12 13 Do not save or verify memory during execution of the user program This HDI does not support Motorola S type files with the CR code H OD alone at the end of each record
223. mory downloading function is enabled execution cannot be stopped by clicking the Halt button during erasing 4 The entry areas of the modules must be in the MMU disabled area 116 If data has been written to flash memory be sure to select Enable for Erasing flash memory If Disable is selected a verification error will occur The settings of the Loading flash memory page will be stored in the session file However when the session file is loaded the setting of Loading flash memory always becomes Disable Be sure to select Enable for Loading flash memory before downloading to flash memory RENESAS Sample Programs Sample programs are provided in the Fmtool folder in the HDI installation folder Refer to these programs when creating user specific programs Table 5 9 Sample Program Specifications Item Description Endian Big RAM area to be used H 0C001000 to H 0C0014DF Start address of writing module H 0C001100 Start address or erasing module H 0C001000 Workspace for the HEW lt Folder where the following HDI file is installed gt FMTOOL FMTOOL HWS Load module file in the S type format lt Folder where the following HDI file is installed gt FMTOOL FMTOOL RELEASE FMTOOL MOT Source file lt Folder where the following HDI file is installed gt FMTOOL FMTOOL FMTOOL SRC Note This program was created by using v 1 2 of the HEW It is not possible to open the attached
224. mulation mode Selects the operating mode for emulation Normal Normal emulation initial value Cycle Reset x Issues a forced RESETP signal to the MPU then continues emulation after a specified interval cycle reset mode x 6 5us 9 8us 50us 100us 500us ims 5ms 10ms 50ms 100ms 500ms or 1s Break Condition U Sequential 2 gt 1 Uses an internal break Break Condition U1 and U2 or reset condition to execute a sequential break Timeout break of Performance Analysis Emulation breaks when the Performance Analysis 1 timeout specification or maximum number of passes specification is satisfied Timeout trace stop of Performance Analysis Trace stops when the Performance Analysis 1 timeout specification or maximum number of passes specification is satisfied Time interval Measurement Condition B Measures the execution time over which a specific condition is satisfied by using Break Condition B or Trace Condition B No Break Emulation with all break conditions disabled Prohibit R W on the fly Selects whether or not to disable access to memory during user program execution Initial value Disabled Interrupts during step 108 Selects whether or not to accept interrupts during step execution Initial value Disabled RENESAS Table 5 4 General Page cont Option Memory Area Item Description Selects whether or not physical addresses or virt
225. n Address of Reset Point and address memory spaces in Memory area Click the OK button Address r Sequence Point Address 1 H124 Address 2 H134 Address 3 Address 4 Address 5 Address 6 Address 7 Memory area Normal Physical Virtual m Reset Point Address Nomal Physical Virtual ASID j Memory area Figure 5 20 Break Sequence Dialog Box The display returns to the Sequence page The Sequence Point list box will display the specified software sequential break conditions Click the Close button to close the Break dialog box 145 RENESAS Table 5 28 Break Sequence Page Options Option Description Sequence Address 1 to Sets a breakpoint address in the sequence of points to be passed Point group Address 7 as a number or a symbol One to seven pass points can be set box At least two points must be set Normal Address translation is according to the current state of the emulator state When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the address is within the table s range the address is translated according to the VP_MAP table When the address is outside the table s range the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the command is input When the VP_MAP table is disabled the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the command is input Physical Sets a pass point as a physical address Vir
226. nd input wait state as well as during execution of the user program When a command for memory access is executed while the MMU s address translation function is enabled the address translated by the MMU is accessed If the specified address is not within the TLB a TLB miss occurs and the TLB must be updated by the user program The emulator s address translation function operates according to the VP_MAP tables The VP_MAP tables are the address translation tables for the emulator created with the VPMAP_SET command The following shows an example 243 RENESAS Example 1 Create VP_MAP tables for translating virtual addresses H 10000 to H 10FFF to physical addresses H 4000000 to H 4000FFF and virtual addresses H 11000 to H 11FFF to physical addresses H O to H FFF gt vs 10000 10FFF 4000000 RET gt vs 11000 11FFF 0 RET gt vd RET lt VADDR_TOP gt lt VADDR_END gt lt PADDR_TOP gt 00010000 00010FFF 04000000 00011000 OOO1LFFF 00000000 DISABLE 2 Then enable the VP_MAP tables addresses are not translated while the tables are disabled gt ve enable RET gt vd RET lt VADDR_TOP gt lt VADDR_END gt lt PADDR_TOP gt 00010000 00010FFF 04000000 00011000 OOO11LFFF 00000000 ENABLE With the virtual address settings given here virtual addresses correspond to physical addresses as shown in figure 5 88 H O H 12000 H 12FFF H 4000FFF Virtual address Physical address Figure 5
227. nd reactivate the emulation select Halt from the pop up menu in the Trace window or execute the END command in the Command Line window To leave the trace halt mode and end emulation execute the HALT command in the Command Line window Notes 1 Trace Condition A1 to A8 share hardware with Break Condition A1 to A8 Therefore when any channel of Break Condition A1 to A8 has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Trace Condition A1 to A8 2 Trace Condition B1 to B8 share hardware with Break Condition B1 to B8 Therefore when any channel of Break Condition B1 to B8 has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Trace Condition B1 to B8 3 Trace Condition C1 to C8 share hardware with Break Condition C1 to C8 and Performance Analysis 1 to 8 Therefore when any channel of Break Condition C1 to C8 or Performance Analysis to 8 has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Trace Condition C1 to C8 190 RENESAS c Displaying a History of Trace Stop Conditions and Creating a New Condition A history of trace stop conditions that have been set as Trace Condition A or B can be displayed in the Condition dialog box New conditions can also be created by using the Condition dialog box Click to select condition 1 from the Condition list box on the Condition A page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Click the Set Condition button to open the Condition dialog box The Condition dialog box h
228. nd so that the connector is flush with the board and then screw the cables firmly in place 360 RENESAS Power supply cable CN7 _ yz H__ GND cable Trace cable CN1 Trace cable CN2 aN Connected to the frame Trace cable CN3 N ground Station to evaluaton chip board CN1 Station to evaluaton chip board CN2 Station to evaluaton chip board CN3 HS7729REBH81H board Figure C 4 Connecting the Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board 4 WARNING Before connecting the trace cables to the evaluation chip board s interface connectors make sure that the numbers match and that they are correctly aligned If cables and connectors with different numbers are connected the result will be a FIRE HAZARD 361 RENESAS C 3 Installing the MPU on the User System Install the MPU in the IC socket after checking the location of pin 1 as shown in figure C 5 then use four screws M2 x 6 mm to fix the cover to the IC socket Hold the soldered part of the IC socket in place by hand to prevent rotational pressure due to screwing CAUTION Use the dedicated driver which is attached The torque for screwing must be 0 098 N m or less If a controlled torque is not possible stop screwing as soon as the pressure required changes abruptly Excessive pressure on the screws may damage the threads of the sockets or cause contact failures by cracking the solder on the IC socket If the emu
229. ndition A are cleared if there are conditions for Trace Condition A those conditions are cleared Select the Condition A page of the Breakpoints window The same setting procedure applies to the Condition B page 164 RENESAS Figure 5 34 shows an example of the display when three break condition points and one reset point have been specified as Break Condition A Condition B Condition C Condition U Point Sequence Condition A Sequential Condition 2 address H 2000 3 address H 3000 R address H 4000 Heset Reset All Set ondition Sancel Apply Help Figure 5 34 Break Dialog Box after Setting a Hardware Sequential Break C Table 5 43 Condition A B Page Options When a Hardware Sequential Break Has Been Specified Option Description Sequential Displays the sequence of break conditions for Break Condition A or B Condition Up to seven points are displayed in the order in which they must be satisfied 1 to 7 Hardware break conditions One reset point is displayed R Reset point setting Edit Modifies the Break Condition A or B setting that was selected in the Sequential Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box Reset All Clears all Break Condition A or B settings in the Sequential Condition list box 165 RENESAS Click the Edit button to open the Condition dialog box The sequence of hardware break conditions is added by either
230. nectable synchronous DRAMs SDRAM that are selected in the CS2 or CS3 option can be classified as shown below For details refer to the hardware manual Note 1 SDRAM 8M x 16 bit 8 M x 16 bits x 4 bank SDRAM 1M x 16 bits 512 k x 32 bits 1 M x 16 bits x 4 bank 512 k x 32 bits x 4 bank SDRAM Other 4M x 16 bits x 4 bank 2M x 16 bits x 4 bank The emulator uses this setting for external trace acquisition Tracing cannot be performed correctly when the settings and the contents of the memory connected to the MPU are different Areas for emulation memory allocation must be specified as NORMAL 125 RENESAS T O Port Page Selects whether or not to whether to use the pins that can serve as I O port pins for input output This setting can be used for bus trace acquisition Specify CSn and WE 2 3 to acquire bus traces for CS2 to CS6 areas Set the conditions then click Next button CPU Operating Mode 1 0 Port Figure 5 10 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box I O Port Page SH7729R SH7709S Note The SH7729R SH7709S and SH7706 use different I O port pins 126 RENESAS Table 5 16 I O Port Page Option Description CS2 PTK O Specifies which pin is to be used CS2 or PTK O Initial value CS2 When CS2 is specified as other than NORMAL in Memory page CS2 PTK 0 is fixed to CS2 CS3 PTK 1 Specifies which pin is to be used CS3 or PTK 1 Initial value CS3 When CS3 is specified as o
231. nennen nnn e a teen Bi deve caoeyeote gs Mensa AES 160 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box eee eeceecesecesecesecssecaeecaeecaeseeeeeeeeeeess 161 History Page Options i ssc este rse onenetan sa avd iee E EEEE E AoE E TEENE EEES 162 Entry List Page Options 000 e E o EEEa E E a 163 Condition A B Page Options When a Hardware Sequential Break Has Been Specified eee eeeeeeeeees 165 History Page Options i r sepine ehee neeps en seek oo tacbanes e T n e 168 Entry List Page Options 00 0 E E S E E 170 Internal Break Condition Sissn ensi ein e r E eaS R S E EEES 171 Specifiable Internal Break Conditions sssseseeeseeesesreesssreerssesresresreereseerrssrsrreresreee 172 Condition U Page Options ve ecsscsieeccesgosseacsscgeuscueesteadvedyevedycovarsanedeeeAbestestaeesyeensss 173 Break Condition U1 U4 Dialog Box Pages seseeseeeeseeesssrreresrsrrerrsrrerrsreerssen 173 Address Page Options ninti aceite Geese nthe E E E 174 Data Page Options cei esin sare setin dee ieee ein ee aes 176 ASID Pape Options ar nieve sedi cet e e E teh evedtancesedyanee S dashes 177 Bus State Group Boxy cccccc scutes iescesspecuadies cacvaseeeneave va devensep innovate E TA 178 Read Write Group Box ciente a inert ti A A RA R a 178 Co nt Page Options cei savin aia ee E E A EUEN 179 Break Condition U3 U4 Page Options ssssesssseessseeesssresresesrreresreersseerrssesrreresreee 180 Internal Sequential Break Modes
232. ng the PC Interface Board HS6000EII01H Description Notes on Using the PC Card Interface HS6000EIP01H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the PCI Interface Board HS6000EICO1H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the PCI Interface Board HS6000EICO2H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the LAN Adapter HS6000ELNO1H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Hitachi Embedded Workshop User s Manual SuperH RISC engine C C Compiler User s Manual SuperH RISC engine Assembler User s Manual H Series Linkage Editor Librarian Object Converter User s Manual Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual RENESAS Hardware Manual supporting each MPU Programming Manual supporting each MPU Notes 1 IBM PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation 2 Microsoft Windows and WindowsNT 4 0 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or in other countries 3 Pentium III is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States 4 Adobe Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or in other countries Abbreviation 1 Windows 98 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 98 operating system 2 Windows Me is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows Millenium Edition 3 WindowsNT 4 0 is an abbreviation for Microsoft WindowsNT 4 0
233. nge Beyond the range The VP_MAP table Disabled Within beyond the The VP_MAP table range Beyond the Enabled Within the range The TLB table range Beyond the range TLB error Disabled _Within beyond the Not translated range Disabled Within Enabled Within the range The TLB table beyond the range Beyond the range TLB error Disabled Within beyond the Not translated range Virtual Enabled Within Enabled Within the range The TLB table disabled beyond the range Beyond the range TLB error Disabled Within the range The TLB table Beyond the range TLB error Physical Enabled Within Enabled _Within beyond the Not translated disabled beyond the disabled range range 246 RENESAS 5 11 3 Programs which use the MMU When an MMU exception is generated due to memory being accessed during a user program break the emulator calls the MMU exception handling routine of the user program Check that the MMU exception handling routine operates correctly before starting to debug a program that uses the MMU When the MMU exception handling routine hangs the emulator resets the MPU and displays the error message Reset By E8000S Table 5 98 shows the items that cause memory to be accessed Table 5 98 Settings for Memory Type Available in the Setting Combo Box Item Description Window to display memory When the Memory or Disassemble window is opened for the contents display or modification of memory contents Memory control When a co
234. not use Break Condition U2 immediately after the emulator executes the user program Therefore the emulator does not stop the user program execution when the conditions of Break Condition U2 are satisfied immediately after execution When the user sets a software breakpoint to a slot instruction in a delay branch instruction the emulator will not stop the user program and will generate an illegal slot interrupt Therefore the user must not set a software breakpoint to slot instructions in a delay branch instruction 286 RENESAS e When the user executes step the emulator cannot count software breakpoints e When the user modifies memory contents by loading user program the emulator will clear software sequential breakpoints 287 RENESAS 6 2 6 CHECK CHECK Command syntax and parameters check Description This command tests the MPU pin state When the emulator generates an error the following is displayed lt Pin name gt HIGH or LOW The following shows the pins to test the pin state Pin Name Error State IRLO Displays high or low IRLO pin state IRL1 Displays high or low IRL1 pin state IRL2 Displays high or low IRL2 pin state IRL3 Displays high or low IRL3 pin state IRQ4 Displays high or low IRQ4 pin state IRQ5 Displays high or low IRQ5 pin state IRLSO Displays high or low IRLSO pin state IRLS1 Displays high or low IRLS1 pin state IRLS2 Displays high or low
235. not used even when the CONFIG SYS file is used go to the following procedure and modify the SYSTEM_INI file e Locate the line in the CONFIG SYS file that reads device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM 47 RENESAS Change the line so that it reads as shown below device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM X aaaa bbbb Here aaaa is the upper four digits of Start value and bbbb is the upper four digits of End value For example for the switch set to 6 you would set the line to read device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM X D800 DBFF Save the CONFIG SYS file The following is about modifying the SYSTEM_INT file Add the following line to the 386Enh section in the SYSTEM_INI file EMMExclude aaaa bbbb Here aaaa is the upper four digits of Start value and bbbb is the upper four digits of End value For example for the address area H D8000 to H DBFFF and the switch set to 6 you would set the line to read EMMExclude D800 DBFF Save the SYSTEM_INI file and exit the SYSEDIT Restart the host computer Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows NT 4 0 The description given below is about setting up the PC interface board on Windows NT 4 0 For the installation of the PC interface board to the ISA bus slot refer to the manual of your host computer This section describes the general procedure for installing the PC interface board in the host computer Log on to the host computer as Administrator Check which upper mem
236. nted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document
237. ocal variables in the main function which declares five local variables a min max j and i will be examined Select Locals from the View menu The Locals window is displayed When no local variables exist the Locals window is empty Locals alue i is Ox003fffd8 long 10 Ox003fffd4 long Ox003fffd0 long 410 Ox003fffcc long 0 Ox003fffc8 int Figure 4 31 Locals Window Click the symbol to the left of array a in the Locals window to expand the variable and display all the elements in the array 100 RENESAS Locals Value eea ae a Ox003fffd8 long 10 D 22117 Ox003fffd8 long D 21468 Ox003fffdc D 19741 Ox003fffe0 D 16927 Ox003fffe4d D 16045 Ox003fffe8 D 12122 Ox003fffec D 9988 Ox003fff 0 D 8410 Ox003ffff4 D 3498 OxO003fff 8 D O Ox003ffffc lo D O Ox003fffd4 lo B ooun BWM Oo ae eee ey ey ey ey ey 1 m ng D O Ox003fffd0 long D 8410 Ox003fffcc long D 10 Ox003fffc8 int Bu py tS Figure 4 32 Locals Window Displaying Array a Elements 101 RENESAS 4 13 Saving and Loading the Session The information set to the HDI windows and dialog boxes can be saved as a session file Loading this session file at HDI initialization will allow debugging to be resumed from the same state as the last session To save the session file select Save Session As from the
238. ode2 page of the Configuration dialog box The same setting procedure can be used on the Condition B page General Execution Model Execution Mode2 Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode a Le EINTE Condition A Trace v Condition B Not used ha TRGE Option when Break Condition B or Trace Condition B are satisfied Specifies whether a pulse is output from trigger output pin of the E8000 without a break Break occurs but does not output a trigger Outputs a trigger when any hardware break condition Outputs a trigger when the specified hardware break condition E oondition B1 hf Figure 5 53 Configuration Dialog Box Sequential Trace Stop This setting selects Trace Condition A for use as a sequential trace stop At this time any existing condition settings for Trace Condition A and Break Condition A are cleared Therefore any trace stop conditions which you wished to use must be specified again Select the Condition A page of the Trace window using the same procedure described when setting trace stop conditions the same setting procedure applies to the Condition B page For details on the Condition A and Condition B pages refer to section 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break Click the Edit button to open the Condition dialog box For details on the procedure for registering sequential trace stop conditions and the display of the number of times the conditions
239. of the two methods described below a Using the history of hardware break condition settings on the History page Any hardware break condition displayed on the History page of the Condition dialog box can be used as a hardware sequential break condition Click to select a condition from the Condition list on the History page then click the V button the condition is now added to the Sequence list box as No 1 In the same way hardware break conditions Nos 2 to 7 can be added in sequence The order in which the conditions must be satisfied to generate a break is the order in which they were added in the Sequence list box Click the WR button to add a reset point The reset point condition will be displayed to the right of Reset in the Sequence list box Click the OK button to return to the Condition A page and the hardware sequential break conditions will have been set The Sequential Condition list displays the hardware sequential break conditions that have been specified Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box 166 RENESAS Condition History Entry List Condition address H 1000 address H 2000 address H 3000 address H 4000 Sequence No Condition address H 1000 address H 2000 address H 3000 address H 4000 Ej Delete Cancel Help Figure 5 35 Condition Dialog Box History Page 167 RENESAS Table 5 44 History Page Options Option Description Condition
240. office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions un
241. og box has only the General and Address pages Table 5 66 Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Selects the range trace mode Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt and control signal conditions 195 RENESAS Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace condition A1 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified trace conditions will now be displayed as condition 1 in the Condition list box Click the OK button to close the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The options on each page are the same as those of the corresponding Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog boxes except the General page For details of the options on each page refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break Trigger Output A low level pulse is output from the trigger output probe when the conditions specified for Trace Condition B are satisfied during execution of the user program For details refer to section 5 10 Trigger Output Timeout Trace Stop Trace acquisition can be stopped when execution time or number of passes exceeds the respective conditions
242. ogram Name 238 The name of a load module that is loaded RENESAS The Platform sheet has the following contents Table 5 91 Platform Sheet Configuration Item Description Connected To The name of an emulator that is connected CPU The type of target MPU Use MD5 0 of User System to H UDI JTAG Clock Settings of the CPU Operating mode dialog box Current operating state is displayed this includes the endian MD5 CSO Bus Width MD4 3 and Clock Mode MD2 0 User system MD5 0 The states on pins MD5 to MDO of the user system Clock source The clock that is selected Run status Whether or not the user program is being executed Running is displayed during execution and Break is displayed during stop Cause of last break The cause of termination by a break Run Time Count The program execution time the result of measurement of the time from Go to Break XXXXIH xxM xxS xxxxxxUS xxxNS H Hour M Minute S Second US Microsecond NS Nanosecond x Number Condition A Sequential and following items The Condition A sequential points that have been passed The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution is displayed as Interval Timer counter Condition A Sequential and Condition B Sequential display the settings and information on the pass points at which execution is halted Note The contents may be different from
243. oint at the line that contains the sort function call e Double click the BP column on the line containing the sort function call Break will be displayed on the line containing the sort function to show that a software breakpoint is set at that address P TUTORIAL c BE E Label Source 00003000 _main void main void long a l0 min max long j int i i 00003002 fori i 0 i lt 10 itt i 0000300a j randi 00003012 iftj lt Of 00002016 j j ooo030la ali j 00003036 sortia 0000303e min a 0 00003042 max a 9 Figure 4 11 Source Window Setting a Software Breakpoint The emulator has many break functions For details refer to section 5 5 Break Functions 83 RENESAS 4 7 Executing the Program e To execute the program select Reset Go from the Run menu or click the Reset Go button on the toolbar The program will be executed up to the breakpoint that has been set and will then stop The line where the program has halted will be highlighted in the Source window B TUTORIAL c Mic es Line Address Label Source 00003000 _lain void main void long a l0 min max long j int i i oooo03002 fori i 0 i lt 10 itt j o000300a j randi 000032012 ifij lt 0 00003016 j j o000301a ali 0000303e 00003042 Figure 4 12 Source Window Break State 84 RENESAS The user can see the cause of the last break through the Platform she
244. on is executed lt Idtlbopt gt BCUS CHANNEL 4 LDTLB 276 RENESAS 7 To display the internal breakpoint channel settings BCUD CHANNEL 1 Display gt BCUD CHANNEL 1 Break Condition U1 Enable address H 1000000 pcafter asid D 16 8 To display all internal breakpoints BCUD Display gt BCUD Break Condition Break Condition Break Condition Break Condition Ul U2 U3 U4 Enable Enabl address H 1000000 pcafter asid D 16 address access dat direction read Enable Enable address io ldtlb 9 To disable internal breakpoint channel 1 conditions BCUE CHANNEL 1 DISABLE 10 To enable all internal breakpoint conditions BCUE ENABLE 11 To cancel internal breakpoint channel 2 conditions BCUC CHANNEL 2 12 To cancel all internal breakpoint conditions BCUC Note When the lt addropt gt parameter is specified as x the lt dataopt gt parameter must also be specified as x When lt addropt gt parameter is specified as y the lt dataopt gt parameter must also be specified as y X Y can only be specified when the SH7729R has been selected 277 RENESAS 6 2 3 Hardware Sequential Break Specification Command CSQ e Setting CONDITION_SEQUENCE CSQ e Display CONDITION_SEQUENCE CSQ Command syntax and parameters e Setting esq lt type gt lt action gt e Display csq lt type gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Sets hardware sequenti
245. on the data bus matches the specified value Read write Satisfied when the read write matches the specified condition External interrupt and control Satisfied when the external interrupt and control signal levels match the specified conditions External probe 194 Satisfied when the external probe PRB signal levels match the specified conditions RENESAS Trace conditions that can be specified for Trace Conditions A B and C are shown in table 5 65 Table 5 65 Specifiable Range Trace Conditions Range Trace Trace Condition A Trace Condition B Trace Condition C Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O O X Read Write O O X External interrupt and O O X control External probe O O X Note O Can be specified X Cannot be specified Trace Condition A7 is taken as an example of setting a range trace condition Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Acquisition from the menu and the Trace Acquisition dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page Click condition 1 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Trace Condition A1 dialog box Select Range range trace mode on the General page The Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 66 However Trace Condition C1 to C8 dial
246. on time as numerical values and on a graph TOTAL RUN TIME Total execution time H hours M minutes S seconds US microseconds NS nanoseconds Resetting Performance Analysis Settings To reset the results of performance analysis select Initialize from the pop up menu of the Performance Analysis window Before the reset the emulator will display a message box to ask you if you want to reset the settings To reset the settings click the OK button Note When using the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution in the Configuration dialog box to modify the unit for counting by the execution time measurement counter be sure to reset the settings for performance analysis before altering the minimum time interval Otherwise the emulator will continue to use the minimum time interval from before the alteration in measuring the program s performance 236 RENESAS 5 9 Displaying Various Information The System Status window displays a variety of information set by each dialog box Open the System Status window by selecting Status from the View menu System Status iof x Iten Status Connected To SH7729R E8000 Emulator CPU SH7729R Use MD5 0 of User System Disabled Endian MD5 Big C50 Bus Width MD4 3 32 Bit Clock Mode MD2 0 Clock Mode 1 C50 Memory Type NORMAL C5l Memory Type NORMAL C52 Memory Type NORMAL CS3 Memory Type NORMAL C54 Memory Type NORMAL CS5 Memory Type NORMAL C5
247. on to interface connector CN2 the evaluation chip board c Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 3 that connects the emulator station to interface connector CN3 the evaluation chip board d Crystal oscillator terminals For installing a crystal oscillator to be used as an external clock source for the SH7729R e User system or user system For connecting the user system or user system interface cable connector interface cable 16 RENESAS f HS7729REBH81H HS7706EBH8 1H g Power connector CN7 SH7729R SH7706 is incorporated The IC socket to connect to the user system is installed For the power cable that connects the device control board to the evaluation chip board RENESAS 2 2 Configuration of the Provided CD R The provided CD R contains software for the SH7729R E8000S emulator and user s manuals Table 2 1 shows the configuration of the CD R Table 2 1 Contents of CD R Directory Name File Name Contents Note setup exe Installer System 7729r E8000 sys System program for the SH7729R SH7709S E8000S emulator System 7729r shenf29r sys Control program for the SH7729R SH7709S E8000S emulator System 7729r shdct29r sys Configuration file for the SH7729R SH7709S E8000S emulator System 7729r diag sys Diagnostic and maintenance program for the SH7729R SH7709S E8000S emulator System 7706 E8000 sys System program for the SH7706 E8000S emulator
248. ondition prb lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit specification 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x xX Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x ben th i 4 3 2 1 PRB number When is specified the condition applies for any and all bits lt nmiopt gt Specifies an NMI signal condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b To trace the user program when the NMI signal is high nmi hi To trace the user program when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt irlopt gt Specifies IRLO to IRL 3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 signal conditions Valid when lt type gt is a or b To specify IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 signal conditions irl lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows To specify bits IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x x xX Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x Ca a E 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRL IRQ number When is specified the condition applies for any and all bits lt breqopt gt Specifies a BREQ signal Valid when lt type gt is a or b To trace the user program when the BREQ signal is active breq lt countopt gt Specifies the pass count until trace acquisition condition is satisfied Valid when lt tracetype gt is stop and lt type gt is a or b To specify a pass count count lt value gt Any value from H 1 to H FFFF can be specified as lt value gt lt delayopt gt Specifies the num
249. ongword data access cycles X Bus data Sets X bus data access cycles This can only be set for Break Condition U1 when SH7729R is selected Y Bus data Sets Y bus data access cycles This can only be set for Break Condition U1 when SH7729R is selected Non user mask Sets no mask condition User mask Sets mask conditions Mask Sets the mask bits if User mask is selected Masked bits on the data bus satisfy this break condition regardless of their values Note To set the data conditions after specifying X Bus address or Y Bus address in the Address page specify X Bus data or Y Bus data in the Data page 176 RENESAS c ASID Page Use this page to specify the ASID conditions Figure 5 41 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box ASID Page Table 5 52 ASID Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no ASID condition ASID Sets a value as an ASID condition The default setting is D O Any value in the range of D O to D 255 can be set 177 RENESAS d Bus State Page Use this page to specify conditions for the read or write cycle and access type Address Data ASID Bus State Count PSU SE er All C Data C DMA Read Write S Read Write C Read C Write Figure 5 42 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Bus State Page Table 5 53 Bus State Group Box Option Description All All bus states satisfy this condition Data Data access cycles satisf
250. onnect the frame ground only do not connect the signal ground to the frame ground If it is difficult to separate the frame ground from the signal ground in the user system ground the frame to the same outlet as the 100 V 200 V power supply of the emulator station figure 3 9 so that the ground potentials become even Signal line Emulator station Evaluation chip board User system Signal groun Frame ground Ground Figure 3 8 Connecting the System Ground RENESAS A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST The user system must be connected to an appropriate ground so as to minimize noise and the adverse effects of ground loops When connecting the evaluation chip board and the user system confirm that the ground pins of the evaluation chip board are firmly connected to the user system s ground Emulator power cable User system power cable Ground 100 V to 240 V AC power Figure 3 9 Connecting the Frame Ground 36 RENESAS 3 3 6 System Connection The host interface consists of eight switches as shown in figure 3 10 The switch state becomes on when the switches are pushed to the left and the state becomes off when the switches are push
251. onnected to the device control board External probe Probe input 4 Run break state output 1 Trigger output 1 GND 2 Manual Description Notes on 1 HS7729REDD81HE using the HS7729REDD81H Table 1 5 Evaluation Chip Board Components for the SH7729R Item Product No Quantity Remarks Hardware Evaluation chip 1 One board QFP208 FP 208 board Software SH7729R E8000S_ 1 CD R emulator HS7729REBH81SR Additional documents SH7729R E8000S Emulator Notes on Usage Note indicates a manual revision RENESAS HS7729REBH81HE P Table 1 6 Evaluation Chip Board Components for the SH7706 Item Product No Quantity Remarks Hardware Evaluation chip 1 One board QFP176 FP 176 board Software SH7729R E8000S_ 1 CD R emulator HS7729REBH81SR Additional documents SH7729R E8000S 1 HS7729REBH81HE P Emulator Notes on Usage Note indicates a manual revision 1 3 3 Options In addition to the emulator station the options listed in table 1 7 are also available Refer to each option manual for details on these optional components Table 1 7 Optional Component Specifications Item Model Name Specifications Optional memory board HS8000EMS01H Single board 12 Mbytes For installation on the device control board PC interface board HS6000EII01H ISA bus PCI interface board HS6000EIC01H PCI bus HS6000EICO2H PCMCIA card HS6000EIP01H PCMCIA bus LAN adapter HS6000ELN01H e TCP IP communications p
252. op Free Trace Mode Trace information is acquired continuously from the start of user program execution until any of the break conditions is satisfied The free trace mode is the default when no trace condition is specified User program Program flow Trace memory gt Break condition is satisfied RJ Figure 5 49 Trace Acquisition in Free Trace Mode 185 RENESAS Trace Stop Mode a Overview Trace acquisition stops when the specified conditions are satisfied User program Program flow Trace memory gt Realtime emulation continues No break occurs Break condition is satisfied T Figure 5 50 Trace Acquisition in Trace Stop Mode In this mode execution of the user program will not be suspended but the emulator enters the trace halt mode The trace stop conditions are shown in table 5 59 When all of the specified conditions an AND operation are satisfied trace acquisition will stop 186 RENESAS Table 5 59 Trace Stop Conditions Condition Address bus Description The condition is satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Read Write The condition is satisfied when the RD and RDWR signal levels match a specification External probe The condition is satisfied when th
253. or any claim made by a third party or made by you for a third party DISCLAIMER HITACHI MAKES NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT IN NO EVENT SHALL HITACHI BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECTIVE EMULATOR PRODUCT THE USE OF ANY EMULATOR PRODUCT OR ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS WARRANTY THIS EMULATOR PRODUCT IS SOLD AS IS AND YOU MUST ASSUME ALL RISK FOR THE USE AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM THE EMULATOR PRODUCT RENESAS State Law Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which may vary from state to state The Warranty is Void in the Following Cases Hitachi shall have no liability or legal responsibility for any problems caused by misuse abuse misapplication neglect improper handling installation repair or modifications of the emulator product without Hitachi s prior written consent or any problems caused by the user
254. or details on trace acquisition conditions 131 RENESAS 5 3 2 Trace Halt Mode Function While in trace halt mode tracing is halted and this means that trace information cannot be acquired by the trace buffer During periods in trace halt mode emulation continues and is not suspended Entering trace halt mode Trace halt mode can be entered in any of the following ways e Select Halt from the pop up menu of the Trace window e When emulation is in timeout trace stop mode trace halt mode is automatically entered when the condition set in Performance Analysis 1 is satisfied i e when the specified timeout period or number of passes has been exceeded e Trace halt mode is automatically entered when a condition that has been specified as a trace stop condition Trace Conditions A B C is satisfied TRACE STOP will be displayed in the status bar e Trace halt mode is automatically entered when a trace condition due to a trace buffer overflow is satisfied Returning from trace halt mode Any of the following actions will return the system to normal emulation e Enter the END command in the Command Line window e Select Restart from the Trace window s pop up menu Stopping the execution of the user program any of the following actions will stop execution of the user program e Enter the HALT command in the Command Line window e Click the Halt button e Select Halt from the Run menu 132 RENESA
255. or settings Clock Note Use the Configuration dialog box to make these settings Description Selects the clock supplied to drive the MPU Memory access condition settings Selects whether or not physical addresses or virtual addresses are used when memory is accessed Conditions for emulation 104 Sets conditions for emulation in terms of the following items Operating mode during execution emulation mode Interrupts during step execution Enabled or disabled Memory access during emulation Enabled or disabled Minimum unit for the execution time measurement counter Bus timeout detection period Entering multibreak mode Enabled or disabled Input of control signals Enabled or disabled Sequential conditions for Condition A and Condition B Controls conditions for trigger output during breaks Enabled or disabled RENESAS Table 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions cont Setting Item Description MPU settings Selection of a target MPU Selects a target MPU Use the CPU Endian Selects whether to use big or little endian Operating Mode dialog box to make Bus width for CSO space Sets the bus width for CSO space these settings Clock mode Sets the mode for the MPU driving clock I O port pin settings Selects whether to use the pins that can serve as I O port pins for input output This will be used for the analysis of traced data Memory type for CS s
256. or transportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or the products contained therein tENESAS C 7 D mh on lt D D SH7729R E8000S Emulator HS7729REBH81H User s Manual Bones Tonics Rev 2 0 2002 04 Cautions Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi s or any third party s patent copyright trademark or other intellectual property rights for information contained in this document Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party s rights including intellectual property rights in connection with use of the information contained in this document Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice Confirm that you have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design pu
257. ore before setting the end address the user must check how the MPU operates after the branch instruction are executed and make sure not to set the subroutine end address to address that will not be executed due to a branch instruction The emulator can continuously measure performance analysis up to 14 minutes when specified as 52 us 26 seconds when specified as 1 6 us or 0 33 second when specified as 20 ns by setting the TIME option in the EXECUTION_MODE command When the user sets break or trace condition to Break Condition C or Trace Condition C no condition can be set to PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS that has the same number In other words when the user sets break or trace condition to Break Condition C1 or Trace Condition C1 no condition can be set to PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS1 To set a condition to PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS the user must cancel the settings of Break Condition C or Trace Condition C The emulator increments the pass count when it passes through a subroutine end address Therefore the emulator will display one more than the specified pass count the subroutine execution time and number of times the subroutine was executed The emulator cannot measure the step execution time 309 RENESAS 6 2 16 REFRESH RF Command syntax and parameters rf Description Updates the contents of the HDI memory information Examples To update the HDI memory information RF 310 RENESAS 6 2 17 STATUS STS Command syntax and
258. ory areas have already been used Start Windows NT 4 0 48 Execute Start Programs Administrative Tools Common Windows NT Diagnostics Click the Memory button in the Resource tab and in the following form make a note of the upper memory areas that have already been used Exit Windows NT 4 0 Register the memory area for the PC interface board Select one of the memory areas that correspond to the following PC interface board switch settings and no other devices can access the selected memory area RENESAS If the Intel P amp P BIOS disk is supplied with the host computer register the memory area as follows e Start the host computer with the Intel P amp P BIOS disk e Check the upper memory areas that have already been used with View System Resources e Add Unlisted Card with Configure Add Card Others e Click No in the dialog box displayed because there is no CFG file e Move to the Memory hex list box in the Configure Unlisted Card dialog box e Click the Add Memory button to display the Specify Memory dialog box e Enter a memory area range that is not used by any other device and that corresponds to one of the PC interface board switch settings e Save the file e Exit the current setup program e Shut down Windows NT 4 0 and turn off the host computer power switch e Turn on the host computer 49 RENESAS 3 5 Installing the System Program A description of the
259. ot installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Vill RENESAS Preface Thank you for purchasing the emulator for the Hitachi microcomputer SH7729R CAUTION Read section 3 Preparation before Use before using the emulator product Incorrect operation or connection will damage the user system the emulator product and the user program The SH7729R E8000S emulator hereinafter referred to as the emulator is an efficient software and hardware development tool for systems based on Hitachi microcomputer SH7729R SH7709S and SH7706 By exchanging the device control board and the evaluation chip board this emulator can also be used for systems using other microcomputers The emulator is operated by using the Hitachi Debugging Interface hereafter referred to as HDI This interface program is supported by Windows 98 Windows Me WindowsNT 4 0 and Windows 2000 This manual describes the emulator functions and operations Please read this manual carefully before use in particular section 1 1 Notes on Usage A CD R for the emulator is packaged with the evaluation chip board For details refer to section 3 Preparation before Use Related Manuals Description Notes on Usi
260. ot set software sequence breakpoints to the following addresses An address whose memory content is H 0000 The address where the BREAKPOINT command was set Areas other than CS except for the internal RAM area Instructions that satisfy Break Condition U2 Slot instructions of the delay branch instruction Cancellation This command clears software sequential breakpoints that have been set It also clears reset points at the same time Display This command displays software sequential breakpoints that have been set The following shows the display format gt BSD Enable H c000000 H c010000 space physical reset H c020000 space virtual asid D 254 a b c d e 1 H 0c000000 D 0 Physical Space 2 H 0c010000 D 1 Physical Space 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Empty 6 Empty 7 Empty R H 0c020000 D 0 Virtual Space ASID D 254 e a Enable Disable b Software sequential breakpoint address c Address space Physical specifies physical address and Virtual specifies virtual address the user must set an ASID value d Reset point address 285 RENESAS e Pass count of each pass point or reset point at the end of execution cannot be displayed during execution Enable or Disable This command enables or disables software sequential breakpoints that have been set Examples 1 To set a software sequential breakpoint in which user program execution stops when the user program has pa
261. out loading the emulator system program 62 RENESAS Diagnostic checks at program start up Next the emulator system program starts up The emulator system program performs diagnostic checks of the registers of the emulator When an error is thus detected in the emulator the emulator displays the following error message while the HDI is operating 1 Errors that may occur when registers that control emulation are being tested The emulator control registers are being checked If an error occurs one of the following messages is displayed Error Message INVALID DEVICE CONTROL BOARD Description Another device control board is connected Please check the MPU type and install the correct emulator system program or exchange the device control board DEVICE CONTROL BOARD DISCONNECTION The device control board is disconnected EVACHIP BOARD DISCONNECTION x The evaluation chip board is disconnected Check that the trace cable and power cable CN7 is correctly connected x indicates a trace cable that is not properly connected x CN1 CN2 or CN3 XXXXXXXX REGISTER ERROR W DATA xxxx R DATA xxxx An error occurred in the register xXXXXXXX Name of the emulator internal register where an error occurs BOTRAR ECT BOCNR BOMDCNR BOMASCR BOCECR B1CNR B1MDCNR B1MASCR B1CECR MAPRO MAPR1 MAPR2 MAPR3 SHARED RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXXXXXX An error oc
262. pace Sets the memory types for CS space to be used for the analysis of traced data H UDI clock setting Sets the input clock for the H UDI Hitachi Debugging Interface JTAG interface 105 RENESAS 5 2 1 Configuration Dialog Box Select Configure Platform from the Setup menu to open the Configuration dialog box General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode CPU SH7729A Clock Emulator Clock 8 3MHz2 7 Emulation mode j Normal z T Prohibit B W on the fly T Interrupts during step Memory area Normal Physical Virtual AS D tes PCI Card Driver Figure 5 1 Configuration Dialog Box Use this dialog box to set the emulation conditions for the emulator Table 5 3 Configuration Dialog Box Page Description General Selects the MPU driving clock and specifies the emulation mode enabling disabling of memory access during emulation whether or not interrupts are accepted during emulation with step execution setting conditions related to memory and produces a dialog box for the setting of driver software Execution Mode1 Sets the unit of time for counting by the execution time measurement counter bus timeout detection period multibreak mode and whether or not several control signals area are enabled Execution Mode2 Sets the conditions for the output of a trigger when a break occurs and sequential conditions Condition A and
263. page The Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 62 189 RENESAS Table 5 62 Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Selects the trace mode Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt and control signal conditions Count Sets satisfaction count conditions Delay Sets delay conditions Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace condition A7 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified trace stop conditions will now be displayed as condition 7 in the Condition list box Click the Close button to close the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace stop conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The options on each page are the same as those of the corresponding Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog boxes except the General page For details of the options on each page refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break When the trace conditions are satisfied during emulation TRACE STOP will appear in a dedicated message box or on the status bar and the emulator will enter the trace halt mode To leave trace halt mode a
264. parameters sts Description Displays status information for the emulator For its contents refer to the System Status window in section 5 9 Displaying Various Information Examples To display status information for the emulator STS Display gt STS Emulator Status Connected To CPU Use MD5 0 of User System Endian MD5 CSO Bus Width MD4 3 Clock Mode MD2 0 CSO Memory Type CS1 Memory Type CS2 Memory Type CS3 Memory Type CS4 Memory Type CS5 Memory Type CS6 Memory Type Selected I O Port H UDI JTAG Clock User system MD5 0 Clock source Run status SH7729R E8000S Emulator SH7729R Disable Clock Mode 1 DH FH H FA BF Li NORMAL CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 C D31 D16 Data Bus 5MHz 30 Break RENESAS EIA WE Emulator Clock xx xMHz 311 Cause of last break Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Condition B Sequential Interval Timer counter Bus timeout Multi break PRB1 RESETP signal BREQ signal WAIT signal NMI signal Output trigger TRGB Emulation mode Prohibit R W on the fly Interrupts during step 312 BREAKPOINT D XxXxXxXH XxXM xxS xxxxxxUS xxxNS Break 6 7 Not used 52us 100us Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Normal Disabled Disabled RENESAS 6 2 18 Trace Condition Command TAS TAC TAD
265. pass point When the user sets an odd address it is rounded down to an even address lt address2 gt Numeric Sets the address of the second pass point lt address3 gt Numeric Sets the addresses of the third pass point and subsequent points The user can set up to seven pass points lt address8 gt Numeric Sets the address of the reset point lt space gt Keyword Sets the address space of the pass point physical Physical address space virtual Virtual address space lt asid gt Numeric Sets the ASID value of the pass point or reset point within the range from H 0 to H FF When the user sets keyword virtual to parameter lt space gt the user must set an ASID value lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables software sequential breakpoints enable Enables breakpoint setting disable Disables breakpoint setting 284 RENESAS Description Setting This command sets software sequential breakpoints After the user program is executed at the first pass point address and passes the software sequential breakpoints in the specified order the execution will stop at the last pass point If the program does not pass the pass points in the specified order the emulator will start analyzing when the program passes the first pass point again The user can specify up to seven breakpoints and a reset point When the program passes a reset point the emulator starts analyzing when the program passes the first pass point The user cann
266. pecify the address value of the word length This can only be set for Break Condition U1 when SH7729R is selected Address Sets an address bus value as a number or a symbol Non user mask Sets no mask condition User mask Sets mask conditions Mask 174 Sets the mask bits if User mask is selected Masked bits on the data bus satisfy this break condition regardless of their values RENESAS The pages displayed in the Break Condition U dialog box change according to the address setting When Address X Bus address and Y Bus address is selected setting of conditions in four pages Address Data ASID and Bus State is allowed When Only program fetched address or Only program fetched address after is selected setting of conditions is only allowed on two pages Address and ASID Only these two pages are displayed 175 RENESAS b Data Page Use this page to specify the data bus conditions Address Data AsID Bus State Count Data M Don t Care Value Ho C Byte C Word Long X Bus data Y Bus data Non user mask C User mask Figure 5 40 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Data Page Table 5 51 Data Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no data condition Value Sets a data bus value as a number Byte Sets byte data access cycles Word Sets word data access cycles Long Sets l
267. pes of break will be disabled according to the type of step function to be executed Table E 4 shows the relations between the type of step function and the enabling or disabling of break conditions Table E 4 Relations between the Type of Step Function and Available Break Conditions Step In Step Over Step Out Hardware break BREAK CONDITION A B C O O O Internal break BREAK CONDITION U internal X X X sequential break Hardware sequential break BREAK CONDITION O X X SEQUENTIAL A B Software break X X xX Software sequential break X X X Timeout break X X X Break due to trace buffer overflow X X X Note O Break conditions are enabled X Break conditions are disabled 374 RENESAS
268. program but the emulator will not cancel breakpoints If the user specifies a pass count the emulator will stop the user program every time a software breakpoint is passed and update the total pass count The emulator will continue to do this until the pass count is satisfied Therefore the emulator cannot execute the user program in realtime When the user does not specify any parameter the emulator will target all software breakpoints When the user does not specify space for lt space gt the emulator will target all software breakpoints set to the same address When the user specifies virtual for lt space gt and does not specify asid for lt asid gt the user targets all software breakpoints set to virtual addresses The emulator returns its count of the number of passes to zero on the next execution of a command 283 RENESAS 6 2 5 Software Sequential Break Command BSS BSC BSD BSE Setting BREAKSEQUENCE_SET BSS Cancellation BREAKSEQUENCE_CLEAR BSC Display BREAKSEQUENCE_DISPLAY BSD Enable or Disable BREAKSEQUENCE_ENABLE BSE Command syntax and parameters Setting bss lt address1 gt lt address2 gt lt address3 gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt reset lt address8 gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt Cancellation bsc Display bsd e Enable or Disable bse lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt address1 gt Numeric Sets the address of the first
269. program to the I O area was attempted Invalid address The specified address is invalid Invalid mask value The specified mask value is invalid Invalid value Invalid command syntax Invalid value or symbol xx The specified value or symbol is invalid No condition data No condition has been specified Specify one or more valid conditions Program counter is odd Since the program counter holds an odd value execution of the program is not possible Stack pointer is odd Since the stack pointer holds an odd value execution of the program is not possible The E8000S emulator cannot be started correctly Change the CPU Operating Mode The emulator was illegally started Change the CPU s operating mode Verify error at H x wrote H x read H x 334 Verification failed at H x RENESAS Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages cont Error Message Cannot use command when user program executing Description and Solution A command line was input while it was not possible to issue commands to the emulator Wait for the completion of processing Command timeout The emulator did not respond after a command was issued from the HDI so a timeout occurred in the HDI Exit from the HDI turn on the power supply of the emulator and restart the HDI Emulator command send receive check error Illegal communication between the HDI and the emulator during HDI start up Exit f
270. r address bus values B Trace timing for data bus values in reading C Trace timing for data bus values in writing Three clock cycles are traced in each bus cycle A 199 RENESAS An example of a bus trace timing for access to an area of SDRAM is shown in figure 5 59 CKIO CSn Row address Column address RAS CAS D 31 0 BS Figure 5 59 Bus Trace for SDRAM 1 B is traced when the CKIO signal rises during the CSn signal cycle A D RAS CAS data bus and BS signals are also traced 2 E is traced when the CKIO signal rises during the CSn signal cycle A C RAS CAS data bus and BS signals are also traced 3 F is traced when the CKIO signal rises during the CSn signal cycle A Address bus RAS CAS and BS signals are also traced 4 When a refresh cycle is generated during access to SDRAM SDRAM CYCLE will be displayed as the trace information 200 RENESAS 5 6 3 AUD Trace Function AUD trace is traced information which was acquired while being output from the AUD pin of the MPU Settings for AUD trace acquisition conditions are made in the AUD Trace group box on the Trace Mode page in the Trace Acquisition dialog box AUD trace acquires branch information general branch instruction subroutine branch and exceptional branch AUD trace has two acquisition modes as shown in table 5 68 Table 5 68 AUD Trace Acquisition Mode
271. raph Displays an execution time ratio in graph form default init Initializes measurement information 303 RENESAS Description of the PS command Parameter lt modeopt gt Description Sets the conditions to acquire data relating to performance analysis There are three ways to set the conditions Subroutine time measurement mode 1 The emulator measures the subroutine execution time between lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and counts the number of times of execution The emulator starts to measure a subroutine within the range of lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and stops measuring the subroutine outside the specified range The emulator restarts to measure another subroutine within the range of lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt The emulator will increment the pass count lt countopt gt after it passes through the lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt The emulator does not measure the performance of a subroutine that was called from the target subroutine Specification mode time1 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 The emulator measures the subroutine execution time between lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and counts the number of times of execution The emulator starts to measure a subroutine at lt startopt gt and stops measuring the subroutine at lt endopt gt The emulator will increment the pass count lt countopt gt after it passes through the lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt The emulator also m
272. ration puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with appropriate measures such as 1 placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of nonflammable material or iii prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials 1 These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corporation product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights belonging to Renesas Technology Corporation or a third party Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts programs algorithms or circuit application examples contained in these materials All information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons Itis therefore recommend
273. rchase or use Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability However contact Hitachi s sales office before using the product in an application that demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury such as aerospace aeronautics nuclear power combustion control transportation traffic safety equipment or medical equipment for life support Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi particularly for maximum rating operating supply voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation conditions and other characteristics Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges Even within the guaranteed ranges consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and employ systemic measures such as fail safes so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi product does not cause bodily injury fire or other consequential damage due to operation of the Hitachi product This product is not designed to be radiation resistant No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate in any form the whole or part of this document without written approval from Hitachi Contact Hitachi s sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi semiconductor products IMP
274. re input as keyword parameters Only the listed strings can be used If a string that is not listed is input an error will occur 3 String parameters String parameters are used to input mask data and file names When using strings to mask data specify H hexadecimal or B binary at the head of the data as the radix and specify for the digits to be masked When a bit is masked it always satisfies the condition No Input Value Mask Unit Example Masked Bits 1 Binary 1 bit B 01110 Masks bits 0 to 2 2 Hexadecimal 4 bits H 000F50 Masks bits 0 to 7 6 1 4 Examples The examples show how to input the command When output results the output is also described 6 2 List of Commands The following is a list of HDI emulation commands Sections in this manual are indicated in the second column If there is no section number the description is in the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual 262 RENESAS Table 6 1 List of Commands Command Section Abbreviation Description Comment ASSEMBLE AS Assembles program ASSERT Checks condition BREAKCONDITION_CLEAR 6 2 1 BCC Clears hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_DISPLAY 6 2 1 BCD Displays hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_ENABLE 6 2 1 BCE Enables or disables hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_SET 6 2 1 BCS Sets hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_U_CLEAR 6 2 2
275. rnal DMAC direct memory access controller the serial communication interface SCI etc as the peripheral function other than the high speed CPU The emulator operates in place of the SH7729R and performs realtime emulation of the user system The emulator also provides functions for efficient hardware and software debugging The emulator consists of an emulator station a device control board for the SH7729R an optional memory board and an evaluation chip board The evaluation chip board is connected to the user system via an IC socket figure 1 1 By installing a PC interface board available for ISA bus PCI bus and PCMCIA bus on your host computer the HDI can be used for debugging A LAN adapter allows the connection of the emulator station to the host computer as a network Connecting the LAN adapter also enables debugging using the HDI For details on PC interface boards available for ISA bus PCI bus and PCMCIA bus specifications and LAN adapter refer to their description notes RENESAS Pai memory board HS8000EMS01H P a control board HS7729REDD81H yi PC meraca cable option 2 Network LAN adapter option Emulator station HS8000EST11H f C socket External probe trigger output pins User system Figure 1 1 Emulator for the SH7729R Connected via the IC Socket RENESAS The emulator provides the following features 1 Realtime emulation of the SH77
276. rom the HDI turn on the power supply of the emulator and restart the HDI If this does not solve the problem contact Hitachi s sales department or the agent through whom you purchased the HDI Emulator firmware not ready A message EMULATOR FIRMWARE NOT READY has been received from the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly Emulator timeout A timeout message has been detected from the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly Failed to find matching trace record The searching for the trace information has failed because no information is currently displayed in the Trace window This error message is also output when there is no trace information Hardware register read write check error When the HDI was started up an error was detected during checking of the hardware registers of the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly Invalid version number in target configuration The HDI version when the session file was created and the current HDI version differ Do not use a session file for an earlier version System ID error An emulator different from that selected in the Select Platform dialog box is currently connected Check whether the correct emulator is in use Target internal error A command cannot be issued to the emulator Wait for the completion of processing U
277. rotocol e 10BASE T e 100BASE Tx RENESAS RENESAS Section 2 Components 2 1 Emulator Hardware Components The emulator consists of an emulator station an SH7729R device control board an optional memory board and an SH7729R or SH7706 evaluation chip board as shown in figure 2 1 By installing a PC interface board ISA bus PCI bus and PCMCIA bus connectors are available on your host computer the HDI can be used for debugging A LAN adapter can be connected to the emulator as the network enabling debugging by the HDI For details on the PC interface board option ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus specifications and the LAN adapter refer to the description notes on each product Optional memory board HS8000EMS01H v4 Device control board HS7729REDD81H PC interface cable option l amp Network LAN adapter option Emulator station HS8000EST11H 3 WJ IC socket External probe s g trigger output pins User system Figure 2 1 Emulator Hardware Components RENESAS 2 1 1 Emulator Station Components The names of the components on the front rear panel of the emulator station are listed below Front Panel Figure 2 2 Emulator Station Front Panel a POWER lamp Is lit up while the emulator station is supplied with power b RUN lamp Is lit up while the user program is running 12 RENESAS Rear Panel 9 AC100 120V AC200 240V
278. rror Evaluation chip board correctly connected Connect correctly Connected to Check f Can emulation the user comman commands be system passed a commana User system defect entered normally Check the user system System command is disconnected System defect passed defect System defect System Are the transmission defect procedure and speed Can data be input F of the emulator and to the host Are the connections host computer correct Modify to the correct computer normally Ar a the procedure and speed correct Connect correctly END Figure 3 29 Troubleshooting PAD 66 RENESAS 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic Program A description of the diagnostic program is given below When the HDI is started up the following dialog box is displayed HDI x N This is immediatelly initiates the diagnostic program Do you want to initiate the diagnostic program Figure 3 30 Diagnostic Program Initiation Confirmation Dialog Box When the Yes button is clicked the diagnostic program is initiated and the following dialog box is displayed DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM x E8000 TEST amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAM DIAG SYS Version No X XX XX KXX XXXX Copyright C Hitachi LTD XXXX Please key in TEST PARAMETER OPERATOR TEST EXECUTE Y N P COMMAND Poo STOP END Figure 3 31 DIAGNOSTIC PROGR
279. rted into the wrong place Prevents a trace cable from being inserted into the wrong place RENESAS 2 1 2 Device Control Board Components The names of the components on the device control board HS7729REDD81H of the emulator station are listed below a DCONT TRC CONT AC100 120V AC200 240V 2A 50 60Hz Figure 2 4 Device Control Board A Device control board slot For installing the device control board depends on the target device a External probe connector For connecting the emulator station to the external probe b Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 3 that connects the emulator station interface connector CN3 to the evaluation chip board RENESAS c Power cable For connecting the device control board to the evaluation chip board 2 1 3 Evaluation Chip Board Configuration The names of the components on the evaluation chip board HS7729REBH81H of the emulator are listed below These apply to the HS7706EBH81H as well 1 Top view of HS7729REBH81H 2 Bottom view of HS7729REBH81H Station to evaluation chip board interface connectors Oo tT T 3 Side view of HS7729REBH81H Figure 2 5 Evaluation Chip Board HS7729REBH81H a Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 1 that connects the emulator station to interface connector CN1 the evaluation chip board b Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 2 that connects the emulator stati
280. rupts during step from the General page of the Configuration dialog box if you want interrupts to be accepted during step execution 5 5 Break Functions The emulator provides break function shown in table 5 24 The HDI displays a list of breakpoints in the Breakpoints window and the break conditions are specified in the dialog boxes for break functions Breakpoints Of oO x Enable File Line Symbol Address Type sort c 31 _sort eee ea Break Point Physical Space sort c 55 _change 00000124 Break Sequence e _rand 00000190 Break Condition U1 Enable address H Figure 5 13 Breakpoints Window For details on the Breakpoints window refer to the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual in the CD R 136 RENESAS Table 5 24 Break Functions Type Software break Description The contents of the specified address are replaced by a break instruction a dedicated instruction for use with the emulator and the program is then executed When the break instruction is executed a break occurs Break Point is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Software sequential break An order for the satisfaction of conditions can be specified for software breakpoints When all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order a break occurs Up to seven pass points in order of satisfaction and one reset point can be specified Break Sequence is displayed under Type in the Br
281. s Figure 3 7 Installing the Crystal Oscillator External Clock Use the following procedure to select the external clock 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the emulator station s front panel is not lit 2 Connect the evaluation chip board to the user system and supply a clock through the EXTAL pin from the user system 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power U the external clock will then be automatically specified by a CLOCK command Emulator Internal Clock Specify 8 8 3 MHz 16 16 5 MHz 33 33 3 MHz or 66 66 6 MHz with the CLOCK command Reference When the emulator system program is initiated the emulator automatically selects the MPU clock source according to the following priority 1 External clock when supplied from the user system 2 Crystal oscillator when attached to the evaluation chip board 3 Emulator internal clock 34 RENESAS 3 3 5 Connecting the System Ground CAUTION Separate the frame ground from the signal ground at the user system When the frame ground is connected to the signal ground and the emulator is then connected to the user system the emulator may malfunction The emulator s signal ground is connected to the user system s signal ground via the evaluation chip board In the emulator station the signal ground and frame ground are connected figure 3 8 At the user system c
282. se incorrect operation H C0000 H C4000 H C8000 H CC000 H D0000 Setting at shipment H D4000 H D8000 H DC000 H E0000 H E4000 H E8000 H EC000 H EFFFF Figure 3 11 Allocatable Memory Area of PC Interface Board 43 RENESAS Switch Setting A rotary switch is installed on the PC interface board figure 3 12 The switch is used to set the memory area allocation Table 3 2 lists the switch setting states The switch setting at emulator shipment is No 4 memory area H D0000 to H D3FFF PC interface board Enlarged front view Rotary switch Table 3 2 Switch Settings for Memory Areas Switch Setting 0 Figure 3 12 PC Interface Board Switch Memory Area H C0000 to H C3FFF Switch Setting Memory Area H E0000 to H E3FFF H C4000 to H C7FFF H E4000 to H E7FFF H C8000 to H CBFFF H E8000 to H EBFFF H CC000 to H CFFFF H EC000 to H EFFFF H D0000 to H D3FFF Not used H D4000 to H D7FFF Not used H D8000 to H DBFFF m ol ooa Not used 1 2 3 4 setting at shipment 5 6 7 H DC000 to H DFFFF F Not used Note When C to F of the switch are set memory areas cannot be allocated Set one of 0 to B 44 RENESAS Installing the PC Interface Board WARNING Always switch OFF the host computer and peripheral devices connected to the host computer before installing the PC interface board Failure to do
283. se of the diagnostic program modify the Diagnostic Program resource information in the way shown below The dialog box for confirming the initiation of the diagnostic program will not be displayed on the initiation of the HDI Diagnostic Program N 3 8 Uninstallation 3 8 1 Uninstalling Software This section describes the procedure for uninstalling software Be sure to terminate all executing applications before uninstalling software Select Settings Control Panel from the Start menu Double click the Add Remove Programs icon Select SH7729R E8000S Emulator Software from the list of applications installed on the tabbed page Install Uninstall and click the Add Remove button Uninstall according to the directions on the screen The setup program is executed again to allow the modification correction or removal of the installed applications Select removal to uninstall applications Note Shared files may be detected during uninstallation Do not remove shared files if they might be used by other HDIs When Windows NT 4 0 is used you might be asked whether you want to remove information registered in the driver s registry Do not remove information registered in the registry if it might be used by other HDIs If other HDIs will no longer start up because of uninstallation reinstall the other HDIs 3 8 2 Uninstalling the Acrobat Reader Only uninstall the Acrobat Reader if it is necessary Click Settings
284. section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications and set the operating system environment and install the ISA bus interface board e Install the provided software Select ISA Driver as the component Note An ISA driver to run under Windows Me is not available When Using the LAN Adapter e Install the provided software Select E8000 LAN Driver as the component e Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on e Select SH7729R E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs to start the LAN Adapter Configuration e Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration e Turn the LAN adapter off and connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on Then LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed Note When using a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host computer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration 3 4 2 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows NT 4 0 When Using the PCI Interface Board e Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch e Install the PCI interface board into the host computer e Turn on the host computer Log on as Administrator e Install the provided software S
285. ser program when the NMI signal is high nmi hi To break the user program when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt irlopt gt Specifies IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 signal conditions This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 signal conditions irl lt bit specification gt Specify each bit as follows To specify bits IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x X x xX Value to be specified Specify O low level or 1 high level for x Let ties Me OT Cal 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRL IRQ number specifies the exclusion of the IRL or IRQ state at that bit s position from the tested condition lt breqopt gt Specifies BREQ signal conditions This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify BREQ signal conditions breq lt countopt gt Specifies the pass count that satisfies the break condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify pass count count lt value gt Any value from 1 to H FFFF can be specified as lt value gt lt delayopt gt Specifies the number of bus cycles to be executed after the break condition is satisfied This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b and lt channel_number gt is 7 To specify the number of bus cycles to be executed delay lt value gt Any value from 1 to H 7FFF can be specified as lt value gt 269 RENESAS Description Setting
286. ser system not ready The message USER SYSTEM NOT READY was received from the emulator Function information not found The function information that was entered in the Input Function Range dialog box matches no function Input a correct function name 335 RENESAS Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages cont Error Message function not available Description and Solution The requested function is not available now Currently not available Command currently not available Not support The requested function is not supported Can t add this item because there is not enough Auto update memory resource The number of Auto update Memory settings reached the maximum eight points and the new item cannot be added Change or cancel items that have already been set The AUM setting range is in the 32 byte boundary The address for an Auto update Memory item was set so that the range runs the 32 byte boundary An address range cannot run across a 32 byte boundary Cannot find flash memory tool file Files for the writing or erasing module cannot be found Cannot load flash memory tool file Files for the writing or erasing module cannot be read correctly Erasing flash memory time out A timeout occurred while erasing the flash memory The contents of the flash memory were not erased correctly Check that the erasing module which has been created is valid and that the flash memory is operating
287. set vector Inputs the RESETP signal to the MPU then execute the user program from the reset vector Click the Reset Go button Select Reset Go from the Run menu Execution from a specified address Executes the user program from the specified address Place the mouse cursor on the Source window Then click the Go To Cursor button or select Go To Cursor from the Run menu Specify a start address for the Program Counter in the Run dialog box then click the Go PC button Execution to a specified address Specifies the end address and executes the user program up to that address Specify a start address for the Program Counter in the Run dialog box specify an end address for Stop At in the Run dialog box then click the Go PC button More than one address can be specified as an end address Any of the various modes of emulation listed in table 5 19 can be specified by selecting Emulation mode from the General page of the Configuration dialog box RENESAS 129 Table 5 19 Emulation Modes Emulation Mode Cycle reset mode Description Emulation mode Seiting The emulator periodically inputs the RESETP signal to the MPU during realtime emulation and execution from the reset state is thus periodically repeated When the RESETP signal is input to the MPU a low level pulse is concurrently output on the trigger output probe This function is useful for observin
288. sions for Mount Pad Top View Observe the restrictions on the locations of parts shown in figure B 2 within the range of the external frame of the evaluation chip board as shown in figure B 1 350 RENESAS lt _____ Evaluation chip board o HS7729REBH81H S J User system socket NQPACK208SD ysersystem poard manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation Unit mm Tolerance 0 1 mm unless otherwise specified Figure B 2 Restrictions on Parts Location 351 RENESAS B 2 Recommended Dimensions for the User System Connector HS7706EBH81H A WARNING The screw holes for fastening this evaluation chip board are connected to the GND of the user system board When designing the user system board check that the spacers nuts and washers do not touch any part of the pattern other than GND or any parts on the user system Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and damage the user system or emulator Also the USER PROGRAM will be LOST Bottom view of HS7706EBH81H Figure B 3 shows the recommended dimensions for the mount pad footprint of the 176 pin QFP FP 176 IC socket NQPACK176SD manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation and the positions of the holes for fastening the evaluation chip board The holes for fastening the evaluation chip board are connected to GND of the user system board When the grounded pattern runs to the screw hole positions the ground line is reinforced and sta
289. snevscesusvessetsessocesebovecesde ale eeees sua E EE EEEREN AE in 355 Figure C 2 Order of Tightening the Screws Top View of the HS7729REBH81H Board 357 Figure C 3 Connecting the HS7729REBH81H Board to the User System eects 358 Figure C 4 Connecting the Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 361 Figure C5 Installing the MPU sce rper en epn e e enee E arei edben db EE Sa E EES HES RRS Eos 363 xii RENESAS Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Environmental Condit oS sso renees ee fecces snsaveeesapevecedasedionse Mesevsevtgeencopeteckes 5 Operating Environment ssa n e a E R E a E EE 6 Emulator Station Components HS8000EST11H ssesesseesseeseersesssesesesrssrssressrrssees 7 Device Control Board Components 0000 0 cece eecesecesecseecneecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseenseseaees 8 Evaluation Chip Board Components for the SH7729R oo eee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesseenees 8 Evaluation Chip Board Components for the SH7706 e cece eeeeeeeeeceseceseeeseeenes 9 Optional Component Specifications 2 0 0 0 eee cee cseese
290. so the result is a break before execution A number of passes can be specified as a break condition and a break will then occur when the breakpoint has been passed the specified number of times It is possible to specify up to 255 software breakpoints Up to 65 535 passes can be specified for each software breakpoint User program Program flow lt A break occurs after the replaced instruction at address H 1000 is executed Mets oe ee Figure 5 14 Example of a Software Break Instruction When memory is accessed in trace halt mode the contents at the specified address are replaced with a break instruction 138 RENESAS Setting a Software Break Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window and click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear Break Condition B Condition C Condition U Point Sequence Condition 4 Break point H QOQOO06S DUT IDOL Physical Sia Ce es Reset All Close Cancel Apply Figure 5 15 Point Page Break Dialog Box Table 5 25 Point Page Options Option Description Break point Displays the specified pass point addresses The pass point and reset point address settings are displayed as follows lt pass point address gt lt specified number gt lt number of passes gt lt address space gt lt number of passes gt indicates the number of times the breakpoint was passed before
291. software break count has been specified the program will be halted temporarily When the auto update memory display is updated while the program is halted the AUM window may not be displayed correctly When a software break condition has been specified error message EMULATOR BUSY may be displayed Double float format is not supported 255 RENESAS 5 14 Controlling and Checking the State of the MPU The emulator can select the clock to input to the MPU check the operation power supply and clock state of the user system The functions are useful when debugging the user system hardware 5 14 1 Selecting Clock for the MPU This emulator supports three types of clock for the MPU external clock input from the user system hereinafter referred to as subclock a crystal oscillator attached on the evaluation chip board and the emulator internal clock 33 3 MHz For details on selecting clock refer to section 6 2 7 CLOCK and section 3 3 4 Selecting the Clock When selecting a clock refer to the following When a clock is selected the emulator resets the MPU This initializes the registers so be careful To select the user clock the user clock must be input Otherwise an error message will be displayed and the emulator internal clock will be selected When the emulator system program is started the emulator inputs a clock to the MPU in the following order e When external clock is input from the user system the user sys
292. specified in subroutine time measurement modes and 2 and up to four subroutines can be specified in subroutine time measurement mode 3 Cancellation This command clears the condition to measure the subroutine performance When the user specifies a channel number the emulator clears the specified channel number When the user does not specify any channel number all of the performance conditions are cleared Display This command displays the result of measuring the subroutine performance The following shows the display format 1 306 To display an execution time ratio for the program execution state gt PA GRAPH NO NAME MODE RATE 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1 SUBA HI D 10 0 1 2 SUBB 12 D 20 0 aana 3 SUBC B D 30 0 oeno 4 5 6 7 8 a b c d e TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 00M 10S 000020US 250NS_ f a Channel number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Measurement mode I1 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 I2 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 I3 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 d Displays the execution time ratio numerically e Displays the execution time ratio as a graph Total execution time Hours H minutes M seconds S microseconds US and nanoseconds NS RENESAS 2 To display subroutine address list gt PA ADDRESS NO NAME MODE ADDRESS 1 SUBA Il 00000100 00001FF0 D xxxxH xxM xxS xxxxxxUS D nnnnnn a b
293. ssed the pass points in the order of H c010000 and H c0200000 and the analysis for the pass sequence is reset when the user program has passed the virtual address H c0300000 ASID value H fe BSS H c0100000 H c0200000 SPACE PHYSICAL RESET H c0300000 SPACE VIRTUAL asid H fe To set a software sequential breakpoint in which user program execution stops when the user program has passed the pass points in the order of H c010000 H c0200000 and H c0300000 BSS H c0100000 H c0200000 H c0300000 Enables software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSE ENABLE Disables software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSE DISABLE Clears software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSC Notes While the user program is being executed if the user executes commands that refer to memory and the emulator stops the execution of user program due to satisfaction of software sequential breakpoints the user will not be able to execute this command In this case the emulator will display error message EMULATOR BUSY so the user must enter the command again When the user sets pass points or a reset point by this command the emulator stops the user program every time a software sequential breakpoint is passed and analyzes the pass order Therefore the emulator cannot execute the user program in realtime When the emulator executes the user program from the instruction of the address set by this command the user can
294. sses a Window name and display format b Channel numbers of Performance Analysis that are used c Display format d Results Table 5 86 Display Format of Results When Address is Selected Item Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 CONDITION Subroutine start address and end address for 11 12 Timeout value and count setting value only when the respective conditions are set in l1 or 12 Start address range and end address range for 13 TOTAL RUN TIME Total period of execution H hours M minutes S seconds US microseconds NS nanoseconds 234 RENESAS Count Select Count to produce the information on the run times and number of passes in the user program in numerical form shown in figure 5 81 Performance Analysis Count of x Execution time and execution count in numerical values MODE RATE RUN TIME E COUNT 11 D 3 6 D GG66H 66M GOS 459865US 926NS D 61984 I2 D 24 1 D GG66H 66M 63S 636769US 266NS D 64316 MAX D G666H GOH BOS 6667 O3US 52 ONS MIN D 6666H 66M GOS 660611US 22 ONS AVE D G6606H GOM GAS 6667 O3US 186NS 13 D 84 6 D GG66H 66M 10S 535551US 766NS D 21548 TOTAL RUN TIME D 6666H 66M 12S 535658US 466NS Figure 5 82 Performance Analysis Window R
295. steps through assembly statements by each instruction For a line that calls a function execution stops at the first line of the called function Step Over Steps through the statements in a function by each line or steps through assembly statements by each instruction For a line that calls a function the whole of the called function is executed in a single step Step Out Steps out of a function and stops at the next line that calls the function in the program Step Steps the specified counts repeatedly at a specified rate 92 RENESAS Before executing program stepping confirm that the program is executed up to the sort function line at address H 00003036 PAI TUTORIAL c Bel Line Address Label Source 90003000 _Main void main void long a l0 min max long j int i a 000032002 fori i 0 i lt l0 it 0000200a j randi 00003012 ifij lt Oji 00003016 j j 0000301la ali 0000303e 00003042 Figure 4 22 Source Window Step Execution 93 RENESAS 4 11 1 Executing Step In Command The Step In command steps into the called function and stops at the first line of the function e To step into the sort function select Step In from the Run menu or click the Step button in the toolbar PA TUTORIAL c BE E Line Address Label Source 00003036 Break sortia 0000303e min a 0 00003042 max al9 000032046 min 0 000030 4a max O ooo00304e
296. sults When Count is Selected eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 235 Display Format of Results When Graph is Selected eee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 236 System Status Window Configuration cece cece csecseecreeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseensees 238 Session Sheet Configuration n sisse iheir pe ieri diie eee 238 Platform Sheet Configuration esesssesseeseseesseesseessressreeerersseerserssressresseesseseseseet 239 Memory Sheet Configuration eee s i S R 239 Events Sheet Configuration ccc ceeececssecesccecsseceeceecsseceeececeaeceeaeecsaeeeeeeecnaeesenters 240 Configuration Items of the Memory Mapping Dialog BOX ieee eee eee 242 Configuration Items of the Edit Memory Mapping Dialog Box 0 ee 243 Settings for Memory Type Available in the Setting Combo Box 243 Address Translation Tables ccceecescesecssecseecneeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeenseceseesaecsaessaesaaeeas 246 XV RENESAS Table 5 98 Settings for Memory Type Available in the Setting Combo Box ee 247 Table 5 99 Stack Trace Window Options 0 scceeceesseceeeceenseceeeeecneeceeeeeneeceeeeenaecereeeaaeesees 249 Table 5 100 Options in the Pop up Menu eee ceecesecsecnsecneecseecseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeseenaes 249 Table 5 101 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Options 0 ee eee ceeecesecese cess ceeeeeeeneeeeeees 250 Table 5 102 Dialog Boxes for Setting Auto Update Memory Items eee eset eee eeee 251 Table 5 103 Address Mask Specification 0 0 0 ce
297. t is the pointer to the first instruction End is the pointer to the last instruction The input area must always be set The default values are D 512 for Start and D 255 for End Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace Filter dialog box closes and the search results are displayed in the Trace window The trace search conditions that can be specified and the corresponding pages in the Trace Filter dialog box are shown in table 5 74 210 RENESAS Table 5 74 Trace Search Conditions and Pages in the Trace Filter Dialog Box 1 External Bus Trace Page Condition Description General Sets trace search range Address Address bus Searches for records in which the value on the address bus matches the specified condition Data Data bus Searches for records in which the value on the data bus matches the specified condition Bus State Bus state Searches for records in which RD or RDWR signal matches the specified condition Probe External probe Searches for records in which the external probe signal levels match the specified condition Interrupt External interrupt Searches for records in which the NMI RESETP IRLO to IRL3 IRQ4 or IRQ5 signal levels match the specified condition Time Time stamp Searches for records in which the time stamp matches the specified condition time or range 2 AUD Bus Trace Page Condition
298. t at the same time while the user program is being executed In this case the emulator will display error message EMULATOR BUSY so the user must enter the command again e When the user modifies memory contents by loading user program the emulator will clear breakpoints e When the user executes step the execution does not break at software breakpoints and the emulator will not increment the pass count e When the emulator executes the instructions set by this command the user cannot use Break Condition U2 Therefore the user must not set a software breakpoint to the instruction that satisfies Break Condition U2 e When the user sets a software breakpoint in a slot instruction in a delay branch instruction the emulator will stop the user program execution however the PC value will be incorrect The user must not set a software breakpoint to a slot instruction in a delay branch instruction e When the user specifies physical the emulator sets breakpoints to physical addresses When the user executes the GO command the emulator first disables the MMU in the MPU and then sets software breakpoints and returns the MMU to the original state e When the user specifies virtual the emulator sets software breakpoints to virtual addresses The emulator first disables the MMU in the MPU when the user executes the GO command after the emulator sets software breakpoints the emulator restores the MMU to the original state When the user specifies an A
299. t channel_number gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Sets a hardware break condition type a b c Break Condition A B C lt channel_number gt Numeric or Sets 1 to 8 p or r When setting a break condition string channel number specify 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 When setting a hardware sequential break by the CSQ command specify p orr p Sequential point r Reset point lt mode gt Keyword Sets whether to enable or disable break conditions enable Enables break conditions disable Disables break conditions 267 RENESAS Description of the bcs command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions Parameter lt addropt gt Description Specifies address condition To specify an address break condition address lt address gt not vpmap To specify an address range break condition address lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt not vpmap To mask address address mask lt maskdata gt not vpmap lt address gt Address numeric lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Specifies mask value numeric Add not to specify an address or range outside which the user program should break However do not add not when specifying c for lt type gt Add vpmap to the specification to break the user program at the address translated by the VP_MAP table If VP_MAP is disabled or by default the physical address will
300. t computer Hardware will be acknowledged and driver installation will start automatically Select Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended for driver installation and select Specify a location for the location Specify lt Drive gt DRIVERS PCI 2000 for the location lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive Check that E6000 PCI Card has been detected and complete driver installation When Using the PC Interface Card Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select PC Card Driver PCMCIA as the component Install the PC interface card into the host computer Hardware will be acknowledged and driver installation will start automatically Select Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended for driver installation and select Specify a location for the location Specify lt Drive gt DRIVERS PCMCIA 2000 for the location lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive Check that E8000 E6000 PC Card has been detected and complete driver installation When Using the LAN Adapter Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select E8000 LAN Driver as the component Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn on the LAN adapter Select SH7729R E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs and start the LAN Adapter Configuration Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration Turn off the LAN adapter and connect the LAN adapter to the
301. t have been set When the user does not specify the channel number the emulator enables or disables all of the specified break conditions When the user specifies a hardware sequential break the user cannot specify a channel number Examples 1 To set the following conditions for channel 2 of Break Condition A Address condition An address bus value from H 10027C to H 100304 Read write cycle condition Write cycle only BCS A CHANNEL 2 ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE 270 RENESAS 2 To set the following conditions for channel 4 of Break Condition B Data condition Data bus value of H 4750 Read write cycle condition Read cycle only BCS B CHANNEL 4 DATAHI H 4750 DIRECTION READ 3 To set the following conditions for channel 5 of Break Condition A Address condition An address bus value other than H 10027C External probe condition PROBE4 low PROBE3 high PROBE2 low PROBE high BCS A CHANNEL 5 ADDRESS H 10027C NOT PRB 0101 4 To set the following conditions for channel 7 of Break Condition B NMI signal condition NMI low and BREQ signal condition BCS B CHANNEL 7 NMI LOW BREQ 5 To set the following conditions for channel 1 of Break Condition B Address condition Mask specification at address bus value H 1000 BCS B CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS MASK H 1000 6 To set the following conditions for channel 6 of Break Condition B Address bus value Except the range from H 100000 to H 1001
302. target network and turn on the LAN adapter Then LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed 41 RENESAS Note When using a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host computer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications Table 3 1 lists the ISA bus PC interface board specifications For details on the PCI bus and PCMCIA bus interface boards refer to their description notes Table 3 1 PC Interface Board Specifications Item Specifications Host computer that canbe used ISA bus specifications PC or compatible machine System bus ISA bus specifications Memory area 16 kbytes Memory area setting Can be set at every 16 kbytes in the range from H C0000 to H EFFFF with a switch 42 RENESAS Switch Settings of the PC Interface Board Memory Area Setting The PC interface board uses a 16 kbyte memory area on the host computer The memory area to be used must be allocated to the memory area on the host computer with a switch on the PC interface board Any 16 kbytes in the range of H C0000 to H EFFFF can be allocated figure 3 11 Addresses to be allocated must not overlap the memory addresses of other boards An overlap will cau
303. tem clock is selected e When a crystal oscillator is attached on the evaluation chip board crystal oscillation clock will be selected e Emulator internal clock 33 3 MHz The frequency of the emulator internal clock selected is 33 3 MHz in Clock Mode 0 and 8 3 MHz in Clock Mode 1 5 14 2 Checking the I O Signals The emulator checks whether the connection with the user system is correct when the emulator is initiated Through this check abnormal operations such as short circuits of the user system interface signals can be detected The same operation as above can be done with the CHECK command For details on the CHECK command refer to section 6 2 6 CHECK command 256 RENESAS 5 14 3 Checking the Power Supply and Clock State of the User System The emulator monitors the power supply and the clock state of the user system When the MPU clock is selected by setting USER in the CLOCK command the next operation will be carried out when the user system power is turned off or the clock is stopped according to the emulator state Notes 1 When the user system power is turned off the turn off of the user system power will be detected before the clock will stop V lt Q is lower than 2 65 V 2 The meaning of clock will stop above is the stop of the clock while the user system power is still turned on During User Program Execution e When user system power is turned off V lt Q has become lower than 2 65 V VCC Down is d
304. the General page Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Find from the menu Click Find Next in the pop up menu of the Trace window to jump to the next trace information item that satisfies the specified conditions Select the General page then select the Search from top check box to search from the start of the trace information Figure 5 68 Trace Find Dialog Box General Page 215 RENESAS 5 7 Measurement of Execution Time 5 7 1 Measuring Execution Time to a Break or Termination This function provides a way of measuring the total time taken to execute the user program The total execution time is the total time with the user program in execution from the start of execution until the program stops due to the satisfaction of a break condition The resulting measurement is displayed next to Run Time Count of the System Status window System Status Oo O x A Item Selected I O Port H UDI JTAG Clock User system MD5 0 Clock source Run status Cause of last break Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Condition B Sequential Interval Timer counter Bus timeout Multi break PREL RESETP signal Status CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 CE14a WE 2 3 5SMHz O3f Emulator Clock 8 3MHz Break BREAKPOINT D OOOOH 00M 008 00962008S 000NS Not used Not used 52us 100us Disabled Enabled Figure 5 69 System Status Window
305. the Halt button on the toolbar is pressed Forced break due to writing to a write protected area This kind of break occurs when the current user program attempts to write to an area of the emulation memory that has the write protected attribute Break due to trace buffer overflow This break occurs when the trace buffer in the emulator overflows during trace acquisition Timeout break A timeout break occurs when the execution time exceeds the timeout condition specified for Performance Analysis 1 137 RENESAS Notes 1 In the Enable column of the Breakpoints window O is displayed when the corresponding Break Condition A B C or U is enabled Nothing is displayed when the Break Condition is disabled When a breakpoint is specified at an address that has also been specified as the address bus condition for Break Condition A B C or U is displayed instead of O 2 During execution of the user program Go to Source item of the pop up menu in the Breakpoints window cannot be used to move from the display of a breakpoint to the corresponding line of source code or address in the Source or Disassemble window 5 5 1 Software Break Overview Any content at the specified address is replaced by a break instruction a dedicated instruction for use with the emulator Execution of the user program stops when the break instruction is executed The instruction that had been at the address is not executed
306. the external bus trace information Make the settings correctly then click the Next button CPU Operating Mode Memory Type NORMAL 7 NORMAL Nonma o Nonma o NORMAL nonmas O Nonm O i Cancel Help Figure 5 9 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Memory Type Page 124 RENESAS Table 5 15 Memory Type Page Option Description CSO Specifies the memory type of AREAO CSO area as NORMAL initial value or BURST ROM CS1 Fixed to NORMAL CS2 Specifies the memory type of AREA2 CS2 area as NORMAL initial value SDRAM or BURST ROM CS3 Specifies the memory type of AREA3 CS3 area SDRAM type and SDRAM bus width as NORMAL initial value SDRAM 8 M x 16 bits SDRAM 1 M x 16 bits 512 k x 32 bits SDRAM Other or BURST ROM CS4 Fixed to NORMAL CS5 Specifies the memory type of AREA5 CS5 area as NORMAL initial value BURST ROM or PCMCIA CS6 Specifies the memory type of AREA6 CS6 area as NORMAL initial value BURST ROM or PCMCIA lt x Back Returns to the MD Pin page Next gt Goes to the next page I O Port Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings Note Set each option correctly for an external trace acquisition of the CS2 or CS3 area When SDRAM is selected in the CS2 option it is also selected in the CS3 option In this case the contents of the CS3 option are applied to the SDRAM type in the CS2 option The bus widths of con
307. the multibreak function the emulator can simultaneously stop the execution of user programs in other emulators by using external probe 1 mb enable Enables multibreak mb disable Disables multibreak initial value lt reset_signal gt Keyword The user must enable or disable RESETP power on reset signal input res enable Enabled initial value res disable Disabled lt busrequest gt Keyword Enables or disables the input of the bus mastership request signal breq enable Enabled initial value breq disable Disabled lt wait_signal gt Keyword Enables or disables the input of WAIT signal wait enable Enabled initial value wait disable Disabled lt nmi_signal gt Keyword Enables or disables the NMI signal input nmi enable Enabled initial value nmi disable Disabled 294 RENESAS Parameter Type Description lt trigger_bcb gt Keyword Specifies the pulse output mode when the emulator satisfies Break Condition B or Trace Condition B trgb 1 trgb 2 trgb 3 trgb 4 trgb 5 trgb 6 trgb 7 or trgb 8 When the user specifies this keyword the emulator will output pulse when the emulator satisfies a channel condition set to Break Condition B or Trace Condition B trgb all When the user specifies this keyword the emulator will output pulse when the emulator satisfies a channel condition set to Break Condition B and Trace Condition B trgb disable The emulator stops the execution of user pro
308. the power specifications and do not apply an incorrect power voltage Use only the provided AC power cable Use only the specified type of fuse RENESAS Warnings on Emulator Usage Warnings described below apply as long as you use this emulator Be sure to read and understand the warnings below before using this emulator Note that these are the main warnings not the complete list Vi A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST RENESAS CAUTION Place the emulator station and EV chip board so that the trace cables are not bent or twisted A bent or twisted cable will impose stress on the user interface leading to connection or contact failure Make sure that the emulator station is placed in a secure position so that it does not move during use nor impose stress on the user interface RENESAS VII CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if n
309. the type of the clock signal that was set When the user selects user for the clock signal but the user system clock is not input from the user system the emulator will generate an error and select the clock in the emulator When the user turns on the emulator the emulator will check whether the user system clock user evaluation chip board crystal oscillator xtal and emulator internal clock signal are supplied correctly When the clock mode is set to 0 the 33 MHz 33 emulator internal clock is selected and when the clock mode is 1 the 8 MHz 8 emulator internal clock is selected When CKIO is entered the emulator enters the CKIO mode and the clock setting cannot be changed Examples 1 To select the user system clock signal CK USER 2 To display the selected clock signal CK The display format is as follows gt CK Clock Emulator Clock xx x MHz 290 RENESAS 3 To display the CKIO clock input clock mode 7 CK The display format is as follows gt CK Clock CKIO Notes When the user is selecting user and the emulator generates the following error the emulator system program will not run correctly and the emulator will display error message USER SYSTEM NOT READY when the user starts the HDI In this case the user must close the HDI and start it again e When user was selected and the user is using the user system clock but the user system clock was cut off V Q was supplied correctly 291 RENESAS
310. ther than NORMAL in Memory page CS3 PTK 1 is fixed to CS3 CS4 PTK 2 Specifies which pin is to be used CS4 or PTK 2 Initial value CS4 CS5 CE1A PTK 3 Specifies which pin is to be used CS5 CE1A or PTK 3 Initial value CS5 CE1A When CS5 is specified as other than NORMAL in Memory page CS5 CE1A PTK 3 is fixed to CS5 CE1A CS6 CE1B PTC 7 Specifies which pin is to be used CS6 CE1B or PTC 7 Initial value 5 CS6 CE1B When CS6 is specified as other than NORMAL in Memory page CS6 CE1B PTC 7 is fixed to CS6 CE1B WE 2 3 PTK 6 7 Specifies which pin is to be used WE 2 3 or PTK 6 Initial value WE 2 3 D31 D16 Data Bus D31 D16 1 0 Port Specifies whether to use D31 to D16 pins as a data bus or I O pins Select D31 to D16 Data Bus when using the D31 to D16 pins as a data bus Initial value D31 to D16 Data Bus lt Back Returns to the Memory Type page Next gt Goes to the next page HDI JTAG Clock Cancel Notes 1 NO ge Cancels changes made for the settings For the SH7706 the PTC 3 pin is used instead of the PTK 0 pin For the SH7706 the PTC 4 pin is used instead of the PTK 1 pin For the SH7706 the PTC 5 pin is used instead of the PTK 2 pin For the SH7706 the PTC 6 pin is used instead of the PTK 3 pin Only available for the SH7706 For the SH7706 the PTC 1 2 pin is used instead of the PTK 6 7 pin When the
311. time 0 0 1 0 count D 1 2 mode time2 name sort start H 68 end H 128 3 mode time3 name change start H 68 to H 128 end H 12a to H 18a 4 By Performance3 5 Empty 6 Empty 7 Empty 8 Empty Edit Reset Reset All Figure 5 74 Performance Analysis Dialog Box Select 1 from the Condition list then click the Edit button The Performance 1 dialog box will be displayed Set the conditions for measuring performance then click the OK button 225 RENESAS The individual pages of the Performance 1 to 8 dialog box are explained in table 5 79 Table 5 79 Pages of the Performance 1 to 8 Dialog Box Page General Description Sets the measurement mode Address Sets conditions for the address range Time Out Sets a timeout value When the user program is running in the address range specified by the user the emulator will compare the measured time with the timeout time specified by the user When timeout value setting lt measured time the user program emulation will break the timeout break function While timeout value setting gt measured time the emulator will measure the user program s execution time Count Sets a maximum number of passes Note These settings are only available in Performance Analysis 1 226 RENESAS Each page is described in detail below a General page Use this page to set the measurement mode General Address Time Out Count
312. time the lt end address gt of the specified address range is passed The execution times of instructions at addresses outside the range that are called from within the specified range are not included in the results of measurement Set the conditions in the Performance 1 to 8 dialog box Set the timeout value and maximum number of passes as the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 2 Measurement is executed in the same way as in mode 1 above except that the execution times of instructions at addresses outside the range that are called from within the specified range are included in the results of measurement The emulator will also measure the maximum minimum execution times over the specified range Set the timeout value and maximum number of passes as the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 220 Measurement starts at the lt start address range gt and halts when it reaches the lt end address range gt The execution count is incremented every time the specified lt end address range gt is passed RENESAS e Example of subroutine time measurement mode 1 An example of subroutine time measurement mode will be described below Here the start address is assumed to be H 1000 and the end address to be H 1 FFF When the user program is running the emulator will measure the execution time of the user program in the address range from H 1000 to H 1F
313. tion count is specified emulator firmware stops the program for about 100 ms every time the program passes the address set as a break condition so that it can update its count of passes As a result the program does not operate in realtime When the program passes such an address the emulator executes the instruction at the address as a single step then returns to normal program execution Break Condition U2 becomes invalid during this single step execution 2 Use software breakpoints for the Stop At settings allowed in the Run Program dialog box Therefore when 255 software breakpoints have been set any further specification made by using the Stop At item of Run Program dialog box is invalid Ensure that the total number of software breakpoints and settings made by using the Stop At item of the Run Program dialog box is 255 or less 3 When a disabled breakpoint address is specified as a Stop At item in the Run Program dialog box the breakpoint becomes enabled after the first time that execution subsequently stops at that address 4 When the content of a software breakpoint address is modified during execution of the user program the following message will be displayed after execution stops BREAKPOINT IS DELETED A xxxxxxxx When the above message is displayed use the Delete All or Disable button in the Breakpoints window to cancel all software breakpoint settings 5 If itis not possible to correctly set a breakpo
314. tion to be modified from the Condition list then clicking the Edit button displays the Condition A B dialog box so that the condition can be modified Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Condition list Duplicate Duplicates the condition selected in the Condition list V Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clicking this button adds that condition to the next empty spot in Nos 1 to 7 of the Sequence list VR Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clicking this button places that condition next to Reset in the Sequence list No Numerical values indicate the sequential point number Reset indicates the reset point Sequence Displays a list of sequential conditions that have been specified Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Sequence list The status of hardware break condition satisfaction before the actual hardware break occurs will be displayed on the status bar during program execution in the following format Condition Aor B Seq lt Number of passes specified number gt When no condition has been specified the status of hardware break conditions is displayed from Condition B to Condition A rather than in the format shown above Figure 5 37 shows an example of the display A hardware sequential break condition has been specified with Nos 1 to 3 of Break Condition A and No 1 has been satisfied A hardware sequential break condition has also been specified w
315. to set that condition as a hardware break condition To modify a hardware break condition after it has been created click its entry in the Entry List then click the Edit button to open the Condition A B dialog box Modify the condition then click the OK button To create a new hardware break click the New button to open the Condition A B dialog box Specify a condition then click the OK button Any entry in the history of hardware break condition settings displayed in the Condition list on the History page can be registered in the Condition list on the Entry List page Click the entry to select the condition from the Condition list on the History page then click the Entry button After the condition has been registered in the Condition list on the Entry List page it is deleted from the Condition list on the History page To delete a hardware break condition that has been created click the condition s entry to select it from the Condition list box then click the Delete button To duplicate a hardware break condition that has been created click the condition s entry to select it from the Condition list box then click the Duplicate button 163 RENESAS 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break Overview A hardware sequential break occurs after the selected of channels of a hardware break condition have been satisfied in a specified order This function uses Break Condition A or B a sequence of up to
316. to the user system and forced the termination of execution STOP ADDRESS The program has terminated at the cursor position after execution of the Go to Cursor menu item SUBROUTINE TIMEOUT The timeout condition specified in Performance Analysis 1 has been satisfied SUBROUTINE COUNT OVERFLOW The maximum number of passes condition specified in Performance Analysis 1 has been satisfied TRACE BUFFER OVERFLOW The break is due to a trace buffer overflow WRITE PROTECT Execution of the program was terminated because of an attempt to write to a write protected area or internal ROM area 133 RENESAS Operating Status Display While the user program is in execution the MPU s operating status is monitored and displayed on the HDI window s status bar This function allows the user to observe the progress of the program The display is only updated when the status changes Table 5 22 is a list of the operating status messages Table 5 22 Operating Status Display Display AB XXXXXXXX Meaning Address bus value during the execution RESETP The MPU has been reset The RESETP signal is low RESETM The MPU has been reset The RESETM signal is low Running Execution of the user program has been initiated This message is displayed once the execution has been started or restarted Note that this message is deleted when AB Xxxxxxxx Starts to be displayed Sleep The MPU is in its sleep mode
317. tor in clock mode 7 with no input on CKIO RUN TIME OVERFLOW Indicated with the result of performance analysis when the timeout or excessive number specification is satisfied in Performance Analysis 1 mode DOUBLE DEFINITION Software break or software sequential break is specified for the same address INVALID ADDRESS An illegal address was specified 333 RENESAS 7 2 HDI Error Messages Related to the Emulator Error messages that occur in HDI processing are also displayed in error message dialog boxes Tables 7 2 lists these error messages Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages Error Message Can not set target configuration Execution mode option Description and Solution A mode not supported by the emulator was selected as the emulation mode in the Configuration dialog box General page Can not set target configuration Clock mode option An emulator clock outside the range specified in the current clock mode was input Check the clock mode settings Addresses are few Too few points have been specified for a software sequential break Specify at least two addresses Can not set the minimum time Since the performance information has already been acquired the minimum time interval cannot be changed Change the performance information after reinitialization Command not ready The function that was entered for execution is not available now Internal I O Area Loading of
318. translated when this option is not set or when VP_MAP is invalid Start Sets the start of the range of address bus values as a number or a symbol End When Range is selected sets the end of the range of address bus values as a number or a symbol Outside Range The condition is satisfied at any address that is not in the range above Start or an address selected by Mask or in the range set as Start End Non user mask Selects no mask condition User mask Sets mask conditions Mask Set required values for bits and select bits to be masked after selecting Address and User mask The Mask setting is disabled if Range is selected as the type of address condition The Range condition will be satisfied or not satisfied regardless of any values set as part of the mask 153 RENESAS b Data Page Use this page to specify a data bus condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay m Data T Don t Care Data Hee T Outside Range Figure 5 25 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Data Page Table 5 34 Data Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no data condition Data Specifies numerical value s or masked values for D31 to DO data bus The condition will be satisfied regardless of any values set as part of the mask Outside Range Sets the condition as any value other than those selected by Data The valid bus
319. tual Sets a pass point as a virtual address ASID Sets an ASID value for a pass point that is set as a virtual address This setting is only enabled when the Virtual radio button is selected Reset Address Sets the reset point as a numerical or symbolic value A reset Point group point need not be set box Normal Address translation is according to the current state of the emulator state When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the address is within the table s range the address is translated according to the VP_MAP table When the address is outside the table s range the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the command is input When the VP_MAP table is disabled the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the command is input Physical Sets a reset point as a physical address Virtual Sets a reset point as a virtual address ASID Sets an ASID value for when a reset point is set as a virtual address This setting is only enabled when the Virtual radio button is selected When a software sequential break is placed the instruction at the specified address is replaced It is only possible to set a software breakpoint in the RAM area including the emulation memory However it is not possible to set a software breakpoint at an address that satisfies any of these conditions e The address holds H 0000 e The address is used as part of a software sequential breakpo
320. ual addresses are used Drivers when memory is accessed Normal When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the address is within the table s range the address is translated according to the VP_MAP table In all other cases address translation is according to the MMU s state Initial value Physical Specifies physical addresses Virtual Specifies virtual addresses ASID Sets an ASID value when virtual addresses are set enabled when the Virtual radio button is selected Opens the Driver Details dialog box RENESAS 109 Execution Mode1 Page Use this page to set the unit of time for counting by the execution time measurement counter bus timeout detection period multibreak mode and whether or not the input of the RESETP BREQ WAIT and NMI signals is enabled Figure 5 3 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode1 Page 110 RENESAS Table 5 5 Execution Model Page Option The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution Description Sets the minimum time resolution of the counter for measuring execution time and performance of the emulator station 20 ns Measures time in minimum time of 20 ns 1 6 us Measures time in minimum time of 1 627604167 us 614 4 kHz 52 us Measures time in minimum time of 52 0833333 us 19 2 kHz Initial value Bus timeout Sets the bus timeout detection period 100 us in units of approximately 100 us Initial
321. uals Japanese HS7729RTM81Hu Descriptive notes on the PDF documents Dal pdf 71 diagnostic program for the in Japanese SH7729R E8000S emulator Manuals English HS6400DIIW5SE pdf x4 Hitachi Debugging Interface user s manual PDF documents in English Manuals English HS7729REBH81HE SH7729R E8000S emulator PDF documents pdf user s manual in English Manuals English HS7729RTM81HE Descriptive notes on the PDF documents Wa pdf 4 diagnostic program for the in English SH7729R E8000S emulator Pdf_read Japanese Ar500jpn exe Acrobat Reader 5 0 installer Japanese version Pdf_read English Ar500enu exe Acrobat Reader 5 0 installer RENESAS English version 19 Notes 1 Installed on your host computer by the installer 2 This is the Japanese version of the manual It cannot be installed by the English language version of the installer 3 indicates a manual revision 4 This is the English version of the manual It cannot be installed by the Japanese language version of the installer 5 Use the Acrobat Reader to see PDF documents 2 3 System Configuration The emulator must be connected to a host computer via the selected PC interface board 2 3 1 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board The emulator can be connected to a host computer via a PC interface board options ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus Install the PC interface
322. uieds 111 Execution Mode2 Papen E EE E RE S E E ET 113 Loading flash memory Page iisresiseei sssrini esisreonepespreea isas ei svshevgedseasvevsgeese s 115 Module Interfaces onean ea i e E diets E E E 116 Sample Program Specifications seeeseseesseeesssteesestsersstrtteresteetesrerrssesresrsreereseeersser 117 CPU Operating Mode Page ricnin ioien oriire ere nesia esiis nr 118 CPU Operating Mode Dialog BOX sssesssseessereesssrserssrsreerestesresesrrsresrenresrenresreerset 119 D vice PASE nnen e ae eae e e E anaE OE OE EEEE EEA 120 IMD Pin Patea a e E EE E E A E ET 122 Cases Different from the CPU Operating Mode Settings eee eeeeeees 123 Memory Type Page is cseccstccsessse sec erpe ne sarase Sei astetesessessseesnsstenasdes E Aa IS EEES ra ia 125 VO Port Page nieren ai tees o E E EEE E EE Ea 127 H UDI JTAG Clock Page niiret resies s p EE EEEE Eat 128 Realtime Executionissa ores en Eeue os sets TE EEEE EE E iie 129 Bmulation Modes A E EET 130 Restrictions on Emulation Modes essseesseesesesesereresreeresrerreesteeresrenreseerrnsrsrreresreet 131 xiii RENESAS Table 5 21 Table 5 22 Table 5 23 Table 5 24 Table 5 25 Table 5 26 Table 5 27 Table 5 28 Table 5 29 Table 5 30 Table 5 31 Table 5 32 Table 5 33 Table 5 34 Table 5 35 Table 5 36 Table 5 37 Table 5 38 Table 5 39 Table 5 40 Table 5 41 Table 5 42 Table 5 43 Table 5 44 Table 5 45 Table 5 46 Table 5 47 Table 5 48 Table 5 49 Tabl
323. uisition xi Trace Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C 1 type stop address H O 2 type range direction read Edit Reset Reset AIl Set Condition Figure 5 51 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Condition A Page 188 RENESAS Table 5 61 Condition A B C Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Trace Condition A B or C Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 8 Settings for Trace Condition X1 to X8 X A B or C Edit Modifies the Trace Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Trace Condition Xn dialog box X A B or C n channel number Set Condition Modifies the Trace Condition A or B settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box This option is not displayed on the Condition C page Reset Clears the Trace Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Reset All Clears all Trace Condition A B or C settings in the Condition list box Click condition 7 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Trace Condition A7 dialog box General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay C Range Trace Stop Figure 5 52 Trace Condition A7 Dialog Box General Page Select Trace Stop trace stop mode on the General
324. ult setting is H 1 Any value from H 1 to H FFFF can be set here Normal Translates addresses according to the current state of the emulator When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the address is within the table s range the address is translated according to the VP_MAP table When the address is beyond the table s range the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the corresponding command is input When the VP_MAP table is disabled the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the command is input Physical Space Sets the address space as physical addresses Virtual Space Sets the address space as virtual addresses ASID Sets an ASID value for use when a virtual address is specified This is only enabled when the Virtual Space radio button is selected When a software break is set the instruction at the specified address is replaced It is only possible to set a software break in the RAM area including the standard emulation memory 140 RENESAS However it is not possible to set a software breakpoint at an address that satisfies any of these conditions e The address holds H 0000 e The address is used as part of a software sequential breakpoint e The address is in any area other than CS area except the internal RAM area e An instruction which may satisfy Break Condition U2 e The address of the delay slot for a delayed branch instruction Notes 1 When the satisfac
325. ultiple of H 800000 and the end address will be rounded up to one less than a multiple of H 800000 Example To set the address range in 16 bit bus width from H 1000000 to H 13FFFFF as the emulation memory area MS H 1000000 H 13FFFFF EMULATOR 16 Note Refer to appendix E 2 Emulation Memory 300 RENESAS 6 2 14 MEMORYAREA SET MAS Command syntax and parameters e Setting mas lt memory_area gt asid lt asid gt e Display mas Parameter Type Description lt memory_area gt Keyword Sets the memory space normal The emulator can use physical and virtual address space physical The emulator can use physical address space virtual The emulator can use virtual address space lt asid gt Numeric Sets the ASID value within the range from H 0 to H FF Description This command loads verifies saves and displays memory and sets memory space and displays memory contents when the user uses commands to modify memory contents Examples 1 To set the memory space to physical space and execute commands to load verify save display memory and modify memory MAS PHYSICAL 2 To set the memory space to virtual address whose ASID value is H 10 and to execute command to load verify save display memory and modify memory MAS VIRTUAL ASID H 10 3 To display the setting MAS The following shows the display format gt MAS memoryarea_set virtual asid D 16 301 RENESAS Notes
326. ults in detail because system defects may arise for a number of reasons If the cause of the error is an emulator defect execute the provided diagnostic program to collect the internal details from the emulator Please inform us of the results of testing For details on the diagnostic program refer to the attached Descriptive Notes on the Diagnostic Program 65 RENESAS START Emulator syste System failure defect System defect Emulator monitor Console Yes message connected displayed correctly Power lamp on Connect with power on Check power supply correctly breaker fuse outlet No to emulator Get ready to Defect in source power on power or emulator power Failure Fuse fail again Have the diagnosis occurred test of the emulator Power lamp monitor at power Emulator defect on passed System fan working EEA defect Switch defect initiated aE Systemi 3 Correct system defect correctly program installed Re install correct system program Have the diagnosis test of the emulator Is it an error system program at generated by pwer on passed register program execution break System defect System eh a defect DCONT e
327. un Time and Execution Count Table 5 87 Display Format of Results When Count is Selected Item Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 RATE Proportion of total execution time numerical value RUN TIME Execution time E COUNT Number of calls of this subroutine TOTAL RUN TIME Total execution time H hours M minutes S seconds US microseconds NS nanoseconds 235 RENESAS Graph Select Graph to produce a display of the execution time ratios of the user program as shown in figure 5 83 Performance Analysis Graph _ Oy x Used 1 2 3 a Display type Execution time ratio in graph form MODE RATE 6 16 26 36 46 5 6 66 76 86 96 166 11 3 6 I2 D 24 1 22326333 ee HHH HH HH HHH HHH HHH HH HH JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE ME EE TOTAL RUN TIME D OGAGH 00H 12S 535058US 466NS Figure 5 83 Performance Analysis Window Execution Time Ratios Table 5 88 Display Format of Results When Graph is Selected Item Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 RATE Proportions of executi
328. ure 6 1 Address Translations sics nein p e A EE II RS EEEN 328 Hiu Al Basic Busi Cy Clee re aa a e a rr arr O EES EEE ENERE Enn 340 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 1 esssesseesessereesssesrrsrrsrrerrsreersserrreerrenresrenreseeeeses 341 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 2 oo cece cececseeeeeeeceeeeeseeeecnsecssecsaecsaecsaecseeeaeeeaes 342 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 3 0 ee eceeseesceescesecesecesecseecaeecseseeeseeeeeeeeereneenaees 343 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 4 oo cece cececseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeecesecesecsaecsaecsaecsaeeaeeeaes 344 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 5 0 eceecseescesscesecesecssecsecaeecaeeeeeseeeeeeeesrenseennees 345 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 6 esssesseseesseressseesrsresresrrseerrsserrreesrenresreneeseeresse 346 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 7 0 ee eceesseescesscesecesecesecsecaeecseeeeeseeeseeeeeseeseensees 347 Figure B 1 Recommended Dimensions for Mount Pad Top View cceseescesecssecseeeneeenes 350 Figure B 2 Restrictions on Parts Location ec ec eeeescesscesecesecesecssecseecaeeeseeeaeeeeeeseeeesenseeaeenaes 351 Figure B 3 Recommended Dimensions for Mount Pad Top View cceseescesecssecseeeneeenes 353 Figure B 4 Restrictions on Parts Location eee eceecceescesecesecesecesecseecaeeeseseeeeeeeesseeereeseeeaeenaes 354 Figure Ci1 Installing the IC SOCK Gt ses ssepek ecces
329. us conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal and control signal conditions Count Sets satisfaction count conditions Delay Sets delay conditions Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Break Condition A7 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified hardware break conditions will now be displayed as condition 7 in the Condition list box Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Hardware break conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The following sections describe the pages of the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box 151 RENESAS a Address Page Use this page to specify an address bus condition Figure 5 24 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Address Page 152 RENESAS Table 5 33 Address Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no address condition Address The condition is satisfied when an address in the range above Start or that is selected by Mask is accessed Range The condition is satisfied when an address in the range set as Start End is accessed VP_MAP Selects translation of addresses in the range from Start to End according to the VP_MAP command Addresses are not
330. us contents of trace Access Cycle information acquired when an SDRAM has been accessed Checking this option enables editing Initial value Enabled Note The two types of errors listed below must be considered for time stamping e A margin of error with 1 resolution a margin of error with 20 ns occurs when the resolution is 20 ns e Frequency stability of the crystal oscillating module for time stamping 0 01 Click the Apply button to set the minimum time then click the Close button 5 6 2 External Bus Trace Timing The timing for the acquisition of trace information in the trace buffer depends on the memory space being accessed e Normal SRAM ROM and PCMCIA On the last rising edge of the CKIO clock before the current bus cycle ends e DRAM When the CASxx signal is negated e SDRAM On the rising edge of the CKIO clock when the CS signal is asserted In each bus cycle the number of cycles between the end of the previous bus cycle and the end of the current bus cycle is measured An example of a bus trace timing for access to an area of normal SRAM is shown in figure 5 58 198 RENESAS CKO 1131 0 RD D 31 0 Read INEX D 31 0 Write C S es es a O 2 3 clocks Figure 5 58 Bus Trace for Normal SRAM 1 Trace timing for read cycles 2 Trace timing for write cycles A Trace timing fo
331. ware Proceed with installation by following instructions provided by the install wizard 3 4 1 Setting Up the PCI Interface Board on Windows 98 or Windows Me When Using the PCI Interface Board e Install the provided software Select PCI Card Driver as the component e Exit the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch e Install the PCI interface board into the host computer e Turn on the host computer Hardware will be acknowledged and driver installation will start automatically e Select Search for the best driver for your device for driver installation and select Specify a location for the location e Specify lt Drive gt DRIVERS PCI 95 for the location lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive e Check that PCIHEI Rev 1 has been detected and complete driver installation 38 RENESAS When Using the PC Interface Card e Install the provided software Select PC Card Driver PCMCIA as the component e Install the PC interface card into the host computer e Hardware will be acknowledged and driver installation will start automatically e Select Search for the best driver for your device for driver installation and select Specify a location for the location e Specify lt Drive gt DRIVERS PCMCIA 95 for the location lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive e Check that E6000 PC Card has been detected and complete driver installation When Using the PC Interface Board e Refer to
332. will restart at the instruction following the SLEEP instruction e Trace Trace information is not acquired in these modes e Memory access with emulator functions For information on displaying and modifying the contents of memory in the sleep and software standby modes refer to section 3 Precautions before Use in the SH7729R E8000S Notes on Usage D 3 Interrupts During execution and step execution the user can interrupt the MPU D4 Control Input Signals RESETP RESETM BREQ and WAIT The MPU control input signals are RESETP RESETM BREQ and WAIT The RESETP and RESETM signals are only valid when emulation has been started with normal program execution i e the RESETP and RESETM signals are invalid when emulation has been started with step execution The BREQ and WAIT signals are valid when displaying or updating the memory contents and during normal program execution and step execution The RESETP and RESETM signals are not input to the MPU when emulation is suspended break The BREQ and WAIT signals are valid when enabled by a setting in the Configuration dialog box The input of the RESETP BREQ or WAIT signal during execution or step execution can be disabled by a setting in the Configuration dialog box 366 RENESAS D 5 Bus State Controller The wait state controller has a programmable wait mode and a WAIT pin input mode The programmable wait mode is valid when the emulation memory or user external memory
333. x003fffe8 Ox003fffec OxO003 f f 0 OxO003 f f 4 OxO003 f f 8 Ox003ffffc Ox003 f fd0 SS Ge Gt Set yt eet et Figure 4 25 Watch Window Display Example 1 To execute two steps use the Step In command twice 00003036 0000303e 00003042 0000304a 0000304e 00002056 o00030Sa o00030Se Break sortia i a 0 a 9 max 0 change a min al9 max a 0 while l Figure 4 26 Source Window Step Out Step In The value of variable max displayed in the Watch Window window is changed to the maximum data value 96 RENESAS Watch Window Oo Orx o Value airs eats 0x003fffd8 1ong 10 yy H 00000000 Ox003fffd8 H 00000daa Ox003fffdc o H 000020da H 00002704 H 00002f5a H 00003ead H 0000421f H 00004did H 000053dc px003fffel Ox003fffe4 0x003ff fes Ox003fffec OxO003f f f 0 Ox003f f f 4 OxO03 f S H 00005665 H 00005665 Ox003ffffc Ox003fffd0 Se Se Se Se Set et Ge Oe 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ax ji ji Figure 4 27 Watch Window Display Example 2 97 RENESAS 4 11 3 Executing Step Over Command The Step Over command executes a line that calls a function as a single step e Before executing the Step Over command execute two steps up to a line that calls the change function by using the Step In command twice fA TUTORIAL c BE E Line Address Label Source
334. xecuted in the big endian To execute TUTORIAL ABS in little endian recompile the file When a file is recompiled addresses may differ from those described in the manual 2 Sample programs were created through HEW v1 2 An older version cannot open the workspace provided with the sample programs In this case create a new workspace 3 The CPU option was SH3 DSP when the sample file was created Optimization was not used If a file is recompiled with a different setting addresses may differ from those described in the manual 71 RENESAS 4 2 Running the HDI e Torun the HDI select the SH7729R E8000S Emulator Software Hitachi Debugging Interface from the Start menu Accessories S StartUp gt MS DOS Prompt BJ Windows Explorer Tn Programs Ay Documents ER Settings Te He ra Run Figure 4 1 Start Menu The HDI window as shown in figure 4 2 is displayed Here the Select Session dialog box is displayed Select the target MPU name of the installed HDI and click the OK button If the emulator mode is not correctly set the HDI will not operate normally In such a case change the settings of the CPU Operating Mode in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box Settings of the MPU s operating mode can be made in the CPU Operating Mode Table 4 2 lists the setting examples of the CPU Operating Mode to run the sample program CS6 in I O Port can only be specified for the SH7706 72 RENESAS Table 4 2
335. y 7 Empty 8 Empty Figure 5 23 Break Dialog Box Condition A Page 150 RENESAS Table 5 31 Condition A B C Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Break Condition A B or C Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 8 Settings for Break Condition x1 to x8 x A B or C Edit Modifies the Break Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Break Condition Xn dialog box X A B or C n channel number Set Condition Modifies the Break Condition A or B settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box This option is not displayed on the Condition C page Reset Clears the Break Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Reset All Clears all Break Condition A B or C settings in the Condition list box Click condition 7 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Break Condition A7 dialog box Hardware break conditions are specified in the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box which has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 32 However Break Condition C1 to C8 dialog box only has the Address page Table 5 32 Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Page Description Address Sets address b
336. y Mapping Dialog Box Option Description From To Mapping Displays memory address ranges and memory type settings Target Device configuration Displays the memory mapping of the internal module INTERNAL I O System memory resources Displays the total and remaining capacities of the emulation memory Map type Selects the map type cannot be specified Edit Allows modification of the memory allocation information selected by From To Mapping by displaying the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box Add Allows the allocation of new memory by displaying the Add Memory Mapping dialog box Reset Clears the memory allocation information selected under From To Mapping Reset All Clears all memory allocation information under From To Mapping Click the Close button to close the dialog box Click Add button to open the Add Memory Mapping dialog box to allocate emulation memory To modify the allocation of emulation memory select the memory contents for modification from From To Mapping then click the Edit button The Edit Memory Mapping dialog box will be displayed The Add Memory Mapping and Edit Memory Mapping dialog boxes contain the same items Edit Memory Mapping x Memory Mapping H 003FFFFF Setting EMULATION AREA 32 bit Cancel Help Figure 5 87 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog Box 242 RENESAS Table 5 95 Configuration Items of the Edit Memory Mapp
337. y channel 1 and execution continues sb Internal sequential break mode 1 A break occurs when break conditions set by Break Condition U2 1 are satisfied in the sequence of 2 1 timcb Measures the execution time with the execution time measurement function by specifying the condition no_break Temporarily disables the software and hardware break conditions Description This command displays and sets emulation mode during user program execution Examples 1 To set the emulation mode so that the user program is executed by inputting the RESETP signal to the MPU at intervals of 100 ms GP EML MODE 100MS To display the current emulation mode during user program execution GP The display format is as follows gt GP Emulator execution mode Cyclic reset 100 ms Notes When the user selects 6 5us to 1s or timcb for the emulation mode the emulator will disable all trace and break conditions Also the emulator cannot halt trace when the user selects the Halt button in the Trace window When the user selects sb the user must set Break Condition U When the user selects sb pabreak or patrace for the emulation mode the emulator will disable the software break conditions 298 RENESAS 6 2 12 ID ID Command syntax and parameters id Description This command displays the emulator system program version Example To display the emulator system program version ID The display format
338. y this condition DMA DMA cycles satisfy this condition Note Select All in the Bus State group box when X Bus data or Y Bus data is selected for the data condition The read write cycle condition is set under Read Write Table 5 54 Read Write Group Box Option Description Read Write Either read write cycles satisfy this condition Read Read cycles satisfy this condition Write Write cycles satisfy this condition 178 RENESAS e Count Page Use this page to specify a satisfaction count condition Figure 5 43 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Count Page Table 5 55 Count Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no satisfaction count condition Count Sets the satisfaction count condition The default is D 1 Any value in the range from D 1 to D 4095 can be set here 179 RENESAS f Break Condition U3 U4 Dialog Box Break Condition U3 General Figure 5 44 Break Condition U3 Dialog Box Break Condition U4 General LDTLE Figure 5 45 Break Condition U4 Dialog Box Table 5 56 Break Condition U3 U4 Page Options Option Description General Specifies the internal I O area access conditions for Break Condition U3 Specifies the LDTLB instruction execution break conditions for Break Condition U4 180 RENESAS 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break Overview An internal sequential break set up with break conditions U1 and U2 occurs
339. yed 232 RENESAS Entering a function name in an edit box of the Input Function Range dialog box will automatically set the address range of that function in the area for the user input of addresses to the Address page Input Function Range Subroutine Address _main Cancel Figure 5 80 Input Function Range Dialog Box Displaying the Results of Performance Measurement The results of performance measurement are displayed in the Performance Analysis window To display the results click the right mouse button with the cursor in the Performance Analysis window then select a menu item from the pop up menu The menu items are shown in table 5 85 Table 5 85 Menu Items for Displaying the Results Menu Item Description Address Displays the list of executed addresses default Count Displays the number and period of execution Graph Displays the proportions of execution times to the whole period of execution on a graph 233 RENESAS Address Select Address to produce a list of addresses as shown in figure 5 81 fa Performance Analysis Address Of x Used 1 2 3 Display type Subroutine address list NO NAME MODE CONDITION 11 668666666 666066066 D 6606H 66H 61S 686866US D 66661 I2 66666668 66606128 66666068 00000128 00600012A 80000018A TOTAL RUN TIME D 6666H 66M 12S 535658US 46 ONS Figure 5 81 Performance Analysis Window Measurement of Executed Addre
340. ys the contents of the emulator address translation VP_MAP tables The display format is as follows gt VD lt VADDR_TOP gt lt VADDR_END gt lt PADDR_TOP gt 01000000 0100FFFF 02000000 01010000 0101 FFFF 03000000 a b c ENABLE da a lt VADDR_TOP gt Virtual start address b lt VADDR_END gt Virtual end address c lt PADDR_TOP gt Physical start address d VP_MAP tables enabled Enable or disabled Disable e Enable Disable Enables or disables the settings of the emulator address translation VP_MAP table or indicates the current state The VP_MAP table is initially disabled When the VP_MAP table is enabled load module addresses virtual addresses are translated to the physical address in actual memory When the VP_MAP table is disabled address translation is disabled Address translation is performed for the following commands and functions ASSEMBLE BREAKPOINT BREAKCONDITION_SET BREAKSEQUENCE_SET DATA_CHANGE DATA_SEARCH DISASSEMBLE MEMORY_DISPLAY MEMORY_FILL FILE_LOAD FILE_SAVE and FILE_VERIFY 328 RENESAS Examples 1 3 4 To assign the virtual address range from H 4000 to H 4FFF to the physical address range from H 400000 to H 400FFF VS H 4000 H 4FFF H 400000 To enable VP_MAP table settings VE ENABLE To cancel the VP_MAP table with the virtual start address H 4000 VC H 4000 To cancel all VP_MAP tables vc Notes Virtual addresses for the V

SH7729R E8000S Emulator HS7729REBH81H User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents